INTERNATIONAL HYDROGRAPHIC ORGANIZATION

IHO ECDIS
PRESENTATION LIBRARY

Edition 4.0.0, September 2014

Publication S-52
ANNEX A

Published by the
International Hydrographic Organization
MONACO

PresLib Edition 4.0.0 Part I September 2014

 © Copyright International Hydrographic Organization 2014

This work is copyright. Apart from any use permitted in accordance with the Berne
Convention for the Protection of Literary and Artistic Works (1886), and except in the
circumstances described below, no part may be translated, reproduced by any process,
adapted, communicated or commercially exploited without prior written permission from the
International Hydrographic Bureau (IHB). Copyright in some of the material in this publication
may be owned by another party and permission for the translation and/or reproduction of that
material shall be obtained from the owner.

This document or partial material from this document may be translated, reproduced or
distributed for general information, on no more than a cost recovery basis. Copies may not be
sold or distributed for profit or gain without prior written agreement of the IHB and any other
copyright holders.

In the event that this document or partial material from this document is reproduced,
translated or distributed under the terms described above, the following statements are to be
included:

“Material from IHO publication [reference to extract: Title, Edition] is reproduced with the
permission of the International Hydrographic Bureau (IHB) (Permission No ……./…) acting for
the International Hydrographic Organization (IHO), which does not accept responsibility for
the correctness of the material as reproduced: in case of doubt, the IHO’s authentic text shall
prevail. The incorporation of material sourced from IHO shall not be construed as
constituting an endorsement by IHO of this product.”

“This [document/publication] is a translation of IHO [document/publication] [name]. The IHO

has not checked this translation and therefore takes no responsibility for its accuracy. In case
of doubt the source version of [name] in [language] should be consulted.”

The IHO Logo or other identifiers shall not be used in any derived product without prior
written permission from the IHB.

i
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 FOREWORD

Edition 4.0.0 of the Presentation Library brings into effect all the deferred amendments
issued since Edition 3.4 and also includes other substantial changes to bring it up to date
with the IMO ECDIS Performance Standard requirements, and to provide clearer examples
and guidance. This publication provides a clear, concise and comprehensive guide to
implementing IHO S-52 symbology in ECDIS.

In keeping with previous versions of the presentation library the contents of the symbols,
lookups and other ancillary files are published as a set of files which carry a subscription
charge for each new edition to help to cover maintenance costs. These files are the
authoritative statement of the presentation library contents.

The tables below detail the changes made to create S-52 Presentation Library Edition 4.0.0.

New Mandatory ECDIS Requirements

S-52 Ed.
4.0.0 Description Justification
Clause
Existing feature in e3.4 changed from
optional to mandatory
Ability to turn Isolated Dangers in
10.3.4.4
Shallow Water on/off. This allows the Mariner the flexibility to
navigate in shoal areas with or without the
isolated danger symbol.
SCAMIN is not universally applied by HO’s in
the same way. Mariners need to be able to
10.4.2 Ability to turn SCAMIN on/off.
view all data and need a function to turn the
SCAMIN attribute off.
Existing feature in e3.4 changed from
optional to mandatory
Mandatory impemantation of abaility to
10.5.7
display shallow water pattern. Safety critical feature as it becomes
increasingly difficult to detect the changes in
the depth shades in ECDIS night colour table.
IMO PS Requirement
Detection and Notification of
Navigational Hazard. Lists the S-57
10.5.9 Enables clear and transparent identification of
features and attributes that will raise an
objects that will raise an indication within the
indication.
ECDIS.
IMO PS Requirement

Designed for conditions that require a

highlight in the ECDIS chart area, to conform
to IMO requirements.

IMO has dictated that the colour red is only

10.5.9 New Mariner Object ‘indhlt’
allowed for alarms in ECDIS and that the
colour yellow must be used for warning and
cautions.

Design of a graphical highlight symbol in

colour yellow. The current S-52 traditional
graphical highlight symbol dnghlt is red.

ii
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
S-52 Ed.
4.0.0 Description Justification
Clause
IMO PS Requirement
Detection of Areas, for which Special
Conditions Exist. Lists the S-57 features
10.5.10 Enables clear and transparent identification of
and attributes that will raise an indication
objects that will raise an indication or alert
or alert as defined by the Mariner.
within ECDIS as defined by the Mariner.
Detecting the Safety Contour. Lists the
S-57 feature and attribute combinations
IMO PS Requirement
required to detect the safety contour.
IMO PS states that rocks, wrecks and
Rocks, Wrecks and Obstructions have
10.5.12 obstruction will only be an indication.
been removed in e4.0.0 from detection
Removing them from detecting the safety
of the safety contour process and
contour will reduce the number of audible
moved to Detection and Notification of
alerts in ECDIS.
Navigational Hazards. This change is in
line with the IMO PS requirement.
IMO PS Requirement

New viewing group created to allow Mariner feedback during IMO Oct 2012
separate display on/off for INFORM01 ECDIS meeting expressed irritation at not
10.6.1.1 symbol: “Highlight info” for INFORM and being able to control the display of features in
NINFOM. “Highlight document” for ECDIS as there were not enough selectors.
TXTDSC, NTXDSC and PICREP. This was sighted as a major reason for
cluttered ECDIS display.

IMO PS Requirement
Use of new symbols for identifying
10.7.2
automatic ENC updates.
Previously no standardized symbols available.
IMO PS Requirement

Adoption of the IMO PS naming Mariner feedback during IMO Oct 2012
convention for ECDIS viewing groups ECDIS meeting expressed irritation at not
14.3
available in ECDIS. being able to control the display of features in
ECDIS as there were not enough selectors.
This was sighted as a major reason for
cluttered ECDIS display.

Changes and Clarifications

S-52 Ed.
4.0.0 Description Justification
Clause
Inserted Standards Terms and
Definitions.
Clarification
Inserted new text boxes are used to
highlight important text and notes in the
Highlights critical points in ECDIS
new edition of the standard.
presentation for developers.
Error in LUT entries

These objects are part of group 1, skin of

the earth objects, they all have a solid area
FLODOC, PONTON, HULKES display
Annex A fill and should be lowest in the drawing
priority changed from 5 to 1.
priority. Before the change for example
cranes in a flodoc area were masked by
the high priority drawing of solid brown
colour.

iii
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
S-52 Ed.
4.0.0 Description Justification
Clause
The Mariner colours introduced by MD8
Annex A have been included in S-52 e4.0.0.
MD8
App A NINFO has been removed from the list
of colour tokens that can be substituted.
Description of the Symbology
Instructions, removed Backus-Naur
diagrams and replaced with POSIX style
manual pages.
Clarification

Unfortunately despite best efforts ENC from

ECDIS must only display one ENC chart
different HOs sometimes do overlap.
10.1.3 in an area where ENC cells of the same
Previously there was no guidance on how
scale and usage overlap.
overlaps should be handled in ECDIS.
Mixing of overlapping charts created
cluttered and unusable displays.
E3.4 provided two options to perform this
A means to insert a date or date range
function, select date or show all. E4.0.0 has
to display date dependant features.
removed the show all option as it was
10.4 confusing for the Mariner. E4.0.0 has also
New symbol to indicate where in the
introduced a new symbol that will indicate
chart display the objects with temporal
the presence of temporal attributes on
attributes are located.
features.
Use of default symbol NEWOBJ01 if Clarification
10.3.3.8 SYMINS instruction cannot be
understood. Fail safe procedure.
Change
The ECDIS legend will be made
Ensuring the chart legend is available from
available at the position selected by the
10.6.2 the location chosen by the Mariner will
Mariner.
remove any confusion about what data
should be displayed when the own ships
position is not on the ECDIS chart screen.
Change
Guidance on the use of hover over
10.8.5 function for a limited number of S-57 Speeds up chart enquiry by the user.
features. Recommendation from IEC 61174 drafting
committee.
MD8
CSP name change LIGHTS05 -
New colour added, blue and to allow the
LIGHTS06.
display of 360 degree major light sectors
with a nominal range of 10nM or greater.
MD8
CSP name change LITDSN01 -
LITDSN02.
New colour added, blue.
CSP name change SYMINS01 - Clarification
SYMINS02.
Default symbolization instruction added.
MD7
CSP name change SNDFRM03-
SNDFRM04
Introduction of new attribute found by Diver
MD7
CSP name change SOUNDG02 –
SOUNDG03.
No change to CSP, numbering changed as
CSP calls sub-procedure SNDFRM.

iv
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
S-52 Ed.
4.0.0 Description Justification
Clause
MD7
CSP name change WRECKS04 –
WRECKS05. No change to CSP, numbering changed as
CSP calls sub-procedure SNDFRM.
MD7
CSP name change OBSTRN06 –
OBSTRN07.
No change to CSP, numbering changed as
CSP calls sub-procedure SNDFRM.
MD8
CSP name change RESARE03 –
RESARE04. To harmonize portrayal of entry prohibited
restricted areas with INT 1.
MD5
CSP name change DEPARE02 –
DEPARE03. This change should have been already
between Ed 3.3 and Ed 3.4.
Clarification
CSP name change SLCONS03 –
SLCONS04. The expert review team found an error in
handling of “low accuracy symbols”.
When areas are split by the ECDIS
8.5.1 screen the system must display centred Clarification
symbols in each part.
Clarification
Display of TS_PAD template in ECDIS
10.9 Previously no guidance on how the data
pick report.
from the S-57 feature TS_PAD should be
presented in the pick report.
S-52 Clarification
All conspicuous symbols must be drawn
ENC
with a 0.6 line width.
Symbol Logical consistency, the more prominent a
All non-conspicuous symbols have 0.3
Catalogu feature the more distinguishable it should
line width.
e be in the ECDIS chart display.
Annex A ALL LUT entries with CONRAD 1 or 3
App B, C, changed to suppressed. Clarification
D, E, F
Clarification
Annex A Found typo style errors have been fixed
App B, C, for CURENT, FERYRT, LNDMRK, As part of the expert review process the
D, E, F RCRTCL, VEGATN. existing printed version of the LUT has
been fixed for typo style errors.
Selected meta object without visible
presentation has been modified to have
Clarification
Annex A viewing group, category, priority, etc.,
App B, C, but still no visible symbol. This allows
A technical method to access meta objects
D, E, F them to be selected for display in a pick
by pick report has been clarified.
report: M_ACCY, M_HOPA, M_SDAT,
M_SREL, M_VDAT.
Clarification
Annex A Selected meta object without visible
Technical possibility for ECDIS and
App B, C, presentation has been modified to have
practical graphical indication for mariner to
D, E, F visible presentation: M_NPUB.
access Nautical publication using Pick
report.

v
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Deletions

S-52 Ed.
3.4 Description Justification
Clause
MSC.191(79) and IEC 62288 set rules
4.1 User Interface Colours
for user interfaces within ECDIS.
Presentation Library 3.4 does not
The Raster-Symbol Description
6 contain any raster symbol definitions
Format
and has never provided details.
Presentation Library 3.4 does not
10.5.7 Raster Image Pattern Definition contain any raster image pattern
definitions.
Raster Image Symbol Module Presentation Library 3.4 does not
10.6.7
Example contain any raster symbols.
All Mariners Objects, symbols and IMO and IEC 62288 is the authority for
LUT entries Mariner objects.

vi
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 CHANGE CONTROL HISTORY SINCE 1996
Amendment Abbreviations: MD Maintenance Document
IA Immediate Amendment
DA Deferred Amendment
Specifications for Chart Content and Display Aspects of ECDIS
(S-52)
Previous Edition Amendments Applied Resulting Edition
"5th Edition,
Edition 5.0 (Dec 1996) Mar 1999
amended Mar 1999"
"5th Edition, "5th Edition, amended
Dec 2001
amended Mar 1999" Mar 1999 & Dec 2001"
MD7 +
"5th Edition, amended Edition 6.0
Merging with former S-52
Mar 1999 & Dec 2001" (Mar 2010)
App. 2 (C&S specs)
Deleted Annex B and
Edition 6.1
Edition 6.0 (Mar 2010) corrections made to Annex C
(Sep 2014)
(not from an amendment)

Guidance on Updating the Electronic Navigational Chart (S-52, Appendix 1)

Current Edition Amendments Applied

Edition 3.0 (Dec 1996) No revisions since 1996

Colours & Symbols Specifications (Former S-52, Appendix 2)

Previous Edition Amendments Applied Resulting Edition

Edition 3.0 (Jul 1996) July 1997 Edition 4.0 (Jul 1997)

Edition 4.0 (Jul 1997) MD1 IA i01 Edition 4.1 (Jan 1999)
MD2 DA d02
Edition 4.1 (Jan 1999) Edition 4.2 (Mar 2004)
MD4 DA d6
Edition 4.2 (Mar 2004) MD5 DA d7 Edition 4.3 (Jan 2008)

Glossary of ECDIS-Related Terms Specifications (Former S-52, Appendix 3)

Previous Edition Amendments Applied Resulting Edition
S-32, Appendix 1
Edition 3.0 (Dec 1997) Transferred to S-32
(Sep 2007)

Presentation Library (Annex A to former S-52, Appendix 2)

Previous Amendments Addendum
Resulting Edition Digital PresLib
Edition Applied to Part I
Edition 3.0 PRSLIB03.dai (Jul 1997)
MD1 IA i01 Edition 3.1 (Jan 1999)
(July 1997) PSLB03_1.dai (Dec 1998)
Edition 3.1 PSTY03_0.dai (Jun 1999)
MD 3 IA i04 Edition 3.2 (May 2000) 2003
(Jan 1999) PSLB03_2.dai (May 2000)
MD2 DA d02
Edition 3.2 PSTY3_2b.dai (Oct 2001)
MD3 DA d05 Edition 3.3 (2004) 2007
(May 2000) PSLB03_3.dai (Mar 2004)
MD4 DA d6
MD5 IA i5
Edition 3.3
MD5 DA d7 Edition 3.4 (2008) PSLB03_4.dai (Jan 2008) 2008
(2004)
MD6 IA i6
MD7 DA d8
Edition 3.4
MD8 DA d9 Edition 4.0.0 (Sep 2014) PSLB04_0.dai (Sep 2014) 2014
(2008)
and other edits
The grace periods from the issuing date of a new edition after which changes are required to be
included in an ECDIS nominally are:
- for new development one year
- for new selling (already type-approved before date of issue) one year

vii
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
GENERAL LAYOUT OF THE PRESENTATION LIBRARY

PART I:

USERS' MANUAL
Sections 1-10 Description of symbolisation methods
Sections 11 -12 Description of the Digital Presentation Library

TABLES AND SYMBOLISATION PROCEDURES

Section 13 Conditional Symbology Procedures(UML)
Section 14 Tables
Section 15 Symbol library for use on ECDIS

ECDIS CHART 1, SYMBOL PLOTS &COLOUR TEST DIAGRAM

Section 16 ECDIS Chart 1, Symbol plots& colour test diagram
Section 17 Contents of the Digital Presentation Library
Section 18 Use of Digital Chart 1 & Colour Test Diagram

Appendix A Colour Tables: Day, Dusk, Night

Appendix B Look-up Table for areas with plain boundaries
Appendix C Look-up Table for areas with symbolized boundaries
Appendix D Look-up Table for lines
Appendix E Look-up Table for paper chart points
Appendix F Look-up Table for simplified points

Addendum S-52 ENC Symbol Catalogue: Paper Based Symbol Specifications

PART II:

MARINERS' NAVIGATIONAL OBJECTS

sections 1,2 Introduction, explanations
section 3 Mariners' Object Classes
section 4 Navigational Attributes
section 5 References

DIGITAL FILES ON CD-ROM:

- .DAI file version of the Presentation Library

- pseudo-S-57 file version of ECDIS Chart 1
- colour test diagram (pseudo S-57 code with look-up table)

viii
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 PART I
_______________

USERS' MANUAL

TABLES AND SYMBOLISATION PROCEDURES

SYMBOL LIBRARY AND SYMBOL PLOTS

REFERENCES AND NOTES

1
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Page intentionally left blank

2
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
FOREWORD ........................................................................................................................................................... II
GENERAL LAYOUT OF THE PRESENTATION LIBRARY ............................................................................................VIII
1. SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................................ 9
1.1 USE OF LANGUAGE ................................................................................................................................... 9
2. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS............................................................................................................................. 10
2.1 ALARM ................................................................................................................................................ 10
2.2 ALERT .................................................................................................................................................. 10
2.3 CAUTION .............................................................................................................................................. 10
2.4 CIE COLOURS........................................................................................................................................ 10
2.5 COLOUR TOKEN ..................................................................................................................................... 10
2.6 COMPLEX LINE STYLES ............................................................................................................................ 10
2.7 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE ..................................................................................................... 10
2.8 DISPLAY CATEGORY ................................................................................................................................ 10
2.9 DISPLAY PRIORITY .................................................................................................................................. 11
2.10 ECDIS ................................................................................................................................................. 11
2.11 ECDIS CHART 1 .................................................................................................................................... 11
2.12 GEOMETRIC PRIMITIVE............................................................................................................................ 11
2.13 INDICATION .......................................................................................................................................... 11
2.14 LOOK-UP TABLE ..................................................................................................................................... 11
2.15 NO SYMBOL OBJECT ............................................................................................................................... 11
2.16 OPAQUE FILL ......................................................................................................................................... 11
2.17 PATTERN FILL ........................................................................................................................................ 11
2.18 PIVOT POINT......................................................................................................................................... 11
2.19 RADAR PRIORITY .................................................................................................................................... 12
2.20 RADAR TRANSPARENCY ........................................................................................................................... 12
2.21 SCAMIN ............................................................................................................................................. 12
2.22 SIMPLE LINE STYLES................................................................................................................................ 12
2.23 SYMBOL SIZE......................................................................................................................................... 12
2.24 SYMBOLOGY INSTRUCTION....................................................................................................................... 12
2.25 SYSTEM ELECTRONIC NAVIGATIONAL CHART (SENC) .................................................................................... 12
2.26 TEXT LABEL ........................................................................................................................................... 12
2.27 TFT..................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.28 TRANSFER, EXCHANGE ............................................................................................................................ 12
2.29 TRANSPARENT FILL ................................................................................................................................. 12
2.30 UNKNOWN OBJECT VECTOR FORMAT SYMBOL ............................................................................................ 12
2.31 VECTOR FORMAT SYMBOL ....................................................................................................................... 13
2.32 WARNING ............................................................................................................................................ 13
3 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................................. 14
4 STRUCTURE OF THE PRESENTATION LIBRARY ............................................................................................... 15
4.1 S-57 AND THE PRESENTATION MODEL FOR ECDIS ....................................................................................... 16
4.2 STRUCTURE OF THE PRESENTATION MODEL FOR ECDIS ................................................................................ 16
4.3 SUPPLY AND AMENDMENT OF THE PRESENTATION LIBRARY ............................................................................ 16
5 BASIC CONCEPT OF ECDIS DISPLAY ............................................................................................................... 18
6 THE ELEMENTS OF THE PRESENTATION LIBRARY - AN OVERVIEW ................................................................ 21
6.1 THE COLOUR CODING SCHEME ................................................................................................................. 22
6.2 THE LIBRARY OF SYMBOLS, FILL STYLES AND LINE STYLES ............................................................................... 22
6.2.1 SYMBOLS.............................................................................................................................................. 22

3
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 6.2.2 AREA FILLS ........................................................................................................................................... 22
6.2.3 LINE STYLES .......................................................................................................................................... 23
6.3 SYMBOLOGY INSTRUCTIONS ..................................................................................................................... 23
6.4 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURES ................................................................................................... 23
6.5 THE LOOK-UP TABLES AND OTHER SYMBOLIZING INSTRUCTIONS ...................................................................... 24
6.6 MARINERS' ECDIS CHART 1 AND COLOUR DIFFERENTIATION TEST DIAGRAMS ................................................... 24
6.7 MARINERS' NAVIGATIONAL OBJECT CLASSES ............................................................................................... 25
6.8 TEST EDITION OF THE PRESENTATION LIBRARY ............................................................................................. 25
7 DESCRIPTION OF THE COLOUR CODING SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 26
7.1 THE SECTIONS OF THE COLOUR SCHEME ..................................................................................................... 26
7.1.1 GENERAL COLOURS ................................................................................................................................ 26
7.1.2 CHART COLOURS ................................................................................................................................... 27
7.1.3 RADAR IMAGE OVERLAY COLOURS ............................................................................................................ 28
7.1.4 MARINERS' & NAVIGATION INFORMATION COLOURS ................................................................................... 29
7.1.5 OTHER COLOURS................................................................................................................................... 29
7.1.6 COLOUR SECTION V / SHIP SYMBOL & PLANNED ROUTE............................................................................... 30
7.1.7 USER INTERFACE COLOURS ..................................................................................................................... 30
8. THE VECTOR SYMBOL DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE .......................................................................................... 31
8.1 SIZE AND ORIENTATION OF A VECTOR-SYMBOL ............................................................................................ 33
8.2 DESCRIPTION OF COMPLEX LINE STYLE RENDERING. ...................................................................................... 33
8.3 VECTOR FORMAT EXAMPLES .................................................................................................................... 35
8.3.1 SAMPLE DEFINITION IN VECTOR FORMAT ................................................................................................... 35
8.3.3 SAMPLE IMPLEMENTATION OF THE COMPOSITE COMPLEX LINESTYLE SYMBOLS .................................................. 37
8.4 SYMBOLOGY INSTRUCTION FOR AREA OBJECTS ............................................................................................ 39
8.4.1 FILL OPERATIONS .................................................................................................................................. 39
8.4.2 TRANSPARENT FILL ................................................................................................................................ 39
8.5 AREA SYMBOLIZATION BY A CENTRED SYMBOL ............................................................................................. 40
8.5.1 POSITIONING CENTRED SYMBOLS AND TEXT ................................................................................................. 40
8.5.1.1 CENTRED SYMBOL .................................................................................................................................. 41
8.6 AREA BOUNDARIES ................................................................................................................................ 43
8.6.1 PLAIN AND SYMBOLIZED BOUNDARIES ....................................................................................................... 43
8.6.2 MASKED LINES ...................................................................................................................................... 44
8.6.3 AREA BORDERS ..................................................................................................................................... 44
8.7 COLOURS AND DESCRIPTIONS FOR SYMBOLS ............................................................................................... 44
9 DESCRIPTION OF THE SYMBOLOGY COMMANDS ......................................................................................... 46
9.1 SHOWTEXT ........................................................................................................................................ 47
9.1.1 SHOWTEXT EXAMPLES ......................................................................................................................... 50
9.2 SHOWPOINT ...................................................................................................................................... 52
9.2.1 SHOWPOINT EXAMPLE ............................................................................................................................... 52
9.3 SHOWLINE ......................................................................................................................................... 54
9.3.1 SHOWLINE EXAMPLE .................................................................................................................................. 54
9.4 SHOWAREA ....................................................................................................................................... 55
9.4.1 SHOWAREA EXAMPLES ........................................................................................................................ 56
9.5 CALLSYMPROC .................................................................................................................................. 57
10. ECDIS REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................................................. 58
10.1 DATA CONSISTENCY ............................................................................................................................... 58
10.1.1 UNKNOWN OBJECTS .............................................................................................................................. 58
10.1.2 UNKNOWN OR MISSING MANDATORY ATTRIBUTES ...................................................................................... 58
10.1.3 DATA OVERLAPS .................................................................................................................................... 58

4
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 10.1.4 GAPS .................................................................................................................................................. 59
10.1.5 NO DATA COVERAGE ............................................................................................................................. 59
10.1.6 ENC COVERAGE.................................................................................................................................... 59
10.1.7 LIMIT OF ENC COVERAGE: NON-HO DATA ON THE DISPLAY .......................................................................... 59
10.1.8 NO DATA AREAS.................................................................................................................................... 60
10.1.9 SCALE BOUNDARIES ............................................................................................................................... 60
10.1.9.1 CHART SCALE BOUNDARIES ...................................................................................................................... 60
10.1.9.2 GRAPHICAL INDEX OF NAVIGATIONAL PURPOSE ........................................................................................... 60
10.1.10 OVERSCALE ........................................................................................................................................... 60
10.1.10.1 OVERSCALE INDICATION .......................................................................................................................... 61
10.1.10.2 OVERSCALE AREA AT A CHART SCALE BOUNDARY ......................................................................................... 61
10.1.10.3 LARGER SCALE DATA AVAILABLE ............................................................................................................... 63
10.2 QUERIES .............................................................................................................................................. 63
10.3 HOW TO USE THE LOOK-UP TABLES .......................................................................................................... 63
10.3.1 LAYOUT OF THE LOOK-UP TABLES ............................................................................................................. 65
10.3.2 LOOKUP TABLE ENTRY EXAMPLE ............................................................................................................... 65
10.3.3 MATCHING ENTRIES IN THE LOOKUP TABLES............................................................................................... 66
10.3.3.1 LOOK-UP TABLE ENTRY MATCHING .......................................................................................................... 66
10.3.3.2 LOOK-UP TABLE ATTRIBUTE MATCHING .................................................................................................... 67
10.3.3.3 LOOK-UP TABLE CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY .............................................................................................. 67
10.3.3.4 SYMBOLIZING A NON-ENC OBJECT CLASS ................................................................................................... 67
10.3.3.5 UML DIAGRAM, HOW TO USE THE LOOKUP TABLES .................................................................................... 69
10.3.3.6 NOT SET ATTRIBUTES.............................................................................................................................. 70
10.3.3.7 'NO SYMBOL' - OBJECTS ......................................................................................................................... 70
10.3.3.8 PRESENTATION OF NEW OBJECT NEWOBJ ................................................................................................ 70
10.3.4 DISPLAY PRIORITY, RADAR PRIORITY, DISPLAY CATEGORY, VIEWING GROUP ..................................................... 70
10.3.4.1 DISPLAY PRIORITY ................................................................................................................................. 70
10.3.4.2 RADAR FLAG ...................................................................................................................................... 72
10.3.4.3 DISPLAY CATEGORIES ............................................................................................................................. 72
10.3.4.4 INDEPENDENT MARINER SELECTIONS ......................................................................................................... 73
10.3.4.5 MARINERS’ OBJECTS .............................................................................................................................. 75
10.3.4.6 VIEWING GROUPS.................................................................................................................................. 75
10.3.4.7 DISPLAY PRIORITY & DISPLAY CATEGORY IN CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURES......................................... 76
10.3.5 CHECK SYMBOL SY(CHKSYM 01) ............................................................................................................ 76
10.4 DISPLAY OF OBJECTS - DATE DEPENDENT AND DISPLAY SCALE ......................................................................... 76
10.4.1 DATE DEPENDENT ENC OBJECTS .............................................................................................................. 76
10.4.2 SCALE-DEPENDENT OBJECTS ................................................................................................................... 77
10.5 IMO PRESENTATION INSTRUCTIONS NOT HANDLED BY LOOK-UP TABLES ......................................................... 77
10.5.1 SCALEBAR AND LATITUDE SCALE................................................................................................................ 78
10.5.4 NORTH ARROW ..................................................................................................................................... 78
10.5.5 GRATICULE ........................................................................................................................................... 78
10.5.6 DISPLAY MODE ..................................................................................................................................... 78
10.5.7 SHALLOW WATER PATTERN ..................................................................................................................... 78
10.5.8 BLACK LEVEL ADJUSTMENT SYMBOL .......................................................................................................... 79
10.5.9 DETECTION AND NOTIFICATION OF NAVIGATIONAL HAZARDS ......................................................................... 79
10.5.10 DETECTION OF AREAS, FOR WHICH SPECIAL CONDITIONS EXIST. ..................................................................... 81
10.5.11 VISUALIZATION OF THE SAFETY CONTOUR ................................................................................................... 82
10.5.12 DETECTION OF SAFETY CONTOUR .............................................................................................................. 82
10.6 HO-SPECIFIED DISPLAY FEATURES ............................................................................................................ 83
10.6.1 ADDITIONAL CHART INFORMATION............................................................................................................ 83
10.6.1.1 STANDARD ATTRIBUTES INFORM, NINFOM, TXTDSC, NTXTDS AND PICREP.............................................. 83
10.6.1.2 DISPLAY OF NATIONAL LANGUAGE ATTRIBUTES AND CONTENT ....................................................................... 84

5
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 10.6.2 ECDIS LEGEND ..................................................................................................................................... 84
10.6.3 LIGHT DESCRIPTION TEXT STRINGS ............................................................................................................ 86
10.7 DISPLAYING MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC UPDATES AND ADDED CHART INFORMATION ......................................... 88
10.7.1 MANUAL UPDATES ................................................................................................................................ 88
10.7.1.1 ADDED FEATURE .................................................................................................................................... 88
10.7.1.2 DELETED FEATURE ................................................................................................................................. 88
10.7.1.3 MOVED FEATURE................................................................................................................................... 89
10.7.1.4 MODIFIED FEATURE ............................................................................................................................... 89
10.7.2.1 ADDED FEATURE .................................................................................................................................... 90
10.7.2.2 DELETED FEATURE.................................................................................................................................. 90
10.7.2.3 MOVED FEATURE................................................................................................................................... 90
10.7.2.4 MODIFIED FEATURE ............................................................................................................................... 90
10.8 CURSOR PICK AND INTERFACE PANEL DISPLAY ............................................................................................. 91
10.8.1 PICK REPORT DESCRIPTIONS .................................................................................................................... 92
10.8.2 SORTING ............................................................................................................................................. 92
10.8.3 USER DEFINED CURSER PICK PARAMETERS ................................................................................................. 92
10.8.4 SORTING BY SIGNIFICANCE ...................................................................................................................... 92
10.8.5 HOVER-OVER FUNCTION......................................................................................................................... 92
10.8.6 UNKNOWN ATTRIBUTES ......................................................................................................................... 93
10.9 TIDAL STREAM PANELS : S-57 FEATURE TS_PAD ........................................................................................ 93
11 DIGITAL PRESENTATION LIBRARY FORMAT DESCRIPTION ........................................................................ 95
11.1 FORMAT OF THE LIBRARY IDENTIFICATION MODULE...................................................................................... 95
11.1.1 LIBRARY IDENTIFICATION MODULE............................................................................................................ 95
11.1.2 LIBRARY IDENTIFICATION (LBID) .............................................................................................................. 95
11.2 FORMAT OF THE LOOK-UP TABLE ENTRY MODULE ....................................................................................... 97
11.2.1 LOOK-UP TABLE ENTRY MODULE.............................................................................................................. 97
11.2.2 LOOK-UP TABLE ENTRY IDENTIFIER-FIELD (LUPT)........................................................................................ 98
11.2.3 ATTRIBUTE COMBINATION- FIELD (ATTC) .................................................................................................. 99
11.2.4 INSTRUCTION-FIELD (INST) ..................................................................................................................... 99
11.2.5 DISPLAY CATEGORY-FIELD (DISC) ............................................................................................................. 99
11.2.6 LOOK-UP COMMENT-FIELD (LUCM) ........................................................................................................ 99
11.3 FORMAT OF THE SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE MODULE................................................................................... 100
11.4 FORMAT OF THE COLOUR TABLE MODULE ................................................................................................ 100
11.4.1 COLOUR TABLE MODULE ...................................................................................................................... 100
11.4.2 COLOUR TABLE IDENTIFIER-FIELD (COLS) ................................................................................................ 100
11.5 FORMAT OF THE PATTERN MODULE ........................................................................................................ 101
11.5.1 PATTERN MODULE .............................................................................................................................. 101
11.5.2 PATTERN IDENTIFIER-FIELD (PATT) ........................................................................................................ 102
11.5.3 PATTERN DEFINITION-FIELD (PATD) ...................................................................................................... 102
11.6 FORMAT OF THE SYMBOL MODULE ......................................................................................................... 105
11.6.1 SYMBOL MODULE ............................................................................................................................... 105
11.6.2 SYMBOL IDENTIFIER-FIELD (SYMB) ........................................................................................................ 106
11.6.3 SYMBOL DEFINITION-FIELD (SYMD)....................................................................................................... 106
11.6.4 SYMBOL EXPOSITION- FIELD (SXPO) ...................................................................................................... 107
11.6.5 SYMBOL COLOUR REFERENCE- FIELD (SCRF) ............................................................................................ 107
11.6.6 SYMBOL BITMAP- FIELD (SBTM) ........................................................................................................... 107
11.6.7 SYMBOL VECTOR- FIELD (SVCT) ............................................................................................................ 107
11.6.8 EXAMPLE FOR A VECTOR IMAGE SYMBOL MODULE .................................................................................... 107
11.7 FORMAT OF THE COMPLEX LINESTYLE MODULE ......................................................................................... 108
11.7.1 LINESTYLE MODULE ............................................................................................................................. 108
11.7.2 LINESTYLE IDENTIFIER- FIELD (LNST........................................................................................................ 108
11.7.3 LINESTYLE DEFINITION- FIELD (LIND) ..................................................................................................... 109

6
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 11.7.4 LINESTYLE EXPOSITION- FIELD (LXPO) .................................................................................................... 109
11.7.5 LINESTYLE COLOUR REFERENCE- FIELD (LCRF).......................................................................................... 109
11.7.6 LINESTYLE VECTOR- FIELD (LVCT) .......................................................................................................... 110
11.7.7 EXAMPLE FOR A LINESTYLE MODULE ....................................................................................................... 110
12 LOOK-UP TABLE LISTINGS ....................................................................................................................... 111
13 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE (CSP) DIAGRAMS .................................................................... 112
13.1 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 112
13.1.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................ 112
13.1.2 UML CONSTRUCTS .............................................................................................................................. 112
13.1.4 CSP ARRANGEMENT ............................................................................................................................. 113
13.1.5 LIST OF CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURES ....................................................................................... 114
13.1.6 MARINERS’ SELECTIONS ........................................................................................................................ 114
13.1.7 SHARED SUB-PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................................... 115
13.2.1 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE DEPARE03 ...................................................................................... 118
13.2.2 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE DEPCNT03 ...................................................................................... 124
13.2.3 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE DEPVAL02 ...................................................................................... 127
13.2.4 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE LIGHTS06 ........................................................................................ 131
13.2.5 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE OBSTRN07 ...................................................................................... 139
13.2.6 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE QUAPOS01 ................................................................................ 150
13.2.7 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE QUALIN01 ................................................................................. 152
13.2.8 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE QUAPNT02 ................................................................................ 155
13.2.9 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE RESARE04 .................................................................................. 158
13.2.10 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE RESTRN01.................................................................................. 170
13.2.11 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE RESCSP02 .................................................................................. 172
13.2.12 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE SAFCON01 ................................................................................. 177
13.2.13 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE SLCONS04 ................................................................................. 181
13.2.14 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE SEABED01 ................................................................................. 184
13.2.15 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE SNDFRM04 ................................................................................ 187
12.2.16 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE SOUNDG03................................................................................ 192
13.2.17 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE SYMINS02.................................................................................. 194
13.2.18 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE TOPMAR01 ................................................................................ 196
13.2.19 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE UDWHAZ05 ............................................................................... 200
13.2.20 CONDITIONAL SYMBOLOGY PROCEDURE WRECKS05 ................................................................................ 207
14 TABLES ................................................................................................................................................... 217
14.1 COLOUR TABLES .................................................................................................................................. 217
14.2 VIEWING GROUP LAYERS ....................................................................................................................... 217
14.3 ECDIS VIEWING GROUP IMPLEMENTATION .............................................................................................. 226
14.4 TEXT GROUPINGS................................................................................................................................. 227
14.5 ECDIS TEXT GROUP IMPLEMENTATION .................................................................................................... 228
14.6 ABBREVIATIONS ................................................................................................................................... 228
15 SYMBOL LIBRARY FOR USE ON ECDIS ..................................................................................................... 230
15.1 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 230
15.2 SYMBOL DIAGRAMS ............................................................................................................................. 230
15.2.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE SYMBOL DIAGRAMS .................................................................................................. 230
15.2.2 NOTES ON THE SYMBOL DESCRIPTIONS ..................................................................................................... 232
15.3 INSTRUCTIONS FOR SYMBOLISING POINTS ................................................................................................. 233
15.3.1 REFERENCE TO PRESLIB MANUAL............................................................................................................ 233
15.4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR SYMBOLISING LINES ................................................................................................... 233
15.4.1 REFERENCE TO PRESLIB MANUAL............................................................................................................ 233

7
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 15.4.2 DIRECTION OF DRAWING THE LINE ........................................................................................................... 233
15.4.3 LAYING OUT THE SYMBOLS ALONG THE LINE ............................................................................................... 234
15.4.4 CURVED LINES ..................................................................................................................................... 234
15.4.5 SYMBOLS OR TEXT FOR LINES ................................................................................................................. 234
15.5 INSTRUCTIONS FOR SYMBOLISING AREAS ................................................................................................... 234
15.5.1 REFERENCE TO PRESLIB MANUAL............................................................................................................ 234
15.5.2 CENTRED SYMBOLS FOR AREAS ............................................................................................................... 234
15.5.3 PATTERN SPACING FOR AREA FILL PATTERNS .............................................................................................. 234
15.6 EXAMPLES OF SYMBOL DIAGRAMS .......................................................................................................... 234
16 ECDIS CHART 1, SYMBOL PLOTS & COLOUR TEST DIAGRAMS ................................................................. 238
16.1 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 238
16.2 ECDIS CHART 1.................................................................................................................................. 239
16.3 COLOUR DIFFERENTIATION TEST DIAGRAM ............................................................................................... 253
16.3.1 DAY .................................................................................................................................................. 253
16.3.2 DUSK................................................................................................................................................. 254
16.4 LIST OF SYMBOL NAMES & MEANINGS ...................................................................................................... 255
16.4 PLOTS OF SYMBOLS .............................................................................................................................. 268
16.4.1 NEW SYMBOLS INTRODUCED IN S-52 PRESLIB 4.0.0 .................................................................................. 279
16.4.2 NEW COMPLEX LINESTYLES INTRODUCED IN S-52 PRESLIB 4.0.0 ................................................................... 279
17.1 DIGITAL PRESENTATION LIBRARY ............................................................................................................. 280
17.2 TEST EDITION OF THE PRESENTATION LIBRARY ........................................................................................... 280
17.3 LOOK-UP TABLE SETS ............................................................................................................................ 280
17.4 COLOUR TABLES .................................................................................................................................. 280
17.5 SYMBOLS, PATTERNS AND LINESTYLES ...................................................................................................... 280
17.6 OFFICIAL PRESENTATION LIBRARY............................................................................................................ 280
17.7 ECDIS CHART 1 .................................................................................................................................. 281
17.8 COLOUR DIFFERENTIATION TEST DIAGRAM ............................................................................................... 281
17.9 CSPS IN UML ..................................................................................................................................... 281
18 USE OF ECDIS CHART 1 & COLOUR TEST DIAGRAM ................................................................................. 282
18.1 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 282
18.2 SPECIFICATION FOR ECDIS CHART 1 AND THE COLOUR TEST DIAGRAM .......................................................... 282
18.2.1 DEFINITION (FOR THIS SPECIFICATION ONLY) .............................................................................................. 282
18.2.2 DESCRIPTION AND PURPOSE ................................................................................................................... 282
18.2.3 MODE OF USE ..................................................................................................................................... 283
18.2.4 CONTENT AND ENCODING ..................................................................................................................... 283
18.2.5 REVISIONS .......................................................................................................................................... 284
18.2.6 PACKAGING ........................................................................................................................................ 284
18.2.7 PRESENTATION .................................................................................................................................... 284
18.3 DISPLAYING THE COLOUR TEST DIAGRAM ................................................................................................. 284
18.3.1 INTRODUCTION; PROVIDING THE DIAGRAM................................................................................................ 284
18.3.2 USING THE DIAGRAM ............................................................................................................................ 285
18.4 GREY SCALE ........................................................................................................................................ 286
19 SUPPLY AND AMENDMENT OF THE DIGITAL PRESENTATION LIBRARY ................................................... 287
19.1 AMENDING THE DIGITAL PRESENTATION LIBRARY ....................................................................................... 287
19.2 INTERNAL STRUCTURE OF THE TRANSFER FILE ............................................................................................ 287

8
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
1. Scope
This document is intended to explain the mechanisms of the IHO ECDIS Presentation Library to
the ECDIS manufacturer, and to help them implement the library correctly. Therefore, it provides
the software developer with the information needed to translate abstract descriptions of S-57 [5]
objects into effective ECDIS display according to S-52 [3]. The symbols used in the
Presentation Library are described by a vector drawing language. There are many components
to the ECDIS display and this document presents them in a structured fashion describing how
the ENC data is to be rendered on screen and what facilities shall be provided to the Mariner by
the display. This document also explains how the various parts of the ECDIS Presentation
Library are related to each other, how these parts must be used to achieve an ECDIS
presentation and how the symbol library can be transferred in a machine readable form.

This manual assumes, that the reader has carefully studied in advance the various standards
for ECDIS, i.e., IHO S-52/S-57 [4,5,6] and IMO Performance Standards for ECDIS [2].

Sections 4, 5 and 6 of this documentation start with an overview of the Presentation Library.
They were written for the reader who is interested in the basic concept. Details that address
especially the designer of an ECDIS system are explained from section 7 onwards.

Note: The Presentation Library does not cover all aspects of the ECDIS display. The IMO
Performance Standards as well as the C&S Specifications and IEC publications 61174 [6] and
62288 must also be used in conjunction with this document. The IHO Test Data Sets (S-64) [9]
must be used when testing ECDIS software.

1.1 Use of Language

Throughout this document the word must is used to describe mandatory ECDIS requirements,
the word may is used to describe optional requirements.

9
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
2. Terms and Definitions
For the purposes of this document, the following terms and definitions apply.

2.1 Alarm
(MSC.302/A) a high-priority alert. Condition requiring immediate attention and action by the
bridge team, to maintain the safe navigation of the ship.

2.2 Alert
(MSC.302/A) announcement of abnormal situations and conditions requiring attention. Alerts
are divided in four priorities: emergency alarms, alarms, warnings and cautions. An alert
provides information about a defined state change in connection with information about how to
announce this event in a defined way to the system and the operator

2.3 Caution
(MSC.302/A) lowest priority of an alert. Awareness of a condition which does not warrant an
alarm or warning condition, but still requires attention out of the ordinary consideration of the
situation or of given information.

2.4 CIE Colours

One of the first mathematically defined colour spaces the CIE XYZ colour space was created by
the International Commission on Illumination 1931.

2.5 Colour Token

A five-letter code identifying a colour and its use in ECDIS. The day, dusk and night colours
which are identified by the token are given in the colour tables (in CIE coordinates). Note that
several colour tokens may share the same colour.

2.6 Complex Line Styles

Lines that are themselves symbols or that have symbols interlaced. Examples of a line as a
symbol are the submerged pipeline LC(PIPSOL05) and the T T T lines indicating the inside of
an area LC(ENTRES51). A simple or complex line may have a symbol interlaced, such as an
anchor for anchorage area LC(ACHARE51).

2.7 Conditional Symbology Procedure

A decision-making procedure used to link an object-class and its attributes to a symbol. Used in
cases where the symbol depends on system configuration, Mariner options and the objects
spatial relationship to other features (e.g. whether a wreck is symbolized as an "isolated danger"
depends on its relationship to the safety contour chosen by the Mariner) or where symbolization
is complex (e.g. light sector).

2.8 Display Category

IMO Perfromance Standards for ECDIS [2] establish three display categories for the
presentation of SENC objects. These are Display Base, objects that are always on the display;
Standard Display, the ECDIS' default display, which may be modified by the mariner; and Other
Information, which consists of objetcs in the SENC that are not in the Standard Display that may
be displayed on demand.

10
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
2.9 Display Priority
A hierarchy to stipulate the order in which objects are displayed. Display priorities range from 0
to 9, where 9 is the highest priority. Higher priority objects are displayed on top of lower priority
objects.

2.10 ECDIS
A navigation information system which with adequate back-up arrangements can be accepted
as complying with the up-to-date chart required by regulations V/19 and V/27 of the 1974
SOLAS Convention, as amended, by displaying selected information from a system electronic
navigational chart (SENC) with positional information from navigation sensors to assist the
Mariner in route planning and route monitoring, and if required display additional navigation-
related information.

2.11 ECDIS Chart 1

An ECDIS version of chart 1, including all symbols, line styles and colour coding used for chart
presentation. Intended for the Mariner to both familiarize himself with ECDIS and to look-up
specific symbols. The manufacturer must program the look-up of symbols drawn from the
Presentation Library, including certain diagrams which are copied from INT 1 [1].

2.12 Geometric Primitive

A plain point, a plain line, a plain area as defined in geometry (i.e. without any meaning
attached).

2.13 Indication
Visual indication giving information about the condition of a system or equipment.[2]

2.14 Look-up Table

A table that links SENC objects to area, point symbol and line representation on ECDIS, and
provides display priorities, radar flag, IMO category and viewing groups

2.15 No symbol Object

In some cases, the database contains information that is not intended for display. (An example
might be a general area such as 'Great Australian Bight' which would be available for an answer
to cursor interrogation of the sea area.)

2.16 Opaque fill

The background is completely filled with the colour fill. (e.g. depth area). The point and line
SENC features may be overwritten. The raw RADAR image is a special case of opaque fill
which overwrites all other features expect those with "priority over radar" (OVERRADAR).

2.17 Pattern fill

A method of identifying areas by large, faintly coloured symbols well spaced out across the
area. A pattern spacing algorithm ensures that the pattern symbols are visible without being so
dense as to cause clutter. Used to ensure pattern symbols are always visible at any display
scale.

2.18 Pivot Point

The pivot point is the point around which the symbol gets scaled and rotated. When the symbol
is placed in the world space, the symbol's pivot point is positioned exactly on the object's
position and all elements of the symbol are geometrically related to that position.

11
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
2.19 Radar Priority
IMO PS [2] requires that radar can be switched off with a "single action control" in order to see
SENC and Mariners info clearly. However certain other info, such as planned route, safety
contour, coastline must always be written over the radar.

2.20 Radar Transparency

A method of varying the transparency of radar in a continuous progression from no radar to a
totally opaque radar overlay, by merging the radar colour with the colour of the object it overlays
at each pixel

2.21 SCAMIN
The smallest scale at which an object is displayed ( e.g. a minor light, SCAMIN of 1:50,000,
would not be displayed at a scale of 1:75,000).

2.22 Simple Line Styles

Solid lines, dots and dashes.

2.23 Symbol Size

The size is specified in normalized units of 0.01 mm. The minimum dimension is always more
than 4 mm. This size applies to display on a standard minimum screen specified in S-52 [3].

2.24 Symbology Instruction

A machine readable symbolization order used in look-up tables to link object-classes to
symbols, in straight forward cases (i.e. where a conditional symbology instruction is not
required)

2.25 System Electronic Navigational Chart (SENC)

A database, in the manufacturer’s internal ECDIS format, resulting from the lossless
transformation of the entire ENC contents and its updates. It is this database that is accessed
by ECDIS for the display generation and other navigational functions, and is equivalent to an
up-to-date paper chart. The SENC may also contain information added by the mariner and
information from other sources.

2.26 Text Label

A textual description of an object. Can be formatted to include standard text as well as feature
attribute values. For example, light descriptions, place names etc.

2.27 TFT
Thin film transistor (used in LCD display technology).

2.28 Transfer, Exchange

These words are used as verbs or nouns to mean "provide" or "carry information".

2.29 Transparent Fill

A method of identifying areas by covering a given percentage of each 4 pixel square with the fill
colour, leaving the remainder "transparent". Used to ensure the information underneath shows
through.

2.30 Unknown Object Vector Format Symbol

If an object-class is not listed in the look-up table, the ECDIS must inform the Mariner that an
unknown object exists in the display area, and symbolize all such objects with a question mark.

12
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
2.31 Vector Format Symbol
A symbol described in vector coordinates.

2.32 Warning
(MSC.302/A) alert for condition requiring immediate attention, but no immediate action by the
bridge team. Warnings are presented for precautionary reasons to make the bridge team aware
of changed conditions which are not immediately hazardous, but may become so if no action is
taken.

13
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
3 References
[1] International Hydrographic Organization. - International Chart Series INT 1: Symbols,
Abbreviations, Terms used on Charts. Bundesamt für Seeschiffahrt und
Hydrographie, Hamburg, Germany. (Current Edition).

[2] International Maritime Organization: Performance Standards for Electronic Chart

Display and Information Systems; (Current Edition).

[3] International Hydrographic Organization: Specifications for Chart Content and Display
Aspects of ECDIS / International Hydrographic Bureau, Monaco. (Publication S-52,
Current Edition)

[4] International Hydrographic Organization: Hydrographic Dictionary, Glossary of

ECDIS-related Terms / International Hydrographic Bureau, Monaco. (Publication
S-32, Appendix 1, Current Edition)

[5] International Hydrographic Organization: IHO Transfer Standard for Digital

Hydrographic Data / International Hydrographic Bureau, Monaco. (Publication S-57,
Current Edition)

[6] International Electrotechnical Commission Publication 61174: Electronic Chart Display

and Information System (ECDIS) - Operational and performance requirements,
methods of testing and required test results; Geneva, Switzerland (Current Edition).

[7] International Electrotechnical Commission Publication 62288: Presentation of

navigation related information - General requirements, methods of test and required
test results; Geneva, Switzerland (Current Edition).

[8] International Hydrographic Organization: C&S Maintenance Document for Colours

and symbols specifications for ECDIS and its Annex A: IHO ECDIS PRESENTATION
LIBRARY (Current Edition)

[9] International Hydrographic Organization: ECDIS Test Data Set, International

Hydrographic Bureau, Monaco. (Publication S-64, Current Edition)

[10] International Hydrographic Organization: Maintenance Section under (www.iho.int >

Publications > Download List)

14
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
4 Structure of the Presentation Library
The IHO Presentation Library is annex A to IHO S-52 "Specifications for Chart Content and
Display Aspects of ECDIS”.

The Digital Files CD-ROM contains the followinig:

Presentation Library Part I Symbol Catalog Adendum
Colour and Look-up Table Appendicies A-F in Microsoft Word format
Colour and Look-up Tables in machine readable DAI file format
ECDIS Chart 1 ENC format files
Colour Test Diagram

15
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
4.1 S-57 and the Presentation Model for ECDIS

The Presentation Model for ECDIS refers to the official IHO Transfer Standard for Digital
Hydrographic Data (S-57) [5]. The IHO Transfer Standard states in Part 2, section 3;

“The model described in this part of the Standard does not contain any rules for the presentation
or display of information. It provides only the means for the factual description of the real world.
The presentation of this information may vary to suit a particular use (e.g. it may be presented
either graphically, using symbols, or in a textual form). Therefore, the presentation of
information is considered to be independent of its storage. Different applications must provide
their own specific “presentation models”. A presentation model defines, via a set of presentation
rules, the way in which real world information must be displayed for a specified application. The
concept of keeping information storage independent of presentation provides for greater
versatility and flexibility. It allows the same data to be used for many purposes without requiring
any change to its structure or content. If the presentation style or medium changes, only the
presentation model has to be changed."

In contrast to a presentation model suitable for paper chart application, a presentation model to
be used by ECDIS systems must take into account the requirements of the IMO/IHO
"Performance Standard for ECDIS" [2] and the IHO "Specifications for Chart Content and
Display Aspects of ECDIS", IHO Publication S-52 [3]. In particular, this means, that the
presentation of charts on an ECDIS screen changes depending on parameters and selections
defined by the Mariner, such as safety contour, time of the day, traditional or simplified
symbology, etc. Thus the presentation model must cover not only colour and symbol definitions
but also instructions how to handle a dynamically changing presentation as well.

4.2 Structure of the Presentation Model for ECDIS

The Presentation Model for ECDIS is built from two major parts:

- A library of colours, line styles, fill styles, point symbols and a set of symbology
instructions and look-up tables for the translation of object descriptions into
symbology instructions. This part is called "Presentation Library for ECDIS
- A description of the required programmable structure, which serves as a model
for the graphic display within an ECDIS system and which explains how to use
the elements of the Presentation Library and how to ensure the correct display of
data structured according to S-57.

4.3 Supply and amendment of the Presentation Library

From edition 3.3 onwards the word-processed version of the Presentation Library is the "official"
version. A digital version in .dai format is provided on the same CD-ROM as a manufacturer's
option for edition 4.0.0. It consists of look-up tables; symbols; and colour tables and is supplied
in ASCII format in the .dai file.

The name of the file on this CD which contains the official, word processed Presentation Library
is "PSLBmm_n.pdf" where mm_n is the edition number.

16
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
IMPORTANT: The edition number of the PresLib installed must be available to the Mariner on
request.

The general layout of the Presentation Library is shown in section 4 of this publication. The
various components of the Presentation Library are supplied and amended as follows:

The Presentation Library as a word processed file is issued on a CD-ROM, which carries a
subscription charge for each new edition to help to cover maintenance costs. The word-
processed Presentation Library includes:

1. the look-up tables, colour tables and symbol library.

2. the narrative and diagram conditional symbology procedures in UML form, together
with symbolizing instructions (in section 13) for special IMO and IHO requirements
which are needed to complete the symbolizing of an ENC,

3. further information needed for implementing the above in ECDIS is given in all
sections

On each occasion of an immediate amendment of the Presentation Library:

1. a description of the items in the amendment will be freely available from the IHO web
site under the Maintenance Section (www.iho.int > Publications > Download List) [10].

2. the amended word-processed Presentation Library will be posted on the IHO web site
(www.iho.int > Catalogue) together with the ECDIS Test Data Set (S-64) [10]. A
subscription may be required.

Note: Only immediate amendments and not those of deferred amendments, will be included in
the amended Presentation Library of .2 above.

The following digital files are also provided on the CD-ROM containing the word-processed
Presentation Library:

1. The .dai file of the Presentation Library, consisting of look-up tables, symbols and
colour tables.

Note: The .dai version is provided as a manufacturer's option for edition 4.0.0, but may not be
available for succeeding editions.

The "Test Edition Version" of the .dai file provided with old editions of the presentation library is
no longer required in IEC 61174 and has been removed permanently from the digital
Presentation Library. However symbol SY(CHKSYM01) has been retained for use in checking
symbol size.

2. ECDIS Chart 1 & Colour Differentiation Test Diagram, consisting of:

17
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 - S-57 files containing a collection of all symbols coded as NEWOBJ using the
SYMINS attribute and similarly arranged as INT1 [1] for paper charts
- S-57 files containing combinations of foreground and background colours as
line and area geometries.

3. UML models of the CSPs in Enterprise Architect format

5 Basic Concept of ECDIS Display

All elements of the Presentation Library are required to be implemented by a manufacturer
unless otherwise stated. OEMs developing ECDIS display must follow this documentation to
perform the link between the S-57 feature object characteristic and the actual presentation on
the ECDIS screen.

Fig 1 is an example of how the various elements of the Presentation Library can be linked
together in order to display an S-57 object from the SENC. Only the individual elements (symbol
library, look-up tables, etc.) are provided in the Presentation Library. The ECDIS manufacturer
writes software linking the elements.

Section 10 gives further details of key functions that must be taken into consideration by the
ECDIS developer.

18
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 act ECDIS Display Concept

Entry Point

Get Obj ect from Object definition through

SENC attribute values and Spatial
elements.

Is date within ranges:

DATSTA - DATEND; Symbology instructions, conditional
PERSTA - PEREND? symbology, priority, radar flag,
[No] category and viewing group.

[Yes]
Instruction from
Look-up Table
Get Symbology
Instruction

Conditional Symbology?
Procedures to perform conditional
[No] symbology which may change priority, radar
flag, display category and viewing group,
[Yes] set infinite SCAMIN value of the object.

Generate Instruction
from Symbology Procedure Library
Procedure

Is display scale greater than

or equal to 1/SCAMIN?

[No]
[Yes]

Generate Entry to Mariner Options

Display List from Section
Symbology Instructions

E.g. safety contour,

colour scheme, text
on/off and etc.

More Object?
Simplified and full
[Yes] chart symbols,
[No] linestyles and patterns

Perform Display
Colour Tables Symbol Lybrary
List Commands

Final
19
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Fig 1. ECDIS display concept

Entry Point Clipped portion of ENC to be displayed on the ECDIS screen.

Perform for each SENC object.
Get Object from SENC Object definition through attribute values and Spatial elements.
Is date within ranges: Is the current date of presentation within the range of existence of
DATSTA - DATEND; the object?
PERSTA - PEREND? I.e. if there are values of the attributes' pairs DATSAT - DATEND or
PERSTA - PEREND then the current date is more than Start date
and less than End date of the existence period of the object.
Get Symbology Instruction Get symbology instructions, conditional instructions, priority value,
radar flag, display category and viewing group from the appropriate
line of the Look-up table file.
Instruction from Look-up Take the Look-up Table file according to geometry type of the object
Table and mariner parameters ('simplify point', 'pattern area boundaries')
Conditional Symbology? Does a Conditional Symbology Procedure exist?
Generate Instruction from Execute the conditional symbology procedure to get Symbology
Symbology Procedure Instructions with parameters of presentations.
Procedure Library Procedures to perform conditional symbology which may change
priority, radar flag, display category and viewing group, set infinite
SCAMIN value of the object.
Is display scale greater than Is the current display scale greater than or equal to 1/SCAMIN value
or equal to 1/SCAMIN? from the object?
Generate Entry to Display Add graphical primitives to the display list taking into account
List from Symbology Presentation parameters (priority, radar flag, display category and
Instructions viewing group)
More Object? Are there more objects in the SENC? If it is, go to the next object.
Perform Display List
Commands
Mariner Options Section E.g. safety contour, colour scheme, text on/off and etc.
Symbol Library Simplified and full chart symbols, linestyles and patterns
Colour Tables Colour tokens with XYL values for different palettes (Day, Dusk and
Night palettes)
Final Final presentation of the SENC

20
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
The basic concept of ECDIS display is as follows:

1. The ECDIS determines which feature objects contained within the SENC are required for
display.
2. The ECDIS maintains a set of Mariner defined parameters (such as safety contour,
safety depth, display category).
3. Each feature object, whether point, line or area geometric primitive are transformed into
symbolisation instructions using lookup tables and conditional symbology procedures
described in this document.
4. The symbolisation instructions are drawn to the screen using lookup tables to define
colour values for the selected pallet and taking into account data-defined parameters
which may affect display, such as DATSTA-DATEND and SCAMIN.

If, for example, the Mariner subsequently selects another safety contour, the list of
symbolisation instructions are renewed and the depth areas distinguishing shades are changed
by a symbology procedure which is called to generate symbology instructions for the object
class DEPARE (depth area). There are many display options, some of which are mandatory and
which are described in this document. The ECDIS manufacturer is also able to provide Mariner
features within their ECDIS which build on the mechanisms described in this document.

Note that the ECDIS must not initiate any change of state automatically or by linkage, e.g., it
must not automatically select “lights” because the Mariner selects the night colour table. All
changes to the composition of the display must be initiated by the Mariner.

6 The Elements of the Presentation Library - An Overview

The Presentation Library consists of seven elements:

1. A colour coding scheme defining the IHO colour tables for day and night time

2. A library of symbols, line styles and fill styles

3. A set of symbology command words from which symbolisation instructions can

be assembled. These are used to symbolize S-57 [6] objects.

4. A set of conditional symbology procedures to decide the appropriate

symbolization in cases determined by the Mariner’s selection (e.g., safety
contour) or in complex symbols (e.g., light sectors).

5. A set of look-up tables that link S-57 feature object descriptions and geometric
primitives to the appropriate symbology command words using one of two
separate mechanisms:

a) A simple lookup where the link is straight forward, i.e., a direct relationship
between an object's description and its presentation such as a buoy or
land area. In this case the look-up table provides the symbology
instruction to show a symbol, an area fill or a line style.

21
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 b) A more complex lookup where the link between the feature and its
symbology is dependent on a parameter or other context, for example a
depth area, whose colour fill depends on the choice of the safety contour.
In this case the look-up table refers the decision to a conditional
symbology procedure which then selects the appropriate symbology
instructions.

6. A .tif file (or other medium) set of diagrams that can be displayed or printed on
demand and explain the symbology to the Mariner (Mariners' ECDIS Chart 1)

7. A catalogue of navigational object classes that comprise objects that the Mariner
may add to the chart. (These are specified in Part II of the Presentation Library
[4])

The following section gives a short description of each of the elements of the Presentation
Library.

6.1 The Colour Coding Scheme

The Presentation Library uses a colour scheme, which classifies colours by their usage (see
section 7). Each colour usage is represented by a five letter colour token. Each colour token
corresponds to a colour definition given in CIE coordinates in one of a set of colour tables for
different bridge lighting conditions. Each colour table is referred to as a “pallet” such as “Day”,
“Dusk” and “Night”.

Symbols, fill styles and line styles refer to the colour tables by using the standardized colour
tokens as part of the symbol definition. See section 7 and 15 on how to use colour tokens,
section 11.4 on how colour tables are transferred in the digital version. Appendix A of this
document provides the XYL values for each colour token in Day, Dusk and Night palette.

6.2 The Library of Symbols, Fill Styles and Line Styles

Symbols, area fill patterns and line styles are described in detail in the Symbol Library (section
16 and the Addendum). They are also supplied in a machine readable format on the digital file.

6.2.1 Symbols
The Presentation Library provides two sets of symbols, referred to as “simplified” and
“traditional”. The symbols for point objects are generally based on the traditional paper chart
symbols and, in addition a set of more compact, but more visible, 'simplified' buoy and beacon
symbols are provided for use under difficult viewing conditions.

6.2.2 Area Fills

The Presentation Library offers various ways to fill areas. They can be filled with an opaque
colour; with a colour shown with some transparency; or with a pattern of symbols (fill pattern)or
with a centred symbol. Fill patterns and centred symbols are introduced as a solution for the
symbolization of areas in special situations. When using the traditional (paper chart) way, e.g.,

22
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
to symbolize the traffic direction by using an arrow, it might happen that the arrow-symbol
moves off the screen because the size and position of the viewing window on the ECDIS chart
cannot be predetermined. A fill pattern showing arrows does not have a certain position on the
chart like the paper chart arrow-symbol. It shows up as long as any part of the traffic separation
lane can be seen on the screen. A centred symbol moves to the centre of the part of the area
that remains in the display window.

The Presentation Library provides two options for area boundaries, referred to as “plain” and
“symbolised”. There are look-up tables for plain area boundaries (intended for use at small scale
to reduce clutter) and symbolized area boundaries (intended for use at larger scales to assist
area identification. Note that centred symbols must still be used with symbolized boundaries to
symbolize the case when the entire display window lies within an area. See section 9 for
symbology instructions and 11.5 for details of the digital format.

6.2.3 Line Styles

The Presentation Library uses two types of line styles: simple line styles and complex line
styles. Simple line styles are solid, dashed or dotted lines with varying colour and thickness.
Complex line styles are composed of repeating line patterns. See section 9for symbology
instructions and 11.7 for details of the digital format.

6.3 Symbology Instructions

The ECDIS chart display is generated from symbology instructions. The symbology instructions
are in turn assembled from a set of symbology commands which have been designed for the
Presentation Library. Symbology commands are intended to be machine readable instructions
which can be easily decoded in a straightforward manner to low level graphic actions that are
performed by the ECDIS to generate the ECDIS display.

Currently there are five types of symbology instructions:

1. instructions for line objects

2. instructions for area objects
3. instructions for point objects
4. instructions for text labels
5. call to conditional symbology procedures

Symbology instructions are explained in section 15.

6.4 Conditional Symbology Procedures

To handle complex presentation situations conditional symbology is required. Conditional
symbology is different from standard symbology in that a procedure is processed rather than a
straightforward symbology lookup instruction. Thus decisions are made by the ECDIS at run
time which affect symbolization and other display factors such as priority, radar flag, category,
viewing groups. The Conditional Symbology Procedures are defined in section 13.

23
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
6.5 The Look-Up Tables and other symbolizing instructions
Instructions on how to symbolize an instance of an object class can be found in look-up tables
that come with the Presentation Library on the distribution CD-ROM.

There are five look-up tables:

1. paper chart point symbols
2. simplified point symbols
3. line symbols
4. plain area boundary symbols
5. symbolized area boundary symbols

IMPORTANT: The manufacturer must allow the Mariner to select freely between the two point
symbol tables and the two area symbol tables. There must be no linkages, for example linking
simplified point symbols to plain area boundaries, etc.

Each line of a look-up table, called a look-up table entry, contains the S-57 feature class., a
string of attribute-value combinations and symbology instructions or a call to a conditional
symbology procedure which in turn creates symbology instructions.

To find the correct symbolization for an instance of an object class the look-up table is entered
with the object class code and its presentation-relevant attribute values. The resulting
symbology instructions can then be used by the ECDIS to render the symbol on screen.

Every entry to the look-up tables matches either all objects of an object class or a subset.
Therefore, the look-up tables are also used to assign the objects to the IMO/IHO display
category, display priority, radar flag and optional viewing group. The viewing groups may be
used by the Mariner to either reduce or add information shown on the screen.

Look-up table entries are supplied in Annex A and in a machine readable format in the .DAI file.

Some display features cannot be handled by look-up tables, generally because they are not
defined S-57 objects and fall between the look-up tables and the conditional symbology
procedures. Some examples are the scalebar, the ECDIS chart legend, manual correction
identifiers, cursor pick etc. These are described in section10.

6.6 Mariners' ECDIS Chart 1 and Colour Differentiation Test diagrams

To familiarise the Mariner with ECDIS symbology, a printable set of symbol diagrams, following
the sequence of the paper chart INT 1 [1], is provided in section 16, along with a numbered list
of symbol meanings to explain the use of each symbol.

The digital equivalent, a set of symbol diagrams in the form of S-57 compliant charts, is included
on the CD-ROM for edition 4.0.0. These provide symbol meaning, through cursor picking
referring to the symbol descriptions given in the symbol library.

A Colour Differentiation Test diagram is included to enable the Mariner to verify the ability of his
ECDIS display screen to distinguish between differently colour-coded areas, lines and point
symbols. See 16.3 for the diagram and 18.3 for its use.

24
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
6.7 Mariners' Navigational Object Classes

IMO Resolution MSC.191(79) 2004 is the performance standard for the display of navigation-
related information on all shipborne navigational systems and equipment. IMO SN/Circ 243
describes symbols used for the display of navigation-related information on all shipborne
navigational systems and equipment. IEC 62288 defines the general requirements and the
testing methods for navigational related information on shipbourne navigational displays in
support of MSC.191(79).

The symbols for which IMO is the authority represent non-chart objects which are not defined in
S-57. The IHO has defined three Mariner objects for use in ECDIS the objects are defined in S-
52- Part II and the symbols are contained in the ENC symbol catalogue.

The symbology instruction for Mariner objects detailed in S-52 Part II can be found in the look-
up tables like the symbology instruction suitable for any S-57 object class.

Please see Part II for further details and definitions of the Mariners' navigational object classes.

6.8 Test Edition of the Presentation Library

The Test Edition is no longer required in IEC 61174 [7] and has been removed permanently
from the S-52 Presentation Library. However symbol SY(CHKSYM01) has been retained for use
in checking correct symbol size.

25
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
7 Description of the Colour Coding System
The colours of the Presentation Library for ECDIS are named with a five character code that
reflects their usage, e.g., CHMGD for "chart magenta, dominant". These names are called
"colour tokens". The colour tokens are referred to by symbology instructions, symbol definitions
and line/fill styles. The colour tokens are defined by CIE-coordinates. The IEC standards that
describe methods of converting CIE colour coordinates into RGB values are listed in S-52,
section 4.2.3.

The colour tokens are organized in a colour scheme that groups the tokens in colour sections.
Each colour section contains a set of colour tokens that serves a special purpose, e.g., to
provide colours for the chart content.

7.1 The Sections of the Colour Scheme

The Colour Scheme is split into several sections based on intended usage. The colour values
themselves are listed in the colour tables (Appendix A). This section describes each of the
tokens within each section.

7.1.1 General Colours

The colours of this section are used in combination with every section of the whole colour
scheme:

Token Colour Usage

TRNSP transparent invisible pixels
NODTA grey areas without chart data
CURSR orange cursor colour,VRM,EBL

TRNSP- This means a 100% "transparent" colour. This is not a "real" colour since it is invisible.
Every pixel on the screen, which has the colour value 0 shows up as 100% transparent. In case
the pixel was already painted with another (visible, e.g., black) colour this colour is not
overwritten by the transparent colour. In case the pixel was cleared before or not yet painted the
"background" colour shows up (see NODTA).

NODTA- This abbreviation stands for "No Data". This colour shows up on every pixel on the
screen, which is neither covered by chart features nor covered by other elements of the ECDIS
display (e.g., radar overlay, user interface). Thus, it can also be called the "empty background
colour" (see TRNSP).

CURSR- In most graphic systems the cursor is treated as an item that can be handled
completely independent from the graphic of the chart area. Therefore the cursor is given its own
colour and it is kept separately from the other sections of the colour scheme. The cursor colour
is also used by variable range marker (VRM), electronic bearing line (EBL), parallel indexing
lines and other tools to perform absolute and relative measurements in the chart.

26
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
7.1.2 Chart Colours
The colours in this section are specifically designed for chart display.

Token Colour, day/night Usage

CHBLK black/grey general
CHGRD grey dominant general
CHGRF grey, faint general
CHRED red general
CHGRN green general
CHYLW yellow general
CHMGD magenta, dominant general
CHMGF magenta, faint general
CHBRN brown general
CHWHT white general
OUTLW black symbol outline on sea area background
OUTLL pale/dark brown symbol outline on land area background
LITRD red red lights
LITGN green green lights
LITYW yellow white/yellow/orange/amber lights
ISDNG magenta isolated danger
DNGHL red danger highlight
TRFCD magenta, dominant traffic control features
TRFCF magenta, faint traffic control features
LANDA brown Land areas
LANDF brown Landforms, land features
CSTLN black/grey Coastline, shoreline constructions
SNDG1 grey deep soundings > safety depth
SNDG2 black/white shallow soundings <= safety depth
DEPSC grey safety contour
DEPCN grey depth contours
DEPDW white/black deeper than selected deep contour
DEPMD pale/dark blue safety contour to selected deep contour
DEPMS light/medium blue shallow contour to selected safety contour
DEPVS medium/light blue zero meter contour to shallow contour
DEPIT yellow-green high water line to zero meter contour

CHBLK, CHGRD, CHGRF, CHRED, CHGRN, CHYLW, CHMGD, CHMGF, CHBRN,

CHWHT- This selection of colours is used in general to design symbols and chart line features
as well as fill styles. They are not used in cases where other colours are available for a special
usage.

OUTLW, OUTLL - These colours are used to outline symbols depending on which background
they are normally shown (water/land).

LITRD, LITGN, LITYW- Light symbols have their own colours to give the opportunity to
influence their colour luminance individually. Yellow (LITYW) is used for white, yellow, orange
and amber lights because it might be difficult to distinguish these colours from each other on a
badly calibrated monitor. It also follows the tradition to show up white lights with a yellow flare or
coloured arc.

27
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
ISDNG- Since the isolated danger symbol forms one of the most important items on the ECDIS
screen, it is given a separate colour.

DNGHL- This colour is used for symbology that highlights Mariner selected dangers. The
Mariner decides during route planning which features are highlighted by this colour.

TRFCD, TRFCF- Traffic separation schemes are complex chart features. The navigator is
confronted with important elements of the schemes and with less important elements as well.

TRFCD is used to distinguish important traffic routeing features.

LANDA - This colour is used for land areas in general.

LANDF - Landforms and land features are given a contrasting brown.

CSTLN - The coastline is a very important feature of the chart. If a radar image is combined with
the chart picture it is required that coastline elements clearly show up on top of the green radar
picture (see also RADHI/RADLO). To have full control over this combination under all
conditions (day/night) a separate colour is reserved for coastline features.

SNDG1- This colour is used for soundings that are deeper than the selected safety depth
("safe" soundings).

SNDG2- This colour is used for soundings that are shallower than or equal to the selected
safety depth ("unsafe" soundings).

DEPSC - This colour is reserved for the selected safety contour.

DEPCN- All depth contours other than the safety contour must use this colour.

DEPDW, DEPMD, DEPMS, DEPVS, DEPIT- These are depth shades. The depth zones are:

DEPDW: areas deeper than the Mariner-selected deep contour;

DEPMD: areas between deep contour and the Mariner-selected safety contour;

DEPMS: areas between safety contour and the Mariner-selected shallow water contour;

DEPVS: areas between shallow water contour and the low water line (zero meter contour);

DEPIT: areas between zero meter contour and coastline (intertidal).

For route monitoring it may be desirable to distinguish only two water shades, plus DEPIT:
deeper than own-ship's safety contour and shallower than safety contour. In that case DEPDW
and DEPVS must be used. At night it may be difficult to distinguish between DEPMD and
DEPDW.

7.1.3 Radar Image Overlay Colours

28
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Token Colour Usage
RADHI green high intensity echo or single int. echo
RADLO green low intensity echo & target trail
ARPAT green, dashed ARPA, target symbols & infos

The radar image overlay can be generated by using either one intensity colour or a range of
intensities. The colour for high echo intensity (RADHI) must be used where only one intensity is
used. If you prefer to show more than one echo intensity or fading target trails, the
corresponding colour intensities must be interpolated between the colour for high echo intensity
(RADHI) and the colour for low echo intensity (RADLO). A separate colour token is used for
ARPA targets and information tagged on them (ARPAT).

Optionally, the manufacturer may vary the radar green overlay by making it transparent. As
described in section 8.4.2, there are two ways of doing this:

1) Use "pixel swap" transparency, as described in detail in section 8.4.2.

2) by mixing the fill and underlying colour at each pixel to give a continuous
transparency change from 0% to 100%. This must be done in such a way that no
appearance of colour or shape change occurs in any SENC feature on the
display, at any intermediate transparency value. The underlying SENC
information must remain distinguishable, except when the overlay colour
approaches 100%, in which case S-52, section 2.3.2 (b) applies and an
indication is required.

7.1.4 Mariners' & Navigation Information Colours

Token Colour Usage

SCLBR orange scalebar
CHCOR orange chart corrections
NINFO orange Navigators Notes
ADINF yellow Mariners' transparent area fill and manufacturers' points and lines

SCLBR Used to generate the scalebar.

CHCOR Hand-entered chart corrections are marked by the colour.

NINFO Mariners' notes of any form (Symbols, Text) are generated using the colour.

7.1.5 Other Colours

Token Colour Usage

RESBL blue AIS features and symbols
RESGR grey reserved for line features & screened areas
BKAJ1 black black level test symbol background
BKAJ2 grey black level test symbol foreground

29
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
7.1.6 Colour Section V / Ship Symbol & Planned Route

Token Colour,day/night Usage

SHIPS black/white own ship, Co&SpMG vector
PSTRK black/white Past Track
SYTRK grey Secondary Track
PLRTE red planned route & notations
APLRT orange alternate planned route

Own ship symbol, course over ground and the speed over ground vector are shown in the
colour SHIPS.

The past track of the main position sensor and a secondary position sensor are shown in
PSTRK and SYTRK.

The planned route uses the colour PLRTE as well as the symbol set for the planned route
elements (waypoints, etc.). Any alternate route is shown in APLRT.

7.1.7 User Interface Colours

For ECDIS user interface colours please refer to MSC.191(79) and IEC 62288.

30
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
8. The Vector Symbol Description Language
This section describes the format that is used by the Presentation Library to define point
symbols, complex line-styles and fill patterns.

The vector format uses an imaginary "pen" to draw on a “canvas” (an area of the screen).
Positions on the canvas are referred to by two-dimensional Cartesian coordinates (x,y). The
coordinates are always within the range of 0 to 32767 units. Each unit represents 0.01 mm on
screen. The origin of the coordinates (position 0,0) is on the upper left corner of the two-
dimensional canvas. Thus x-coordinates extend to the right and y-coordinates extend
downwards.

Fig 2. Pivot point, bounding box and symbol coordinates.

The definitions of point symbols, complex line styles and fill patterns are composed of multiple
instructions. Vector symbol definitions described by the vector format are defined within the
'PVCT/SVCT/LVCT'-fields (see section 11). The vector format uses the following additional
instructions:

; The semicolon separates the instructions from each other. Every instruction must
be terminated by a semicolon.

, The comma separates the parameters of an instruction from each other. If an

instruction does not have any parameters no comma is allowed following the
instruction.

Vector Parameter Description

Instruction
SP Colour The SP instruction selects a pen with a certain colour. The
parameter is a single letter which identifies a colour token.
The colour tokens used are defined in the "Colour
Reference"-fields (see section 10.5.4) which map the single

31
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 letter definition to one of the standard colour tokens. An SP
instruction remains in effect until a new pen is selected.
Thus, all following instructions are performed using the
selected pen colour.
ST Transparency The ST instruction defines the transparency of the colour
that is currently selected. The transparency is given in steps
of 25% (0-3, see section 7.4.2). The transparency only
affects the polygon fill instruction (see FP) while other
instructions (AA, CI, EP, PD) produce opaque drawings.
SW Width The SW instruction parameter defines the physical pen-tip
width in units of 0.3 millimetres. If a single point is defined, (a
pen down with no movement followed by a pen up) then a
dot would be drawn using the current line width as a
diameter or a square using the current width. (standard pixel
diameter).
PU x-coordinate, The PU instruction raises the pen and then moves it to the
y-coordinate absolute x,y-coordinates. Thus, no line is drawn by the PU
instruction.
PD x-coordinate, The PD instruction lowers the pen at the current position and
y-coordinate then moves it to the absolute x,y-coordinates. Thus a line in
[,x,y, ... x,y] the current colour (see SP) and width (see SW) is drawn by
the PD instruction.
CI Radius The CI instruction draws a circle of a specified radius. The
radius determines the size of the circle. The current pen
position is the centre of the circle. The CI instruction includes
an implicit pen down feature. When a CI instruction is used
the pen lifts, moves from the centre of the circle to the
starting point on the circumference, lowers the pen, draws
the circle, then returns with the pen up to the centre of the
circle. The circle is drawn using the current pen colour (see
SP) and pen width (see PW).
PM n The PM instruction places the command interpreter in
polygon definition mode. In this mode you can construct
polygons using other instructions (PU, PD and CI). These
instructions are stored in the polygon buffer; they are not
executed until the polygon is completely defined. In order to
draw the polygon it must be filled with the FP instruction
and/or outlined with the EP instruction. To define a polygon
move the pen to the desired starting position (see PU or PD).
Then execute PM 0 to enter the polygon mode and specify
the appropriate instructions to define the shape of the
polygon. If you want to define a sub polygon, end the shape
with a PM 1 instruction and define the next shape; execute
PM 2 to exit the polygon mode. The current pen position
before PM 0 is the first point (vertex) of the polygon. The
vertices can be defined with the pen up or down (see PU,
PD). However, if you intend to outline the polygon with the
EP instruction, note that EP will only draw those points that
are defined with the pen down. The FP instruction, on the
other hand, fills the polygon, regardless of the pen up / down

32
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 status.
EP The EP instruction outlines any polygon that has been
previously stored in the polygon buffer (see PM). Only
vertices that were defined with the pen down are edged.
They are edged using the current pen colour (see SP) and
pen width (see PW). Upon completion of the EP instruction,
the original pen position and status are restored.
FP The FP instruction fills a polygon that has been previously
placed in the polygon buffer (see PM). The polygon is filled
using the current pen colour (see SP) and transparency (see
ST). Upon completion of the FP instruction, the original pen
position and status (pen up/down) are restored.
SC symbol The SC instruction calls another symbol definition.
name, Orientation specifies whether the called symbol is drawn
orientation upright (orientation = 0) or rotated to the direction of the last
pen moving instruction (orientation = 1), or rotated at 90
degrees to the tangent of the symbolized edge at the
position of the symbol (orientation = 2). The pivot point of the
symbol will be placed on the current pen position. Upon
completion of the SC instruction, the original pen position
and status (pen up/down) are restored.

Note: The Vector drawing language defines how symbols must look on the ECDIS screen when
drawn. The ECDIS manufacturer does not have to replicate the drawing mechanism itself within
their ECDIS. The choice of SENC storage and symbol drawing procedures are up to the
manufacturer. The only requirement is that the colours and symbols are replicated from the
specifications contained within this document to the satisfaction of the manufacturers type
approval body.

8.1 Size and Orientation of a Vector-Symbol

For each vector symbol the height and width are define in units of 0.01 mm. Symbols in the
Presentation Library are already sized to give good readability and appropriate prominence.
Only the ship symbol is allowed to be scaled to the actual dimension of the ship.

Every symbol has its own pivot point. The pivot point is the point around which the symbol is
rotated. When a point symbol is placed on the display, the symbol's pivot point is positioned
exactly on the object's position and all the instructions in the symbol’s definition are relative to
that position. For further information about position of the pivot point and the symbol definitions,
see section 11.6.

8.2 Description of Complex Line Style rendering.

A complex linestyle is formed from a repeating symbol. The symbol definition for a line style is
very similar to the symbol definition for a point symbol and uses Cartesian coordinates as
defined in the previous section. The linestyle symbol has its own pivot point around which it is

33
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
rotated. The orientation is given by the direction between the two vertices of the segment of the
line being drawn.

To symbolize some lines a composite type of complex linestyle is used, in which the unit is
composed of a series of horizontal lines and symbols, strung together along the line object to
form the linestyle unit

In order to draw a complex linestyle, first locate the start and end points along the edge to be
symbolized. Then draw the complex linestyle along the edge between the start and end
positions repeating as necessary. If a symbol needs to be embedded in the line, then the
rotation angle relative to the line segment must be determined. The diagram below shows how
the composite symbol is created from the linestyle and its embedded symbols.

Fig 3. Complex Line Styles.

34
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
8.3 Vector Format Examples

8.3.1 Sample Definition in Vector Format

S-57 Feature S-52 Symbol Vector Drawing Instruction ECDIS Display

Object (see 11.6.3)
Mooring/ MORFAC03 SYCL = 00747
Warping SYRW = 00746
Facility SYHL = 00253
SYVL = 00253
SBXC = 00603
SBXR = 00617
SCRF ALANDABCHBLK
SVCT SPA;SW2;ST0;
PU603,617;PM0;PD856,617;
PD856,870;PD605,870;PD603,617;
PM2;FP;
SVCT SPB;SW2;PU603,617;
PD856,617;PD856,870;
PD605,870;PD603,617;

SPA;SW2;ST0;PU603,617;PM0;PD8
56,617;PD856,870;PD605,870;PD60
3,617;PM2;FP;

8.3.2 Sample Symbol Library Format for Composite Complex Linestyle Symbols

The following sample Symbol Library sequence illustrates the step from the “Single Unit" type of
complex linestyle to the "Composite" type. The complex linestyle achres51.lin LC(ACHRES51)
has been modified as follows (refer to definitions of file formats):

Complex Linestyle achres51.lin:

LNST 10LS03354NIL
LIND 38ACHRES51001080081002729005030044600572
LXPO 64boundary of an area where anchoring is prohibited or
restricted^_
LCRF 6ACHMGD
LVCT 29SPA;SW1;PU446,810;PD747,810;
LVCT 24PU595,810;SCVLINEMAG,2;
LVCT 25PU1208,810;SCNOANCHOR,2;
LVCT 31SPA;SW1;PU1655,810;PD1957,810;
LVCT 25PU1808,810;SCVLINEMAG,2;
LVCT 31SPA;SW1;PU2248,810;PD2552,810;
LVCT 25PU2404,810;SCVLINEMAG,2;
LVCT 31SPA;SW1;PU2874,810;PD3175,810;
LVCT 25PU3024,810;SCVLINEMAG,2;

35
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
NOTE: The VLINEMAG and NOANCHOR symbols will be embedded in the linestyle at the
position given by the last position of the pen before the inclusion the embedded symbol. The
only vectors in this linestyle are the four horizontal dashes that are to be drawn.

Symbol noanchor.sym:
SYMB 7SY00000
SYMD 39NOANCHORV012070084800431005030098700572
SXPO 36Anchor symbol with a line through it
SCRF 6ACHMGD
SVCT 32SPA;SW1;PU1208,572;PD1208,1074;
SVCT 31SPA;SW1;PU1052,721;PD1356,721;
SVCT 55SPA;SW1;PU1005,971;PD1111,1075;PD1309,1075;PD1407,974;
SVCT 31SPA;SW1;PU1418,640;PD987,1071;

Symbol vlinemag.sym:
SYMB 7SY00000
SYMD 39VLINEMAGV005950081000010000100059500810
SXPO 28Vertical Chart-Magenta Line
SCRF 6ACHMGD
SVCT 29SPA;SW1;PU595,810;PD595,970;

36
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
8.3.3 Sample Implementation of the Composite Complex Linestyle Symbols

The following is a simplified example for determining rotation of the symbol that is part of the
complex linestyle. This example uses the ACHRES51 complex linestyle described in the
documentation.

Each symbolization instruction will be drawn in sequence. The diagrams are as follows:

STEP 1: Draw the first straight line segment along the edge of the object.

LVCT 28SPA;SW1;PU446,810;PD747,810;

The edge to
be
symbolized.

Direction of
the line.

STEP 2: Draw the first LINEMAG symbol at position 595, 810.

LVCT 23PU595,810;SCVLINEMAG,2;

Determine the angle of the slope of the line at the

position 595,810.

if x1 = 5 and y1 = 10
x2 = 10 and y2 = 5

The angle of the slope of the tangent is 135

degrees. Remember that 0 degrees is in the
direction of the y-axis.

Subtract 90 degrees to determine the rotation of

the symbol.
Direction of
the line. 135 - 90 = 45 degrees.

37
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
STEP 3: Draw the first NOANCHORsymbol at position 1208, 810.

LVCT 24PU1208,810;SCNOANCHOR,2;

Determine the angle of the slope of the line

at the position 1208, 810.

if x1 = 5 and y1 = 10
x2 = 10 and y2 = 5

The angle of the slope of the tangent is 135

degrees. Remember that 0 degrees is in the
direction of the y-axis.

Subtract 90 degrees to determine the

Direction of rotation of the symbol.
the line.
135 - 90 = 45 degrees.

STEP 4: Repeat with the other straight line segments and the VLINEMAG symbols.

LVCT 30SPA;SW1;PU1655,810;PD1957,810;
LVCT 24PU1808,810;SCVLINEMAG,2;
LVCT 30SPA;SW1;PU2248,810;PD2552,810;
LVCT 24PU2404,810;SCVLINEMAG,2;
LVCT 30SPA;SW1;PU2874,810;PD3175,810;
LVCT 24PU3024,810;SCVLINEMAG,2;

The resulting line is ...

Direction of
the line.

38
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
8.4 Symbology Instruction for Area Objects

The SHOWAREA instruction was designed to symbolize area objects. It performs a variety of fill
operations. The prime requirement is that the area symbolization must always be clearly visible
in the part of the area that lies within the viewing window of the ECDIS. If the area covers a
large part of the viewing window, more than one symbol may be required. On the other hand, a
secondary requirement is not to show more symbols than necessary, as this will cause
distracting clutter. One solution is to centre a symbol in the part of the area exposed by the
viewing window.

8.4.1 Fill Operations

An area can be identified in several ways:

- with an opaque colour fill (e.g. depth areas);

- with a transparent colour fill (e.g. traffic separation zone);
- with a pattern of symbols (e.g. traffic arrows) or texture (e.g. pack ice)
- with a symbol or text located on a position inside the area (e.g. traffic arrow)

A transparent colour fill may overlap an opaque fill and a patterned fill may overlap any other fill,
including another patterned fill. For overlapping fills the respective area has to be filled more
than once in a sequence of several area-fill operations.

8.4.2 Transparent Fill

The presentation library supports two methods of transparent fill.

1.) with only a percentage of the pixels having the fill colour (stippled fill, pseudo
transparency);

2.) by mixing the fill and underlying colour at each pixel, according to the fill
percentage.

When method 1 and a 4 pixel group is used to achieve transparency then only the percentages
25%, 50% and 75% can be used for the transparency. For compatibility with both transparency
methods only percentage values 25%, 50% and 75% are used within the presentation library.

The following explains the pseudo-transparency that can be achieved by method 1.

If an area of 4 by 4 pixels has to be filled with a transparent colour only 3, 2 or 1 pixel(s) of this
area are tinted with the opaque fill colour while the remaining pixel(s) are tinted using the colour
'TRNSP' (= 100% transparent, see 4.2.1), which means the colour fill is not performed for these
pixels. Thus the colour of the underlying pixels still can be seen through. On a high resolution
screen the result will be very close to a real transparent fill.

39
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
* = pixel tinted in fill colour O = pixel tinted in TRNSP (transparent)

* * opaque fill with * * 25% transparency

0% transparency

* * * O

transparency parameter = 0 Transparency parameter = 1

* O * O
50% transparency 75% transparency

O * O O

transparency parameter = 2 Transparency parameter = 3

Because it is very likely that most of the ECDIS systems do a transparent fill with this technique
only the 25%, 50% and 75% percentages for the transparency are used within the presentation
library.

8.5 Area Symbolization by a centred Symbol

Centred symbols are used to reduce clutter in areas of heavy traffic. Since such areas may be
large we use large symbols and since many restrictions may apply to a given area (e.g. traffic
lane; precautionary area; no anchoring or fishing) the symbols have built-in offsets to prevent
overwriting.

8.5.1 Positioning centred symbols and text

A pivot point for centred symbols and text will be at the centre of the area, or close enough to
the centre that it is evident which area the symbol applies to. The offsets for symbols and text
are given with respect to the pivot point.

Multiple centred symbols are often used. For example, a traffic lane with restrictions on entry
and on fishing will have a centred traffic arrow and an offset “entry restricted” symbol with a
subscript “!” to indicate that other restrictions apply.

If the centre of the symbol bounding box falls outside of the area then it must not be drawn.

There are situations where the chart display will split objects into multiple parts appearing in the
ECDIS display as separate objects. In this situation the system must calculate the c of g of each
part of the object and display centred symbols in each part.

40
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Fig 4. Centred Symbols

8.5.1.1 Centred symbol

A centred symbol must remain within the area even when the border of the display
progressively truncates the area. This can be achieved by repeatedly re-calculating the centre
of gravity (c of g) of the area, make sure the symbol remains within the area, this is particularly
important if the area is concave (e.g. L shaped, or a disc). One method of doing this if the c of g
falls outside the area is to subdivide the area by the x,y coordinates of the calculated c of g then
recalculate the component areas recursively until a point within the object is found.

8.5.2 Centred symbols on a ship-centred display

Some ECDIS draw a true-motion display which is updated frequently enough to keep own-ship
close to the centre. If, when using this display mode, the situation arises that the display
window lies completely within an area which is symbolised by centred symbols, these symbols
will draw close to or under the own-ship symbol (having lower display priority) and will cause
clutter and confusion.

IMPORTANT: Manufacturers who use a ship-centred display must keep any centred area
symbols a minimum of 20 mm from the own-ship symbol to avoid a potentially dangerous and
confusing display.

8.5.3 Calculating the representative point of an area

The default method for identifying the representative point of an area must be the centre of
gravity algorithm.
A method for finding the centre of gravity of an area must be adopted by the ECDIS
manufacturer.

41
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
This must ensure that the correct symbol is viewable on screen even when the area is only
partially on screen. It must also be robust enough to uniquely identify areas which are concave,
and where the centre is outside the area (for example, in an L-shaped area the centre is not
within the area but the symbol must be drawn inside).

If the c of g algorithm fails to identify the position within the area the manufacturer must choose
another more suitable calculation.

8.5.4 Patterns Fill & Textures for areas

Fill patterns use widely spaced symbols, for example for a prohibited area. Textures consist of
continuous shapes, such as the dots of a dredged area or the diamond pattern that highlights
water of depth less than the safety contour at night.

The form of a pattern symbol or texture unit may be described by a pixel array or vector
description.

Fill patterns may be either staggered or linear:

--------- -----------
| && | | &&& |
| | | |
| && | Staggered | &&& | linear
| | | |
| && | | &&& |
--------- -----------
The Presentation Library only uses fixed pattern fill spacing, the pattern must not move as the
Mariner pans the chart display.

The position where an area fill with a pattern symbol is started must be based on a geographical
position and not on an edge of the screen. If the fill pattern was based on an edge of the screen
the pattern symbols would not stay on the same position of the chart while the picture was
moving underneath in centred mode. Also do not base a fill pattern on the edge of the area to
be filled. This will result in a strange looking pattern fill when two adjacent areas are filled by the
same pattern.

Note: The symbols of a pattern fill must be closer together for a small or thin area, to ensure
enough symbols are seen, and farther apart for a large area, to avoid clutter.

The pattern type and the symbol spacing gives full control over a set of variations (|#| represents
the pattern symbol):

42
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 |#|#|#| Linear type with |#|#|#| staggered type with
|#|#|#| constant space = 0 |#|#| constant space = 0
|#|#|#| |#|#|#|

|#| |#| |#| Linear type with |#| |#| |#| staggered type with
constant space > 0 constant space > 0
|#| |#| |#| |#| |#|

|#| |#| |#| |#| |#| |#|

Linear type with variable spacing

|#| |#| |#| minimum distance |#| |#| |#| maximum distance
(small area / scale (large area / scale
|#| |#| |#|
|#| |#| |#|
|#| |#| |#|

|#| |#| |#|

Staggered type with variable spacing

|#| |#| |#| minimum distance |#| |#| |#| maximum distance
(small area / scale (large area / scale
|#| |#|
|#| |#|
|#| |#| |#|

|#| |#| |#|

The vertical and horizontal distance between pattern symbols is given in the pattern definition
(see Appendix C). This distance is the space between symbol covers. The symbol cover is
calculated by taking the symbol's bounding box and expanding it to include the pivot point. This
mechanism allows the pivot point to be used for fine adjustments to symbol spacing.

Note: An area pattern which is described in the written «Description of Symbols» of the symbol
library as a «pattern of symbols» (e.g., FSHHAV02) may be substituted by a single centred
symbol. However, this must never be done with an area texture (pattern of symbols, e.g.,
NODATA03, RCKLDG01, TSSJCT02, etc.)

8.6 Area Boundaries

8.6.1 Plain and Symbolized Boundaries

The Presentation Library provides look-up tables for plain area boundaries (intended for use at
small scale to reduce clutter) and symbolized area boundaries (intended for use at very large
scale to show immediately on which side of the boundary the area lies and to identify the area).

43
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Note: Centred area symbols must also be used with symbolized boundaries to symbolize the
case when the entire display window lies within an area.

The Mariner must be given the option to select use of either plain or symbolized boundaries.
See also section 8.2 about the limitations of symbolized linestyles on curved boundaries.

8.6.2 Masked Lines

Masked lines (MASK subfield of FSPT field set to {1}) and cell boundary lines (edges encoded
with [USAG] = {3} ) must not be drawn."

8.6.3 Area Borders

When areas are filled with a colour or a pattern the borders must be included in the fill as well.
This generates an image without gaps between neighbouring areas. It is also important for a
perfect fit of adjacent cells. If the borders of the area are to be distinguished from the area's fill,
the borders have to be re-drawn on top of the fill. This is forced when a SHOWLINE instruction
(see section 9.3) is called within a SHOWAREA instruction. The SHOWLINE instruction then
performs the presentation of the border.

8.7 Colours and Descriptions for Symbols

The colours and descriptions for all symbols in the symbol library are listed in the hard copy
addendum containing the "ECDIS Chart 1", which is bound with the Colour & Symbol
Specifications. The general naming convention for symbols is described in the following table:

Objects Drawing InstructionDescription Example

Symbols SY(AAAAAAnn) where A = abbreviated name, SY(ACHARE02)
n = serial number

Anchorage area as a point at small

scale, or anchor points of mooring
trot at large scale

SY(AAAAAA5n) centred symbol for area SY(ACHRES51)

Area where anchoring is

prohibited or restricted

SY(AAAAAA6n) centred symbol for area with SY(ACHRES61)

added caution restriction

Area where anchoring is

prohibited or restricted, with other
cautions

SY(AAAAAA7n) centred symbol for area with SY(ACHRES71)

added information restriction

44
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Area where anchoring is prohibited
or restricted, with other information

Lines LS(type, thickness, simple line of type solid, dashed LS(DASH,1,CHGRD)

colour) or dotted
NAVNLE

LC(AAAAAAnn) is a complex line LC(FERYRT01)

Ferry Route

LC(AAAAAA5n) is a complex linestyle for LC(DWRUTE51)

an area boundary

Boundary of a deep water route

Area AC(CCCCC) is an area colour fill, where AC(CHBRN)

C is the colour token

Built-Up Area

AC(CCCCC,n) is a transparent area colour fill, AC(TRFCF,3)

where n = transparency
Traffic Separation Zone

TRFCF = magenta, faint

75% transparency

AP(AAAAAAnn) is an area pattern fill AP(AIRARE02)

Airport pattern fill

NOTE: All names (A,n) for symbols, complex lines and area patterns (but not colour fills) have 8
characters.

45
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
9 Description of the Symbology Commands
Symbology commands are used in the look-up table entries to perform the symbolization of
objects. Currently there is a choice of five commands used in the lookup tables:

- SHOWTEXT (TE and TX) to display text labels

- SHOWPOINT (SY) to symbolize points and place symbols inside areas
- SHOWLINE (LC and LS) to symbolize lines and borders of areas
- SHOWAREA (AP and AC) to symbolize areas
- CALLSYMPROC (CS) to call conditional symbology procedures

The entries in the lookup tables map S-57 object/attribute combinations to sequences of
command words which describe in precise detail the symbology required to be displayed. This
section describes the meaning, syntax and operation of the command words used in the lookup
tables.

Entries in the lookup tables may be composed of more than one command word, for example
the lookup for ACHARE is:

“SY(ACHARE51);LS(DASH,2,CHMGF);CS(RESTRN01)”

This displays the ACHARE51 symbol in the centre of the area as well as a dashed linestyle in
CHMGF colour and then executes the RESTRN01 conditional symbology procedure in case
other symbols are required.

Each command is capable of accepting one or more parameters. These parameters affect the
way the chosen symbol, line style or pattern fill is displayed. Some parameters can be linked to
the value of an S-57 attribute of the feature object which is the subject of the lookup table entry.
For example, ”SY(TSSLPT51,ORIENT)” translates as the symbol TSSLPT51 oriented in the
direction given by the value of attribute ORIENT.

For variable parameters default values can be provided as a fail-safe in case the attribute
cannot be found in the feature object description. This can be done by assigning a default value
to the parameter e.g. ORIENT='90.0'. The assignment is done within the parameter list of the
command word.

IMPORTANT: The symbology command must be terminated, if a parameter is mandatory (has

to be passed) and no value is assigned to it either because a constant is missed from the
parameter list or an attribute value cannot be found (attribute is missed from the object definition
and no default value was assigned).

This does not mean that the whole symbology instruction is terminated since it may be
composed of more than one command word e.g. the first command word in a symbology
instruction shows a light flare and the second shows a buoy symbol. If the first command fails
the second is still performed and the buoy is shown in the chart.

The full command syntax and parameters are listed in the following sections

46
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
9.1 SHOWTEXT

Name:
TX (Display of textual labels) or
TE (Display of numeric or other formatted text strings)

Syntax:
TX (STRING, HJUST, VJUST , SPACE , ‘CHARS’ , XOFFS , YOFFS , COLOUR ,
DISPLAY);
TE (‘FORMAT’ , ‘ATTRIB1,ATTRIB2,…’, HJUST, VJUST, SPACE, CHARS, XOFFS,
YOFFS,COLOUR, DISPLAY);

Description:
Show a text string at a particular position on screen. In order to show text on the display two
commands are used.:
1. For purely alphanumeric text, the “TX” Command is used.
2. For numeric text, a prefix is normally used to distinguish between numbers and
soundings. For this purpose the “TE” command is used to format the text string
shown on the display.

The description of how the FORMAT/ATTRIB lookups and prefixes work is documented in
section 16.3. The following text must be followed when rendering text on the chart display.

1. Text is normally coloured black, to give best readability under all light conditions.
2. Text must only be displayed when the object it applies to is displayed.
3. Text must always have display priority 8, to ensure it is readable, independent of the
object it applies to.
4. The manufacturer must provide the capability to select "Important Text" and "Other
Text", and he may also provide further text groupings if he so wishes.

The display of text must be controlled independently of the display of the object it applies to and
the Mariner must have full control over the display of text. All text is in the IMO Category "Other
Information". As a guide to organizing the display of text, the last two digits of the SHOWTEXT
instruction give a text classification that distinguishes between "Important" and "Other" text, and
gives further suggested text groupings. The abbreviations used on the ECDIS display are listed
in Section 14.6. All the abbreviations in section 14.6 must be readily accessible to the Mariner.

Parameters:

STRING: Represents the alphanumeric string to be displayed on the display. The STRING
parameter passes a text string in single quotes that shall be written on the ECDIS
screen. For example: TX('DR',2,3,2,'15110',-1,1,CHBLK,50);
Note: the six character acronym of a valid S-57 attribute (e.g. LITVES, OBJNAM)
can also be passed as a parameter to STRING parameter. If the attribute is either
of an enumeration type or list type (e.g. COLOUR), then the enumeration value
must be converted into the respective text string from the attribute definition in the
object catalogue. If the attribute is of a numerical type, it may just be written as a
string. If the attribute is an L-type attribute (e.g. SBDARE, NATSUR) the text
equivalent of the listed attribute values must be written sequentially separated by
a space with no punctuation marks. If the attribute or character string named in a
text command is not included in the SENC object, the text command must be

47
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 disregarded. If the symbology instruction for an object includes more than one
text command, only the text command whose attribute value or character string is
missing must be disregarded; the other text command must be implemented.

HJUST: Horizontal justification parameter: These can have three distinct values:
1. CENTRE – The pivot point is located at the centre of the overall length of
text string
2. RIGHT - The pivot point is located at the right side of the last character of
text string)
3. LEFT (default) - This is the default value. The pivot point is located at the
left side of the first character of text string

VJUST: Vertical justification parameter. These can have three distinct values:
1. BOTTOM (default) - This is the default value. The pivot point is located at
the bottom line of the text string
2. CENTRE - The pivot point is located at the centre line of the text string
3. TOP The pivot point is located at the top line of the text string

SPACE: Character spacing parameter. These can have three distinct values:
1. Fit (not used) - The text string must be expanded or condensed to fit
between the first and last position in a spatial object
2. Standard (default) - The standard spacing in accordance with the typeface
given in CHARS must be used
3. Standard (with word wrap) - the standard spacing in accordance with the
typeface given in CHARS must be used; text longer than 8 characters
must be broken into separate lines by whole words.

CHARS: Font specification parameter. This defines the font to be used for the text display.
There are four numeric components to this parameter and they are concatenated
together and enclosed in single quotes in order to be passed as a single value,
e.g. ‘15110’. The format is therefore ‘abcdd’ where :
a = 1, a plain serif font.
b = 4, 5 or 6 for light, medium or bold text. The default is medium.
c = 1, meaning upright, non-italic text.
d = Body size given in pica points (1 point = 0.351 mm) that specify the height of
an uppercase character. The smallest size to be used is pica 10, and this is
also the default size. Larger sizes may be used.

XOFFS X offset parameter: defines the X-offset of the pivot point given in units of BODY
SIZE (see CHARS parameter) relative to the position of the spatial object (0 is
default if XOFFS is not given or undefined); positive x-offset extends to the right
(the "units of BODYSIZE" means that if for example, the body size is 10 pica
points each unit of offset is 10 (0.351) = 3.51 mm).

YOFFS Y offset parameter: defines the y-offset of the pivot point given in units of BODY
SIZE (see CHARS parameter) relative to the position of the spatial object (0 is
default if YOFFS is not given or undefined); positive y-offset extends downwards.

COLOUR Text colour parameter: colour token as described in section 7 and 15.

48
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
DISPLAY Text display parameter: defines which text grouping the string belongs to.

49
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
9.1.1 SHOWTEXT Examples

"BUAARE","","AC(CHBRN);TX(OBJNAM,1,2,3,'15110',0,0,CHBLK,26);LS(SOLD,1,LANDF)","3
","S","STANDARD","22240"

Name Lookup Description ECDIS Display

table
value
ECDIS OBJNAM Charmouth
Textual
Output
Horizontal 1 Centre
Justification
Vertical 2 Centre
Justification
Text 3 Standard with word
Spacing wrap
Font Style 1 Sans serif
Text 5 Medium
Weight
Text Width 1 Upright
Body Size 10 3.51mm
X-offset 0 No text offset
Y-offset 0 No text offset
Text Colour CHBLK Black
Text Group 26

50
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Formatted Text Example

"BERTHS","","SY(BRTHNO01);TE('Nr %s','OBJNAM',3,1,2,'15110',1,0,CHBLK,29)",
"3","S","OTHER","32440"

Name Lookup Description ECDIS Display

table
value
ECDIS Nr (string
Textual from
Output attribute
OBJNAM)
Horizontal 3 Left
Justification
Vertical 1 Bottom
Justification
Spacing 2 Standard

Font Style 1 Plain serif

Text 5 medium
Weight
Width 1 upright, non-italic text
Body Size 10 3.51mm
X-offset 1 3.51mm
Y-offset 0 No offset
Colour CHBLK Black
Text Group 29

"RECTRC","CATTRK1TRAFIC4","LC(RECTRC10);TE(‘%03.0lf deg’,’ORIENT’,1,
1,2,’15110’,0,-1,CHBLK,11)","6","O","STANDARD","25020"

Name Lookup Description ECDIS Display

table
value
ECDIS Floating point
Textual number from attribute
Output ORIENT followed by
deg
Horizontal 3 Left
Justification
Vertical 1 Bottom
Justification
Spacing 2 Standard

Font Style 1 Plain serif

Text 5 medium
Weight
Width 1 upright, non-italic text
Body Size 10 3.51mm

51
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
X-offset 1 3.51mm
Y-offset 0 No offset
Colour CHBLK Black
Text Group 29
9.2 SHOWPOINT

Name:
SY – Showpoint, Show symbol command.

Syntax:
SY(SYMBOL [, ROT]);

Description:

The SY command displays a symbol at a given point on the display. The command
takes a standard symbol name as its first mandatory argument. A second parameter can
impose a rotation on the symbol about the pivot point. In the case of an area object the
“SY” command is used to display a centred area symbol.

Parameters:

SYMBOL: The name of the symbol to be displayed, e.g. ISODGR01. This will be the name
as defined in the vector description language SYNM field.

ROT: An optional rotation parameter. The following notes apply to this parameter.
1. Symbols with no rotation must always be drawn upright with respect to the
screen.
2. Symbols with a rotation instruction must be rotated with respect to the top of
the screen (-y axis in figure 2 of section 8.1).
3. Symbols rotated by means of the six-character code of an S-57 attribute
such as ORIENT must be rotated with respect to true north.
4. The symbol must always be rotated about its pivot point. Rotation angle is in
degrees clockwise from 0 to 360. The default value is 0 degrees."

9.2.1 SHOWPOINT Example

SY(BOYCAR01);SY(LIGHTDEF,135) :

S-52 Symbol Description ECDIS Example

BOYCAR01 Simplified symbol - North Cardinal Mark
LIGHTDEF, 135 LIGHTDEF is a symbol selected by a conditional
symbology procedure (LIGHTS06). The command
string “SY(LIGHTDEF,135)” selects a default light
flare rotated by 135 degrees

52
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
SY(EBBSTR01,ORIENT)

S-52 Symbol Description ECDIS Example

EBBSTR01 Tidal stream - flood/ebb object, ebb stream symbol
rotated by value from the ORIENT attribute.
In the example ORIENT = 297.3

53
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
9.3 SHOWLINE

Name:
LS – Showline (complex linestyle) or
LC – Showline (simple linestyle).

Syntax:
LS( PSTYLE, WIDTH, COLOUR);
LC(LINNAM);

Description:
The SHOWLINE instruction is designed to symbolize line objects. It is also used within
the SHOWAREA instruction to symbolize area boundaries. The command is used to
show simple or complex line-styles (described below) and subsequent commands may
add a symbol or text as well.

Parameters:

PSTYLE: Predefined line style parameter: One of three values:

'SOLD' (_________)
'DASH' (-----) dash: 3.6 mm; space: 1.8 mm
'DOTT' (.........) dot: 0.6 mm; space: 1.2 mm

WIDTH Line width parameter. Units are 0.32 mm (approximately pixel diameter)

COLOUR Line colour parameter. A valid colour token as described in section 7

LINNAM: Name of complex linestyle. This parameter will symbolise the line using the
complex linestyle named by the LINNAM parameter.

9.3.1 SHOWLINE Example

LS(DASH,2,CHMGD). Displays a dashed line in "chart magenta, dominant", 0.6 mm (2 x 0.3

mm) width.

LC(ACHARE51). Displays the complex line-style called ACHARE51 defined for borders of
anchorage areas. (see below).

54
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
9.4 SHOWAREA

Name:
AP – Showarea (area fill) or
AC – Showarea (pattern fill).

Syntax:
AP(PATTERN)
AC(COLOUR [,TRANSP] )

Description:
The two showarea commands are used for symbolising area objects (often in
conjunction with linestlyes for border rendering). There are two types of colour fill:
1. area fill with a basic colour using one of the standard colour tokens.
2. pattern fill using a pattern to fill areas.

Parameters:

COLOUR: colour fill parameter. A valid colour token as described in section 7

PATTERN: the name of the pattern

TRANSP: Transparency, an optional parameter for colour fills used to make a fill partially
transparent. If the transparency parameter is not set then the default value is 0%,
i.e. an opaque colour fill. There are three permissible values:

1. 25% where 1 out of every 4 pixels use TRNSP

2. 50% where 2 out of every 4 pixels use TRNSP
3. 75% where 3 out of every 4 pixels use TRNSP

55
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
9.4.1 SHOWAREA Examples

S-52 Instruction Description Example

AC(CHBRN) area filled with opaque colour
'chart brown'

AP(DQUALA21);LS(DASH,2,C area filled with pattern for

HGRD) ‘category of zone of
confidence; bordered by a
dashed line in 'chart grey ,
dominant', 0.6 mm width

AC(TRFCF,3); Area filled by magenta, faint

colour with 75%
transparency for traffic
separation zone

56
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
9.5 CALLSYMPROC

Name:
CS – CALLSYMPROC: Call conditional symbology procedure.

Syntax:
CS(PROCNAME);

Description:
The CALLSYMPROC command “CS” calls a named conditional symbology procedure. It is
used either on its own in order to symbolise a particular class of object/attribute combinations or
in conjunction with other commands in order to add symbols to the display dependent on ECDIS
Mariner settings, e.g.

The lookup for ACHARE is “SY(ACHARE51);LS(DASH,2,CHMGF);CS(RESTRN01)”

Note that the calling of the conditional symbology may affect values in the rest of the lookup
table entry, for instance the viewing group or display priority may be affected by the operation of
the conditional symbology procedure invoked by the SY command.

Parameters:

PROCNAME: The name of the conditional symbology procedure to invoke, e.g. RESTRN01 in
the above example. Conditional symbology procedures are normally named by
the object class that is interpreted by the procedure. The name is normally an 8
letter code that is composed of the class code (6 letters) and a serial number (2
letters).

57
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
10. ECDIS Requirements
This section provides ECDIS developers with other details of ECDIS display that must be taken
into account while designing ECDIS.

10.1 Data Consistency

ENC presentation depends very much on the consistency of the underlying S-57 data. Thus
ECDIS manufacturers should be aware of the consistency of the data that will be processed by
their ECDIS.

10.1.1 Unknown Objects

Feature objects must be of an officially adopted object class. If feature objects are of proprietary
non-ENC classes (i.e. not included in S-57 Product Specification for ENC) they must be treated
as members of unknown object classes. There will be no appropriate entry in the look-up tables
but all objects must be presented on the ECDIS screen. The occurrence of such an object must
be logged during transformation from ENC to SENC as an anomaly and the unknown objects
must be displayed using the question mark symbol QUESMRK1 as per section 10.3.3.4.

10.1.2 Unknown or Missing Mandatory Attributes

All mandatory attributes required by S-57 Appendix B1, ENC Specification, including the
changes in Supplement 3, should be populated, except for cases where S-57 Appendix B1
Annex A, Use of the Object Catalogue, deliberately codes by omission (e.g., clauses 5.8.2 and
10.2.1.1). In reality, sometimes the attribute values may not be available and a producer may
encode the attribute value as “unknown.” S-57 defines how null/unknown and missing attributes
are encoded within ENCs. It should be noted that a missing attribute is not “unknown”. The
Presentation Library provides default symbolization for many cases of attribute value omitted
(e.g., in the first line for every object class in the look-up table).

10.1.3 Data Overlaps

The S-57 Product specification for ENC prohibits data overlaps in ENC cells of the same usage
band.

“Cells with the same navigational purpose may overlap. However, data within the cells must not
overlap. Therefore, in the area of overlap only one cell may contain data, all other cells must
have a meta object M_COVR with CATCOV = 2 covering the overlap area. This rule applies
even if several producers are involved”.

Despite the best efforts of the IHO, there are still some areas of the world where ENC overlaps
exist.

Where an overlap of two or more cells exists the ECDIS must only display one cell for the
overlap area and provide a permanent and persisting indication “overlap”.

58
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
10.1.4 Gaps

S-57 Use of the object catalogue states, “There must be no gaps in data between adjoining cells
of the same Navigational Purpose”.

Despite the best efforts of the IHO, there are still some areas of the world where gaps in ENC
coverage exist.

Where gaps in ENC data of the same navigational usage exist, smaller scale data from the
SENC may be used to fill the gap. If there is no smaller scale data available the gap must be
filled with the no data area fill pattern.

10.1.5 No Data Coverage

IMO Performance standards states;

6.1 ECDIS should provide an indication if:

1. the information is displayed at a larger scale than that contained in the
ENC; or
2. own ship’s position is covered by an ENC at a larger scale than that
provided by the display.

IHO Specifications for ECDIS chart content and display S-52:

An indication "refer to the official chart" is required if the display includes

waters for which no ENC at appropriate scale exists.

If a scale boundary is shown on the display, the information in an

overscale area should be identified, and should not be relied on.

A graphical index of the navigational purpose of available data should be

shown on demand.

10.1.6 ENC Coverage

S 57 app. B1 - "ENC Product Specification", section 2.2, describes the cell system and the use
of object class M_COVR to indicate data coverage. Note that a value of M_COVR, CATCVR=2
does not necessarily indicate "no data", since data could be contained in an overlapping cell.

10.1.7 Limit of ENC Coverage: Non-HO Data on the Display

Since the HO will not issue a data coverage diagram, the ECDIS must compile a graphical index
of the HO ENC data available, classified by navigational purpose, and make it available to the
mariner.

The end of HO data need not be identified on the display. The appearance of the “No data”
colour (NODTA) and fill pattern AP(NODATA03) will indicate the end of data.

59
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
If non-HO data is shown on the ECDIS display, its boundary must be identified by the linestyle
LC(NONHODAT). The display priority is 3; over radar; display base; viewing group 11060. Note
that the LC(NONHODAT) is a “one-sided” line and the boundary of the non-HO data must be
drawn according to S-57 rules to ensure that the diagonal stroke of the line is on the non-HO
data side of the line.

10.1.8 No Data Areas

To make sure that the mariner is aware of areas where no data exist, the entire screen must
always be filled with grey NODTA colour fill together with the fill pattern AP(NODATA03) at the
start, before any other information is drawn. The display priority is 0 (allowing non-ENC data to
be overdrawn); radar flag suppressed by radar; the category is DISPLAYBASE and the viewing
group is 11050.

An indication that the mariner must refer to the official chart must be given whenever line
LC(NONHODAT) appears on the display, or whenever the display is comprised of other than
ENC data.

10.1.9 Scale Boundaries

"Navigational purpose" is used in S 57 to express the concept of scale (ENC Product

Specification 2.1).

10.1.9.1 Chart Scale Boundaries

The "chart scale boundaries", where the navigational purpose of the data changes, must be
symbolised on the ECDIS display by a simple linestyle LS(SOLD,1,CHGRD). Alternatively
linestyle LC(SCLBDYnn) may be used, with the double line (indicating better resolution) on the
side of the larger scale data. The display priority is 3; over-radar; standard display; viewing
group 21030.

Only the significant changes from one navigational purpose to another must appear as chart
scale boundaries; boundaries marking minor changes in compilation scale that lie within the
range of a navigational purpose must not be drawn.

10.1.9.2 Graphical Index of Navigational Purpose

The chart catalogue for official charts may be used as a model for the graphical index of
navigational purpose, except that minor changes in compilation scale that lie within the range of
a navigational purpose must not be drawn on this index. Only the significant changes from one
navigational purpose to another must appear.

10.1.10 Overscale

60
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Scale is expressed as a fraction, representing: [length of an object on the chart] / [actual length
of that object on the ground]. Thus 1/10,000 is twice as large a scale as 1/20,000, because the
length of a given object on the chart is twice as long at 1/10,000 scale as at 1/20,000.

The "Compilation Scale" is the reference for overscale calculation. This is coded in the CSCL
subfield of the DSPM field. The object M_CSCL, CSCALE is only used if the compilation scale
is different for some part of the data set, and when encoded must also be taken into account. (S
57 App. B1, Ann. A - "Use of the Object Catalogue").

10.1.10.1 Overscale Indication

The overscale indication is intended to remind the mariner that the size of chart errors is
magnified when he increases the display scale. A 1 mm error at compilation scale of 1/20,000
becomes a 1.3 mm error at a display scale of 1/15,000 and a 2 mm error at 1/10,000.

The overscale factor must be calculated as [denominator of the compilation scale] /

[denominator of the display scale], expressed as, for example "X1.3", or "X2" (using the figures
in the example above.)
This must be indicated on the same screen as the chart display, and treated as display base.
Use colour SCLBR.

This overscale indication is required by IMO PS [3] whenever the display scale exceeds the
compilation scale.

Note: If the display is compiled from more than one ENC of the same compilation scale, and if
the mariner deliberately chooses to zoom in so that the display scale exceeds the compilation
scale, then only the "overscale indication" must be shown. The "overscale pattern"
AP(OVERSC01) must not be shown.

10.1.10.2 Overscale Area at a Chart Scale Boundary

Section 10.1.10.1 above dealt with overscale deliberately selected by the mariner. A different
overscale situation arises when the ship approaches a scale boundary from a larger to a smaller
scale ENC, typically when leaving harbour, as illustrated in the data coverage diagram below.
In combining data from the large scale and the small scale ENCs to generate a display at the
larger scale, the ECDIS will have "grossly enlarged" the small scale data to the left of the scale
boundary on this figure.

In addition to drawing the scale boundaries, the "grossly overscale" part of the display must be
identified with pattern AP(OVERSC01), as illustrated. Its display priority is 3; over-radar;
standard display; viewing group 21030.

In this context, "grossly enlarged" and "grossly overscale" must be taken to mean that the
display scale is enlarged/overscale by X2 or more with respect to the compilation scale. For
example, at the left edge of Fig 5 the display scale of 1/12,500 is X4 the compilation scale of
1/50,000, and so the overscale pattern is required.

Note that in this situation the pattern AP(OVERSC01) must only be shown on the area compiled
from the smaller scale ENC. If the area from the larger scale ENC is also overscale, this must

61
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
be indicated by the "overscale indication". The pattern AP(OVERSC01) must not be shown on
the part of the display taken from the larger scale ENC. For example if the display scale of the
situation in the data coverage diagram was 1/3,500 the area of compilation scale 1/12,500
would have an overscale indication of X 3.6 but would have no pattern AP(OVERSC01).

62
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
10.1.10.3 Larger Scale Data Available

Visualise the opposite situation from that in the data coverage diagram below. This time, the
ship is approaching harbour from the left edge of the figure, displaying an ENC at a compilation
scale of 1/50,000. As the display window begins to cover an ENC at a compilation scale of
1/12,500, the ECDIS must indicate that larger scale data will shortly become available, as
required by IMO PS [3].

Fig 5. Data Coverage Diagram

(The right hand side of the diagram shows the ENC layout with the screen window overlaid, and
the left hand side is enlarged to show the ECDIS display on that screen.)

10.2 Queries

To successfully use the Presentation Library, ECDIS must be capable of performing spatial
queries on ENC data during import and symbolisation. Spatial query is understood as possibility
to inspect graphical position and numerical value of spatial coordinates associated with a
charted object. Spatial query could be available as a part of cursor pick (see 10.8) or as an
independent function. Due to the complex nature of these queries it is recommended that the
inspector of this requirement tests extensively that all required geometric primitives are
accounted for in these tests and that the conditional symbology procedures are thoroughly
understood during manufacture. Refer to section 13 for further details of which queries are
required.

Note: IHO S-64, Edition 3.0.0 contains examples of cases which ECDIS must be able to handle,
such as the safety countour tests in sections 3.3.4 a, b, c & d.

10.3 How to use the Look-Up Tables

Prior to drawing any chart objects on screen, the first action the ECDIS must perform as a fail-
safe measure, is to cover the screen with grey NODTA colour fill together with fill pattern
NODATA03. Display priority is 0, supressed by radar, category “displaybase”, viewing group is
11050. This section describes how S-57 features objects are converted to symbols, line and fill
styles using the lookup tables. A number of ECDIS display requirements derived from the IMO

63
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Performance Standards and the IHO specifications are not handled by look-up tables. These
are described in section 10.5.

64
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
10.3.1 Layout of the Look-Up tables

The S-52 look-up tables are made up of five separate lists. The look-up tables specify how
object classes are presented graphically on the chart display. Each look-up table entry contains
six mandatory fields plus one optional field separated by commas “,” and using the double quote
“ as a text delimiter for each value. The following lookup tables are defined:

1. Symbolised boundaries for area features.

2. Plain boundaries for area features

3. Line features

4. Simplified point features

5. Traditional point features.

10.3.2 Lookup Table Entry Example

"BOYCAR","BOYSHP2","SY(BOYCAN01);TE('by %s','OBJNAM',2,1,2,'15110',-1,-1,CHBLK,21)","8","O","STANDARD","27010"

Field Description Look-Up Table Entry Example

1 feature object acronym BOYCAR
2 feature attribute BOYSHP2
3 symbolization instruction SY(BOYCAN01);TE('by%s','OBJNAM',2,1,2,'15110',-1,-1,CHBLK,21)
4 display priority 8
5 OVERRADAR flag O
6 display category STANDARD
7 optional viewing group 27010

The fields are defined as follows:

1. Feature object acronym – This is the S-57 acronym for a particular feature class, e.g.
BOYCAR, LNDARE etc. A default value of “######” is also defined.

2. Feature attribute combination – This field is used to define a set of feature attributes
which may be matched. It consists of a concatenated list of valid S-57 attribute
acronyms together with optional values. A line in the lookup tables matches a given
feature object if, and only if, fields 1 and 2 match according to the rules defined in this
section.

3. Symbolisation instructions. The instructions to be used to symbolise the feature objects.

This may be composed of any of the symbolization commands defined in section XX of
this document.

4. Display priority

5. OVERRADAR flag

65
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 6. Display category – can be “DISPLAYBASE”, “STANDARD”, “OTHER”, “MARINERS”.

7. Viewing group.

10.3.3 Matching Entries in the Lookup Tables

It is important to note that look-up table lines with the same feature object class in field 1 must
be grouped together and the order defined in the Presentation Library must be preserved, to
provide correct symbolization. The order of the attributes within a given line has no significance,
but the order of the attribute values within a given attribute field (2) is significant. When a
matching line is found for a feature object the lookup table line used for its symbology
instructions must then also be used for display priority, over radar flag, IMO category and
optional viewing group unless modified by a conditional symbology procedure..

10.3.3.1 Look-Up Table Entry Matching

To find the symbology instruction for a specific object, enter the look-up table with the object's
class code and gather all lines that contain the class code in field 1. If only a single line is found,
field 2 of that line must be empty and the object is always shown with the same symbology
regardless of its description.

If there is more than one line in the look-up table, search for the first line each of whose attribute
values in field 2 can also be found in the attribute values of the object. If more than one attribute
value is given in the look-up table, the match to the object must be exact, in order as well as
content.

For example, a look-up table attribute value 4,3,4 is not matched by object attribute values 3,4,3
or 4,3. However, the existence of further attribute values does not invalidate the match: in the
above example object attribute values 4,3,4,7 would match the look-up table, (because value 7
is not used in symbolizing). Use the symbology instruction given by that line in field 3 to
symbolize the object's geometry. As a further example, an object "BCNLAT","COLOUR3,1", for
which there is no exact match in the simplified point look-up table, must be symbolized using the
line for "BCNLAT","COLOUR3".

Look- Up Table Data Match Result

attribute value 4,3,4 attribute values 3,4,3 No Match
attribute values 4,3 No Match
attribute values 4,3,4,7 Match (value 7 is not used in
symbolization)

IMPORTANT: If no look-up table line can be identified where all attribute values in field 2 match
the object's attributes, select the symbology instruction from the first line that contains the object
class code in field 1. Field 2 of this line must be empty and field 3 must contain a fail-safe
generic symbolization instruction.

66
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
10.3.3.2 Look-Up Table Attribute Matching

The rule in the paragraph above applies in the usual case when the look-up table contains
specific values of the attribute in field 2. In this case fields 1 and 2 are of the general form:
"OBJCLS", "ATTRBAiATTRBBj", where ATTRBA (attribute A) and ATTRBB (attribute B) are
drawn from the SENC. Only values “i”" and “j” of ATTRBA and ATTRBB respectively will match.

Other forms of feature object/attribute matching may be used in certain cases:

(i) No value is given for the attribute value in field 2; the value is missing.
This look-up table line is of the form "OBJCLS", "ATTRBA".
It is used when the same symbolization is to be employed for all values of
attribute A.
Any value of the attribute except «unknown» will give a match.

(ii) The placeholder “?” is given for the attribute value.

This look-up table line is of the form "OBJCLS", "ATTRBA?".
Only the attribute value=unknown (i.e., omitted in the data) will give a match in
this case. S-57 defines how “unknown” is encoded as a value for various attribute
types.

Example: "DEPARE","DRVAL1?DRVAL2?","AC(NODTA);AP(PRTSUR01)" etc.,

is the symbolization for an incompletely surveyed area.

(iii) There is one instance where S-57 uses the “omission” of a mandatory attribute
(i.e., the mandatory attribute is not present and the attribute code is omitted) to
code a specific object: “TSSLPT”,””, where ORIENT is omitted, codes a traffic
junction.

In every other case, the first look-up table line for each object class omits all attributes and is
used to give the default symbolization for that feature object..

10.3.3.3 Look-Up Table Conditional Symbology

For some object classes the relation between attribute values and symbology instruction is too
complex or the presentation depends on Mariners' selection. Therefore a conditional symbology
procedure is defined in the "symbolization instruction" field which in turn produces the
symbology instructions for presentation and may modify the priority, the radar flag, the IMO
category and/or viewing group.

10.3.3.4 Symbolizing a non-ENC object class

When there is no look-up table entry matching the object, the look-up table is incomplete or the
object is of an unknown object class, the ECDIS presentation must use the symbol
('QUESMRK1'). All known S-57 attributes permitted for ENCs that have been populated, must
be available for cursor enquiry. Values of unknown attributes must also be available via the
cursor enquiry.

Symbol QUESMRK1

67
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Display Priority 5
Over Radar O
Display Category Standard
Viewing Group 21010

68
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
10.3.3.5 UML Diagram, How to use the Lookup Tables

The following flow chart diagram explains in detail how to use the look-up tables.

act LUT

Get the obj ect's class Get the obj ect's Select either the look-up table for
code (a character geometry type area, line or point symbology
acronym) (area, line or point) depending on the obj ect's geometry
Entry point

Is there any look-up

table line that contains
Select 'QUESTMRK' symbol, the object's class code
LINE style or FILL pattern as in field 1? Select look-up on mariners selection of
fail-safe presentation paper chart or simplified point look-up
depending on obj ect's No table, or of plain or symbolized
geometry. Display priority is 8, boundaries for area look-up table
display category is STANDARD. Yes

Select the v ery first line in

the look-up table that
matches the obj ect's class
code in field 1

Gather all look-up table lines that

Is there more than one line match the obj ect's class code
where the object's class code preserv ing the order of the look-up
can be found in field 1? table. Then search for the first line
w here each attribute v alue in field 2
No Yes
can also be found in the obj ect's
description.

Is there a line each of

whose attribute values
can be found in the
No line w ith object's description?
matching attribute
v alue w as found No
Yes

Select the
identified look-up
table line

Get from the

selected look-up
table line

Is the selected symbology

instruction a call to a
Conditional Symbology
Process the Conditional
Procedure (CALLSYMPROC)?
Symbology Procedure that is
named as parameter of the
Yes 'CALLSYMPROC' instruction.
Select the resulting symbology
instruction.
No

Use the selected symbology

instruction to symbolize the
obj ect's geometry

Do nothing here.
Symbology instruction is
ready to be processed.

End

69
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
10.3.3.6 Not set attributes

The symbology instruction may refer to attributes that are not listed in field 2, for example
TX(OBJNAM). If these attributes are not set in the feature object, this particular command word
must be ignored and the rest of the symbology instruction must be completed.

10.3.3.7 'No Symbol' - Objects

In some cases the "symbolization instruction"-fields in a look-up table line are empty. Such an
explicitly "empty" instruction means that no actual presentation for the respective object is
required by the presentation library. Such objects are not symbolized and they are not shown on
the screen. For example, there is no symbolisation of a point BRIDGE feature The empty entry
into the look-up table is simply for completeness.

10.3.3.8 Presentation of New Object NEWOBJ

The ‘New Object’ feature class has been added to S-57 through Supplement 3. For details on its
use and encoding please see the S-57 Use of the Object Catalogue. NEWOBJ will cater for
future requirements specified by the IMO that affect safety of navigation which cannot
adequately be encoded by any existing S-57 object class. It will not be used unless approved by
the Transfer Standard Maintenance and Application Development Working Group (TSMAD) and
the Digital Imaging and Portrayal Working Group (DIPWG).

For the presentation of objects of class NEWOBJ there are two defined presentations to be
used depending on whether the SYMINS attribute is defined.

To distinguish a new object symbol from the standard “Non ENC object” symbol (magenta
question mark), an exclamation mark shaped in a magenta filled circle has been developed. The
new symbol is named ‘NEWOBJ01’. If the SYMINS attribute is defined then it is used to
symbolise the feature object using the CS(SYMINS01) conditional symbology procedure.

IMPORTANT: Where the ECDIS fails to identify the symbol contained in the SYMINS attribute
the SY(NEWOBJ01) must be used as a default

10.3.4 Display Priority, Radar Priority, Display Category, Viewing group

10.3.4.1 Display Priority

Each symbolization instruction from a look-up table line has a display priority given in field 4.
The display priority can be of a value between '0' and '9', where '9' identifies the highest priority.
The display priority applies irrespective of whether an object is a point, line or area. If the display
priority is equal among objects, line objects have to be drawn on top of area objects whereas
point objects have to be drawn on top of both. If the display priority is still equal among objects
of the same type of geometry (area, line or point) the given sequence in the data structure of the
SENC, or some other neutral criterion, must be used for an arbitrary decision as to which object
is drawn on top. Text must be drawn last (except for own ship etc.), in priority 8.

The display priority must be used to ensure that objects that overlap each other are drawn in the
right sequence. Thus, an object with a higher priority must be drawn after (on top of) an object

70
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
with a lower display priority. However, if two line objects, or two area boundaries, or a line and
an area boundary, are located at the same position and share the same extent (their
coordinates are identical), then the line symbolization with the higher display priority must
suppress the line symbolization of the other object (line or area). Therefore only the line
symbolization of the object (line or area) of the higher display priority is drawn. Where two
objects share the same spatial edge and both have the same display priorities each line must
be symbolized.

Fig 6. Symbolization of shared edges

The coastline object is symbolized with a solid line while the anchorage area is bordered with a
dashed line. Both objects share an edge that is part of the coastline. The symbolization of the
coastline object suppresses the border of the anchorage area since the display priority of the
coastline symbolization is higher. Note that priorities have to be evaluated again, if the
presentation scale changes (see section 8.4).

This suppression only applies to line objects and area boundaries. The rule for centred symbols,
area patterns and point symbols is that all symbols must be drawn with the highest priority
object being drawn last independent of the geometric primitive (point, line or area).

There is one exception to this rule for suppressing overlapping lines. The manual chart
correction lines LC(CHCRIDnn) and LC(CHCRDELn) must coexist with the underlying line. Both
LC(CHCRIDnn) or LC(CHCRDELn) and the underlying line must be drawn.

Overdrawing may be essential, for example in the case of a buoy, and its name and light flare.
These are given offsets in the symbol library to avoid the symbols being drawn over each other.

71
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
The following table gives an indication of how priorities are allocated. Within each group
priorities are adjusted to meet specific cases:

Data Groupings Display Priorities

no data filled area pattern priority 0
S-57 group 1 filled areas priority 1
superimposed areas priority 2, 3
restricted area priority 5
traffic areas priority 6
land features priority 4, 5
water features priority 3, 4, 5, 6
coastline features priority 5, 6, 7
routeing lines priority 5, 6, 7
symbols for lines and areas priority 4, 5, 6
hazards (bridge, safety contour) priority 8
Mariners VRM & EBL priority 9
own ship priority 9

NOTE: To ensure seamless presentation of a single intended usage (navigational

purpose) all objects of same display priority from all cells in same intended usage must
be drawn together.

10.3.4.2 RADAR Flag

Field 5 of the look-up table lines contain the OVERRADAR flag. It classifies whether objects are
shown on top of the raw radar picture. Two different values can occur in this field:

Value Description
O puts the object's presentation over radar
S the presentation is suppressed by radar

Radar Table

OVERRADAR is similar to a display layer that assigns objects to the information shown on top
of the raw radar picture. As a fail-safe, objects are automatically assigned ‘O’ OVERRADAR if
field 5 of a look-up table line is empty.

When the RADAR overlay is present on the ECDIS chart display the OVERRADAR flag takes
precedence over the objects display priority.

10.3.4.3 Display Categories

72
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Every entry to the look-up table matches either all objects of an object class or a subset of
objects. Therefore the look-up table can be used to assign the objects to the IMO Display
Categories (see IMO Performance Standards for ECDIS [2]).

The IMO "display categories" are as follows:

Display Base is that part of the Standard Display which must be permanently retained on the
display (see IMO Performance Standards [2]).

Standard Display information is that part of the SENC which must be presented when the
ECDIS display is first switched on, and at any time by a single operator action (see IMO
Performance Standards [2]).

All Other Information includes all SENC information that is not in the Standard Display, to be
displayed on demand by the Mariner.

10.3.4.4 Independent Mariner Selections

There are a number of settings in ECDIS that can be operated by the Mariner that will alter the
charted display. Each of these objects has a display category assigned but must only be shown
in that display category if the Mariner has decided to select this option. Listed alphabetically
below are the Mariner selectors that must be available in ECDIS, the name of the selector in the
ECDIS GUI and a functional description. There are a number of other optional extra Mariner
selectors that can be included in ECDIS at the bottom of the table.

Clause ECDIS Name of Selector Function Description

Implementation in ECDIS
14.2 Mandatory Accuracy Independent pattern
selection of CATZOC,
viewing group 31010.
Symbol LOWACC01,
viewing group 31011
10.4.1 Mandatory Date dependent Date Dependent Objects
– to turn on and off the
display of temporal
objects by viewing a date
range.
13.2.7 Mandatory Full light lines Full Light Sector Lines
10.4.1.1 Mandatory Highlight date Indication of date
dependent dependent objects – to
turn on and off the
display of symbol
CHDATD01
10.6.1.1 Mandatory Highlight info Additional Information -
viewing group 31030
(INFORM, NINFOM)

Highlight document Additional Documents –

viewing group 31031

73
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 (TXTDSC, NTXDS,
PICREP)
10.3.3.4 Mandatory Unknown Unknown Objects - to
turn on the display of
objects which are not
specified in S-52
standard – viewing group
21010
10.7.1.5 Mandatory Update review Review of Updates –
This function turns on
colour highlighting for the
objects which have
undergone modification
in the process of the
latest accepted
correction;
10.4.2 Mandatory Scale min Turn SCAMIN Off
10.5.7 Mandatory Shallow pattern Shallow Water Pattern
13.2.24 Mandatory Shallow water Isolated Dangers in
dangers Shallow Water – to turn
on the display of isolated
danger objects which are
located in the unsafe
waters - viewing group
24050
14.2 Optional Contour label Contour Labels – to turn
on the display of contour
labels (incl. label of
safety contour) – viewing
group 33021, 33022
Optional Four shades Four Colour Depth
Shades
10.6.1.2 Optional National language National Language
NOBJNM, text group 31
12 Mandatory Paper chart / Point symbol style
simplified symbols
12 Mandatory Plain / Symbolized Line symbol style
boundaries

74
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
10.3.4.5 Mariners’ objects

All Mariners’ navigational objects, which are listed in the look-up table under “Non-standard
classes”, are assigned in the look-up tables to a “Mariners”category.

The display of Mariners’ objects is independent of the ECDIS display category (Display Base,
Standard and All Other).

10.3.4.6 Viewing groups

The revised IMO Performance Standards for ECDIS, section 5.5. state, "It should be easy [for
the mariner] to add or remove information from the ECDIS display," although, "It should not be
possible to remove information in the Display Base."

The viewing groups in table 14.2 are a framework on which the ECDIS manufacturer can base
his own method of providing this capability. The minimum mandatory ECDIS implementation is
described in 14.3 and 14.5.

Viewing groups are 'on' or 'off' switches for use by the Mariner to control the information
appearing on the display. An item in the viewing group table may be a chart object; a Mariners'
or other time-variable object; a special symbol such as the "depth less than safety contour"
pattern; or a non-ENC feature such as the shallow water pattern. In edition 3.3 further 'symbol
viewing groups' were added, to allow auxiliary symbols such as contour labels, the 'low
accuracy' symbol, etc., to be switched on or off without affecting the primary symbolisation of the
object.

Viewing group layers in section 14.2 are presented in separate tables for each IMO display
category (i.e., Display Base, Standard Display, and All Other Information). Each viewing group
is identified by a five digit number. Numbers that are even increments of 10 000 are used to
identify general layers, which are subdivided into other layers that have numbers starting with
the same first two digits. These are all listed under lettered sections corresponding to INT1 [1]
sections.

For example, under the heading, "J, K, L Seabed, Obstructions, Pipelines," the table shows
34000, "Seabed Information: rocks, wrecks & obstructions, pipes & cables." This layer is then
broken down further, such as 34010, "Nature of seabed (SBDARE)," 34030, "Pipeline area
(PIPARE), cable area (CBLARE)," etc.

There are separate groups of tables for "Chart Information" and "Mariners' Information."

IMPORTANT: Viewing groups from different IMO categories must not be combined under a
single display selector.

Although the viewing groups reflect the IMO category, the authority for category is the
classification in field 6 of the look-up table.

The Presentation Library provides a similar classification for text - see sections 9.1 and 14.4.

75
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
10.3.4.7 Display Priority & Display Category in Conditional Symbology Procedures

A conditional symbology procedure is called from the look-up tables (see 14). Thus the
symbolization that is generated by the procedure has the display priority, OVERRADAR
classification and display category which is given in field 4, 5 & 6 of the look-up table entry from
which the procedure was called.

A conditional symbology procedure can assign the symbolization to another display category,
put it on top of radar or give it a different display priority if necessary. Thus it 'overwrites' the
default assignments given in the look-up table e.g. if a depth contour is identical with the safety
contour the depth contour is assigned to the DISPLAYBASE category (see symbology
procedure diagram 'DEPCNT03', section 14).

In the symbology procedure diagram the new assignment is given explicitly if the conditional
symbology procedure overwrites the default look-up table assignments. The default
assignments from the look-up tables are valid if there is no explicit assignment for display
category, display priority or OVERRADAR.

10.3.5 Check Symbol SY(CHKSYM 01)

The symbol SY(CHKSYM01) has been retained for use in checking symbol size.

10.4 Display of objects - Date Dependent and Display Scale

10.4.1 Date dependent ENC Objects

There are a number of objects within the Marine environment, which are seasonal, such as
racing buoys. These objects are only to be displayed over a certain period, S-57 uses the
attributes Period Start (PERSTA) and Period End (PEREND) to encode these dates. Other
objects, such as traffic separation schemes, use the attributes Date Start (DATSTA) and Date
End (DATEND) to indicate their introduction or removal. In order for the Mariner to receive
important changes to traffic separation schemes before the event Hydrographic Offices are
required to provide updates or new editions containing the alterations at least one month before
they come into force. Any S-57 object with one of the above attributes must not be displayed
outside its effective dates unless requested by the Mariner.

To provide the Mariner with effective route planning capabilities and for the look-ahead function
during route monitoring ECDIS must display date dependent chart data based on a Mariner
selected date or date range (start viewing date and end viewing date).

During route planning and monitoring the Mariner must be able to select a date or date range to
display all date dependent chart objects. The display of date dependent information is indicated
by the symbol SY(CHDATD01) section 10.4.1.1

Example: A new traffic separation scheme is coming into effect on 01.01.2013, it has been
encoded by the ENC producer using the attribute date start (DATSTA). The current date is
12.12.2012 and the Mariner is planning a route that will cross this area over the effective start
period.

76
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
The ECDIS must be capable of providing the Mariner the ability to set the date he will be in the
area (02.01.2013) and the system must show the new traffic scheme.

IMPORTANT: When viewing date or date range do not include current date. The Mariner must
be informed by a permanent indication on the chart display that the date has been adjusted.
Please use one of the following options below.

Display Not Real Time – Display is based on date dd mmm yyyy

Or

Display Not Real Time – Display is based on viewing date range from dd mmm
yyyy to dd mmm yyyy

(Note: dd mmm yyyy = Day, Month, Year, example; 28 Jan 2014)

10.4.1.1 Indication of date dependent objects

All objects for which any of the values for the attributes DATSTA,DATEND, PERSTA PEREND
are within the Mariner selected date range must be indicated using SY(CHDATD01).

10.4.2 Scale-Dependent Objects

To reduce screen clutter most objects within ENC will carry the attribute SCAMIN to specify the
smallest display scale at which they must be drawn. At display scales smaller than SCAMIN the
object must not be drawn. For example, an object with a SCAMIN value of 50,000, indicating a
scale of 1/50,000, must not be drawn on an ECDIS display of 1/60,000.

IMPORTANT: ECDIS must provide the Mariner a selector to turn off the SCAMIN attribute to
display all objects in the chart display.

10.5 IMO Presentation Instructions not Handled by Look-up Tables

In some cases the Presentation Library does not provide a symbology instruction in the look-up
tables or flow chart of a conditional symbology procedure that specifies how to present a
specific feature on the ECDIS screen. The reason is, that such a feature cannot be clearly
identified as an S-57 object class or it appears to be illogical to include it to the Mariners'
navigational object classes (see Part II for further details and definitions of the Mariners'
navigational object classes).

Therefore, the following presentation instructions are in free text in order to assist the
manufacturer to set up a satisfactory and comprehensive ECDIS display.

77
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
10.5.1 Scalebar and Latitude Scale

For display scales larger than 1/80,000 (e.g. a scale of 1/50,000) draw symbol 'SCALEB10' on
the left side of the chart display, bottom justified and 3mm in from the border of the display.
Make sure the symbol is properly sized by your software to represent 1 nautical mile (1852 m)
at the scale of the display. For display scales of 1/80,000 or smaller (e.g. 1/250,000) use symbol
'SCALEB11', similarly located, and scaled to represent 10 miles at the scale of the display.

Symbol SCALEB10
SCALEB11
Display Priority 9
Over Radar O
Display Category Base
Viewing Group 11030

10.5.4 North Arrow

Use symbol 'NORTHAR1' to indicate true north. Place it in the top left corner of the chart
display, inside the scalebar. Rotate the symbol to true north if the display is other than north up,
and make sure it is clear of the scalebar even if the latter extends the full height of the display

Symbol NORTHAR1
Display Priority 9
Over Radar O
Display Category Base
Viewing Group 11040

10.5.5 Graticule

If the ECDIS shows a graticule (IMO PS [2]) the lines must be one unit wide, CHBLK.

10.5.6 Display Mode

The ECDIS manufacturer must provide the indication of display mode required in the display
base by IMO PS [2].

10.5.7 Shallow Water Pattern

When the entire water area on the ECDIS display is of less depth than the safety contour, it is
not possible for the Mariner to easily detect this problem. The issue is exacerbated when the
ECDIS is set to night mode due to the small differences between the depth area shades in the
ECDIS chart display. Therefore S-52 provides a faint lattice pattern DIAMOND1 to distinguish
shallow water (see conditional symbology procedure SEABEDnn).

IMPORTANT: The Mariner must be provided with a selection to turn the shallow water pattern
on or off from within the ECDIS.

78
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Symbol DIAMOND1
Display Priority 3
Over Radar S
Display Category Standard
Viewing Group 23010

10.5.8 Black Level Adjustment Symbol

Unless the brightness and contrast controls of the monitor, are properly adjusted there is a
danger that information may be lost from the chart display, particularly at night. Symbol
BLKADJ01 is provided for checking correct adjustment and for re-adjusting as necessary. It
must be available for call-up by the Mariner as required. Instructions for its use are given in
section 18.3 and S-52, section 4.2.4.5. Display priority is 9; over radar; IMO category is
standard display; viewing group does not apply as the black level adjustment symbol is a case
of special call-up.

10.5.9 Detection and Notification of Navigational Hazards

The IMO Performance Standard for ECDIS MSC.232(82), clause 11.3.5 Route planning states;

“An indication should also be given if the Mariner plans a route closer than a user-specified
distance from a point object, such as a fixed or floating aid to navigation or isolated danger”.

Clause11.4.6 Route monitoring states;

“An indication should be given to the Mariner if, continuing on its present course and
speed, over a specified time or distance set by the Mariner, own ship will pass closer
than a user-specified distance from a danger (e.g. obstruction, wreck, rock) that is
shallower than the Mariner's safety contour or an aid to navigation”.

The following table lists the S-57 objects and their attributes that satisfy the conditions above
and must precipitate an indication within the ECDIS. The point, line or areas must be graphically
indicated using the instructions contained in the lookup tables named “indhlt”. “indhlt” is not an
ENC charted object class, but an object that must be created by the ECDIS. See Fig 7 for
example.

NOTE: This is a minimum requirement and does not preclude providing additional functionality
allowing Mariner selection to individually alarm on each object class.

S-57 Objects Condition (if any) Geometric primitive

BCNCAR POINT
BCNISD POINT
BCNLAT POINT
BCNSAW POINT
BCNSPP POINT
BOYCAR POINT

79
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
BOYINB POINT
BOYISD POINT
BOYLAT POINT
BOYSAW POINT
BOYSPP POINT
BRIDGE POINT, LINE, AREA
CBLOHD LINE
DAYMAR POINT
PIPOHD LINE
CONVYR LINE, AREA
MORFAC POINT, LINE, AREA
NEWOBJ CLSNAM = Virtual AtoN, * POINT
FSHFAC POINT, LINE, AREA
ICEARE AREA
LITFLT POINT
LITVES POINT
LNDARE POINT, LINE
LOGPON POINT, AREA
OFSPLF POINT, AREA
OILBAR LINE
PILPNT POINT
PYLONS POINT, AREA
OBSTRN **DEPTH_VALUE < safety POINT, LINE, AREA
contour value
UWTROC DEPTH_VALUE < safety POINT
contour value
WRECKS DEPTH_VALUE < safety POINT, AREA
contour value
SOUNDG EXPSOU=2 and VE3D POINT
subfield<safety contour value

*Denotes that all New Objects with the object class name pre-fix ‘Virtual AtoN’ must be
indicated.
** DEPTH_VALUE is not an S-57 attribute, it is derived from CSP OBSTRNnn and WRECKSnn.
The safety contour value is set by the user.

80
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Fig 7. Example of indication highlighting ECDIS described in 10.5.9 and 10.5.10

10.5.10 Detection of Areas, for which Special Conditions Exist.

The IMO Performance Standard for ECDIS MSC.232(82), clause 11.3.5 Route Planning states;

“An indication should be given if the Mariner plans a route closer than a user-specified
distance from the boundary of a prohibited area or a geographic area for which special
conditions exist.”

Clause 11.4.4 Route Monitoring states;

"ECDIS should give an alarm or indication, as selected by the Mariner, if, within a specified time
set by the Mariner, own ship will cross the boundary of a prohibited area or area for which
special conditions exist".

The IMO Performance Standard, Appendix 4, specifies the following areas which ECDIS must
detect and provide an alert or indication.

Traffic separation zone

Inshore traffic zone
Restricted area
Caution area
Offshore production area
Areas to be avoided
Military practice area
Seaplane landing area
Submarine transit lane
Anchorage area

81
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Marine farm/aquaculture
PSSA (Particularly Sensitive Sea Area)

The following table provides an authoritative mapping between the areas identified within the
IMO Performance standard for ECDIS and S-57 feature objects, their attributes and geometric
primitives. The point, line or area features must be graphically indicated using the presentation
named as “indhlt” in the look-up tables.

IMO Special condition S-57 Attribute Geometry

Object
Traffic separation zone TSEZNE AREA
Inshore traffic zone ISTZNE AREA
Restricted area RESARE RESTRN !=14 AREA
and CATREA
!= 28
Caution area CTNARE AREA, POINT
Offshore production area OSPARE AREA
Areas to be avoided RESARE RESTRN = 14 AREA
Military practice area MIPARE AREA, POINT
Seaplane landing area SPLARE AREA, POINT
Submarine transit lane SUBTLN AREA
Anchorage area ACHARE AREA, POINT
Marine farm/aquaculture MARCUL AREA, LINE, POINT
PSSA (Particularly Sensitive Sea RESARE CATREA = 28 AREA
Area)

10.5.11 Visualization of the Safety Contour

The safety contour is defined as an edge between safe and unsafe skin of the earth objects.
This edge must be visualized using the presentation below.

"SAFCON","","LS(SOLD,3,DEPSC)","8","O","DISPLAYBASE","13000"

10.5.12 Detection of Safety Contour

The IMO Performance Standard for ECDIS MSC.232(82), clause 11.3.4 Route Planning states;

“An indication is required if the Mariner plans a route across an own ship's safety contour”

Clause 11.4.3 Route Monitoring states;

"ECDIS should give an alarm if the ship, within a specified time set by the Mariner, is going to
cross the safety contour".

The following table specifies the S-57 objects, conditions and geometry that constitute the
safety contour and must therefore be used when raising the safety contour alarm.

82
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
The point, line or area must be graphically indicated using the presentation named as “dnghlt” in
the look-up tables.

S-57 Object Condition Geometry

DEPARE *DEPARE03 “UNSAFE=TRUE” AREA
DRGARE *DEPARE03 “UNSAFE=TRUE” AREA
FLODOC - LINE, AREA
HULKES - POINT, AREA
LNDARE - POINT, LINE, AREA
PONTON - LINE, AREA
UNSARE - AREA
SLCONS - POINT, LINE, AREA
* DEPARE03 is
not an S-57 attribute, it is a CSP.

Note: Rocks, Wrecks and Obstructions are in Navigational Hazard Detection.

Fig 8. Example Danger Highlight in ECDIS

10.6 HO-Specified Display Features

10.6.1 Additional Chart Information

10.6.1.1 Standard Attributes INFORM, NINFOM, TXTDSC, NTXTDS and PICREP

Additional chart content is encoded using a number of standard attributes. The INFORM
attribute is the most common and is used to carry extra information about feature objects.
There are a total of five similar universal attributes:

83
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 S-57
Description Attribute Type
Acronym
INFORM Information String
NINFOM Information in a national language String

String encodes the file name

TXTDSC Textual Description
of an external text file
String encodes the file name
NTXTDS Textual Description in a national language
of an external text file
String encodes the file name
PICREP Pictorial Representation
of an external picture file

NOTE: ECDIS must provide independent user selection to turn on and off the symbol INFORM01 for two
cases;

1.INFORM, NINFOM

2.TXTDSC, NTXTDS and PICREP

This rule applies to all SENC objects whether symbolized by look-up tables or conditional symbology
procedures.

The pivot point of SY(INFORM01) must be placed at the position of a point object, at the
midpoint of a line object, or at the centre of an area object. SY(INFORM01) is intended as a
temporary overlay. The display priority is 8, overradar, category other, viewing group 31030.

Symbol (SY) INFORM01

Display Priority 8
Over Radar O
Display Category Other
Viewing group 31030

IMPORTANT: The ECDIS manufacturers must provide appropriate solutions that enable
PICREP and other ancillary files to be displayed without affecting the night vision of the user.

10.6.1.2 Display of National Language Attributes and Content

Information contained in National language attributes and associated ancillary files (such as
NOBJNM and information in NTXTDS files) can be encoded in a number of formats and many
IHO member states encode such fields in their data. National language information is not
covered by the ECDIS Performance Standard but it is however strongly recommended that
OEMs support all text formats contained in the national language attributes and files, see S-57
Appendix B1 «ENC Specification», section 3.11, lexical level 2 for details.

10.6.2 ECDIS Legend

84
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
The ECDIS chart legend containing the following elements must be available for display at the
position selected by the Mariner. The following table indicates which ENC data elements must
be used.

ECDIS Legend Values

Units for depth DUNI subfield of the DSPM field.
Units for height HUNI subfield of the DSPM field.

Note: Units for depth and height: although the ENC Product Specification of S-57 does not
allow any other than metric depths and heights, these two elements must be stated for clarity
for the Mariner

Scale of display Selected by Mariner. (The default display

scale is defined by the CSCL).

Data quality indicator a. CATZOC attribute of the M_QUAL object

for bathymetric data.

b. POSACC attribute of the M_ACCY object

(if available) for non-bathymetric data.

Note: Due to the way quality is encoded in the ENC, both values (a and b) must be used.

Sounding/vertical datum SDAT and VDAT subfields of the DSPM field

or the VERDAT attribute of the M_SDAT
object and M_VDAT object when available.

(VERDAT attributes of individual objects

must not be used for the legend.)
Horizontal datum HDAT subfield of the DSPM field.
Value of safety depth Selected by Mariner. Default is 30 metres.
Value of safety contour Selected by Mariner. Default is 30 metres.

Note: If the Mariner has selected a contour that is not available in the ENC and the ECDIS
displays a default contour, both the contour selected and the contour displayed must be
quoted.

Magnetic variation VALMAG, RYRMGV and VALACM of the

MAGVAR object. Item must be displayed as;

VALMAG RYRMGV (VALACM)

e.g., 415W 1990 (8’E)

Date and number of latest update affecting ISDT and UPDN subfields of the DSID field
chart cells currently in use. of the last update cell update file (ER data
set) applied.
Edition number and date of the ENC. EDTN and UADT subfields of the DSID field
of the last EN data issue of current ENC
issue of the ENC set.

85
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Chart projection Projection used for the ECDIS display (e.g.,
oblique azimuthal). This must be appropriate
to the scale and latitude of the data in use.

The list above is the minimum that must be available, but the complete list need not always be
shown. Individual items may be picked by the Mariner for display for a period; examples are
magnetic variation, data quality for depths (M_QUAL, CATZOC) etc.

10.6.3 Light Description Text Strings

Previous versions of the presentation library provided C-code that enabled the building of light
description text strings to be displayed on the ECDIS. The C-code has now been removed from
the presentation library and a textual description of how light descriptions must be constructed is
provided. Control over how the light description is used in the display is still within the
conditional symbology LIGHTS06. This section defines the syntax, layout and map of the S-57
attributes to the ECDIS text string.

To produce textual light descriptions in ECDIS, the ECDIS system must use an abbreviated
form of the S-57 attributes of the Lights feature in a particular order. The number next to the
attribute denotes the draw order in which the ECDIS must output the light description text string.
Overall structure:

1 Category of Light (CATLIT)

2 Light Characteristic (LITCHR)

3 Signal Group (SIGGRP)

4 Colour (COLOUR)

5 Signal Period (SIGPER)

6 Height (HEIGHT)

7 Value of Nominal Range (VALNMR)

8 Status (STATUS)

The following tables define a map between the ENC attribute values and the required ECDIS
textual output.

S-57 Attribute CATLIT - Category of Light

ENC Input ECDIS
Output
S-57 S-57 Category of Light Abbreviation
Attribute Attribute Value
Code ID
1 directional function Dir
5 aero light Aero

86
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
7 fog detector light Fog Det Lt

S-57 Attribute - Status

ENC Input ECDIS
Output
S-57 S-57 Status Abbreviation
Attribute Attribute Value
Code ID
2 occasional occas
7 Temporary temp
8 Private priv
11 extinguished exting
17 un-watched U

S-57 Attribute - Light Characteristic

ENC Input ECDIS
Output
S-57 S-57 Light Characteristic Abbreviation
Attribute Attribute Value
Code ID
1 Fixed F
2 Flashing Fl
3 long-flashing LFl
4 quick-flashing Q
5 very quick-flashing VQ
6 ultra quick-flashing UQ
7 Isophased Iso
8 Occulting Oc
9 interrupted quick-flashing IQ
10 interrupted very quick-flashing IVQ
11 interrupted ultra quick-flashing IUQ
12 Morse Mo
13 fixed/flashing FFl
14 flash/long-flash Fl+LFl
15 occulting/flashing OcFl
16 fixed/long-flash FLFl
17 occulting alternating AlOc
18 long-flash alternating AlLFl
19 flash alternating AlFl
20 group alternating Al
25 quick-flash plus long-flash Q+LFl
26 very quick-flash plus long-flash VQ+LFl
27 ultra quick-flash plus long-flash UQ+LFl
28 Alternating Al
29 fixed and alternating flashing AlF Fl
Wrong alternating occulting/flashing AlOc Fl

87
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Units of measure suffixes
S-57 Attribute Description Units of
Measure
Signal Period Seconds s
Height Metres m
Value of Nominal Range Miles M

When the signal group value is set to or include “()” and/or “(1)” there is no requirement for this
to be populated in the light description text. Only when the signal group value differs from the
above mentioned values must the value be output on the ECDIS screen, this follows the paper
chart convention Mariners are used to seeing.

The default presentation for each numeric value: signal period, height and value of nominal
range is no decimals. If the value of the attribute has non-zero decimal part then the value is
displayed to one decimal place.

Example: Given a light with the following attributes;

Feature LIGHTS
Light Characteristic Flashing
Signal Group (1)
Colour White
Signal Period 30 seconds
Height 7 metres
Value of Nominal 10 miles
Range

The ECDIS must display the lights textual description as follows: FL W 30s7m10M

10.7 Displaying Manual and Automatic Updates and Added Chart Information

10.7.1 Manual Updates

Manual updates of ENC information must be displayed using the same symbology as ENC
information and must be distinguished from ENC information as follows:

10.7.1.1 Added Feature

Point object: superimpose SY(CHCRIDnn)*

Line object: overwrite with line LC(CHCRIDnn)*
Area object: overwrite area boundary with line LC(CHCRIDnn) and superimpose
SY(CHCRIDnn) on any centred symbol.

10.7.1.2 Deleted Feature

The object must remain on the display and must be marked as follows:

88
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Point object: Superimpose SY(CHCRDELn)*
Line object: Overwrite with line LC(CHCRDELn)* (do not remove the original line)
Area object: Overwrite area boundary with line LC(CHCRDELn) and superimpose
SY(CHCRDELn) on any centred symbol.

*SY(CHCRIDnn) means the current version of symbol CHCRID, i.e., CHCRID01 in 1997.
CHCRID and CHCRDEL symbols have the category and viewing group of the object they are
attached to, display priority «8», radar priority «O».

NOTE: The line symbols LC(CHCRIDnn) and LC(CHCRDELn) must not suppress the
underlying line (see section 10.3.4.1).

10.7.1.3 Moved Feature

As for deleted feature, followed by added feature.

10.7.1.4 Modified Feature

a) If the only modification is an addition(e.g., an existing buoy has a retro-reflector

added with no other change): superimpose SY(CHCRIDnn) or LC(CHCRIDnn)

b) If the only modification is a deletion of a part (e.g., an area has a «fishing

prohibited» restriction removed), then this creates both a change and a deletion
and both must be symbolized:

Point: superimpose SY(CHCRIDnn) and SY(CHCRDELn)

Line: overwrite with LC(CHCRIDnn) and LC(CHCRDELn)
Area: overwrite the boundary with LC(CHCRIDnn) and LC(CHCRDELn) and
also superimpose SY(CHCRIDnn) and SY(CHCRDELn) on any centred
symbol.

c) If the modification is an addition and a deletion then it is handled as in 10.7.1.4 b

above.

A deleted feature must appear on the display only when its IMO category and viewing group are
displayed.

S-52 Appendix 1 requires that a manually updated feature must be capable of the same
performance in feature selection, response to cursor-picking, etc., as an ENC feature. In
addition, it must provide updating information (identification and source of update, when and by
whom entered, etc.) on cursor picking.

10.7.2 Identifying Automatic Chart Corrections On Mariners Demand

The ECDIS manufacturer must provide a means of identifying chart corrections to the SENC on
demand by the Mariner.

89
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
The ECDIS manufacturer must provide a means of identifying chart corrections to the SENC on
demand by the Mariner.

On mariners demand automatic chart corrections of ENC information must be highlighted as

follows:

10.7.2.1 Added Feature

When the ENC ISO 8211 record update instruction (RUIN) is set to 1 = Insert

Point object: superimpose SY(CHRVID01)

Line object: overwrite with line LC(CHRVID01)
Area object: overwrite area boundary with line LC(CHRVID01) and superimpose
SY(CHRVID01) on any centred symbol.

10.7.2.2 Deleted Feature

When the ENC ISO 8211 record update instruction (RUIN) is set to 2 = Delete

Point object: Superimpose SY(CHRVDEL1)

Line object: Overwrite with line LC(CHRVDEL1) (do not remove the original
line)
Area object: Overwrite area boundary with line LC(CHRVDEL1) and
superimpose SY(CHRVDEL1) on any centred symbol.

10.7.2.3 Moved Feature

As for deleted feature, followed by added feature.

10.7.2.4 Modified Feature

When the ENC ISO 8211 record update instruction (RUIN) is set to 3 = Modify

Point: superimpose SY(CHRVID01) and SY(CHRVDEL1)

Line: overwrite with LC(CHRVID01) and LC(CHRVDEL1)
Area: overwrite the boundary with LC(CHRVID01) and LC(CHRVDEL1) and also
superimpose SY(CHRVID01) and SY(CHRVDEL1) on any centred symbol.

10.7.3 Non-HO (Non-ENC) Chart Information

Limited non-HO data added to existing HO ENC data to augment the chart information must be
distinguished from the HO-ENC information as follows:

Point object: superimpose SY(CHCRIDnn)

Line object: overwrite with line LC(CHCRIDnn)
Area object: overwrite area boundary with line LC(CHCRIDnn) and superimpose
SY(CHCRIDnn) on any centred symbol.

90
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Non-HO data must be distinguished from manually updated chart information, which uses the
same identifiers, by cursor picking.

See IHO S-52, section 2.3.1c, for information on how to symbolize other cases of non-HO data
appearing on the ECDIS display.

Non-HO chart information may be updated by any systematic procedure. A record of updates
must be maintained.

The Mariner must be able to remove all non-HO chart information if the need should arise.

10.8 Cursor Pick and Interface Panel Display

There are a number of rules that must be applied to all ECDIS cursor pick reports.

No Cursor Pick Rules

1 Full S-57 Object and Attribute names must be displayed
2 Enumerate value names must be displayed
3 There must not be any padding of attribute values, e.g. a height of 10
metres must not be padded to 10.000000 metres as this could
potentially confuse or mislead the Mariner.
4 Units of measure must be included after all attribute values which are
weights or measures.
5 S-57 category “C” feature attributes must not be displayed unless
requested by the user. Attributes in this subset provide administrative
information about an object and the data describing it. In most cases it
is of no practical use to the Mariner. This information is only relevant
to S-57 data transferred between Hydrographic Offices.

An exception to show the value of SORDAT if it is for the following

objects:
- WRECKS, OBSTRN, UWTROC, and SOUNDG with value
QUASOU= 9 and geometry attribute QUAPOS=8
- DRGARE with QUASOU=11
- SWPARE
- Any object class with attribute CONDTN=1or 3 or 5
6 Dates must be given in the form “Day Month Year” DD-MMM-YYYY.

JAN, FEB, MAR, APR, MAY, JUN, JUL, AUG, SEP, OCT, NOV,DEC
7 The pick report must only return information about the visible objects
on the ECDIS display.

If the viewing group is turned on all objects even no symbol objects

without visible presentation within that viewing group are available via
the cursor pick report

91
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 8 Cursor enquiry must extend to the spatial object, which carries
accuracy attributes QUAPOS and POSACC. It must include collection
objects which carry additional information for example the OBJNAM of
traffic separation systems, navigation lines (NAVLNE, RECTRC,
DWRTCL, etc.).

10.8.1 Pick Report Descriptions

A plain language explanation of each symbol is included in the Symbol Library and in the
Presentation Library, section 17. This gives the Mariner quick and understandable information
which is not always obvious from the object class and attribute information. The manufacturer
must always provide explanations to the Mariner in response to a cursor pick on the symbol.

Attribute values provided in addition to the above explanation must be connected to their
meaning, and the definitions must also be available.

10.8.2 Sorting

Effective cursor-pick sorting will be covered in the following deferred amendment. Only a limited
number of initial considerations are given below,

10.8.3 User Defined Curser Pick Parameters

The Mariner must be able to configure the content displayed in the pick report.

10.8.4 Sorting by Significance

A general cursor enquiry must be sorted by the drawing priority of the object as defined in the
look-up table for symbolizing. When the drawing priority of objects is equal the geometric
primitive will be used to order the information, points followed by lines and finally areas.

10.8.5 Hover-over Function

OEMs may wish to include hover-over functions for Mariners to access important charted
feature details without having to select a pick report. If this function is implemented within an
ECDIS the Mariner must be able to configure the system function on and off.

The hover-over function must only be used on the following feature objects and for the symbols
SY(INFORM01) and SY(CHDATD01):

Feature S-57 Acronym

Lights LIGHTS
Beacon, cardinal BCNCAR
Beacon, isolated danger BCNISD
Beacon, lateral BCNLAT

92
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Beacon, safe water BCNSAW
Beacon, special purpose/general BCNSPP
Buoy, cardinal BOYCAR
Buoy, installation BOYINB
Buoy, isolated danger BOYISD
Buoy, lateral BOYLAT
Buoy, safe water BOYSAW
Buoy, special purpose/general BOYSPP
Landmarks LNDMRK

10.8.6 Unknown Attributes

When the ECDIS encounters an unknown attribute not present in the S-57 Attribute catalogue
its value must be available via the ECDIS cursor pick. The existence of unknown attributes must
not change the function of the look-up table matching see 10.3.3.2.

10.9 Tidal Stream Panels : S-57 feature TS_PAD

Tidal Stream Panel

When a tidal stream feature object (TS_PAD) is encoded within ENC, the data from the attribute
tidal stream - panel values (TS_TSP) must be formatted for display in the ECDIS cursor pick
report. The following section describes the template that must be used for displaying the values.

The S-57 attribute catalogue defines the TS_TSP attribute as a coded string. The strings
constituent parts are broken down as follows;

1. Tidal station identifier

2. Tidal station name

3. Reference Water level (High or Low Water)

4. Direction of Stream 13 values given in degrees

5. Rate of Stream 13 values given in knots

93
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Example from S-57 Attribute catalogue Edition 3.1
63230,Darwin,HW,124,2.2,128,2.1,125,2.9,116,2.8,110,2.0,095,0.6,020,0.2,320,1.9,315,2.1,30
0,2.8,268,2.6,200,2.4,165,2.5

The following tabular template must be used by ECDIS when displaying the TS_PAD object in
the pick report, the fonts, colours and dimensions are all to be defined by the OEM;

Tidal Station:
Tidal Station Identifier:
Hours Direction of Rates at spring
stream tide (knots)
(degrees)
-6
-5
-4
Before
-3
-2
-1
0
+1
+2
+3
After
+4
+5
+6

Populated TS_PAD cursor pick template using the values from the attribute TS_TSP;

Tidal Station: Darwin

Tidal Station Identifier: 63230
Hours Direction of Rates at spring
stream tides (knots)
(degrees)
-6 124 2.2
-5 128 2.1
-4 125 2.9
Before
-3 116 2.8
-2 110 2.0
-1 095 0.6
HW 0 020 0.2
+1 320 1.9
+2 315 2.1
+3 300 2.8
After
+4 268 2.6
+5 200 2.4
+6 165 2.5

94
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
NOTE : The water level must not be hard coded into the TS_PAD template, this is incorrect as
the water level in the TS_PAD values can also refer to 6 hours before/after low water.

11 Digital Presentation Library Format Description

This section contains a specification of the format which allows for initial transfer and automatic
updating of line styles, fill patterns, point symbols, look-up table entries and colour definitions in
the digital version of the Presentation Library. The transfer format is ‘.dai’ format.

The initial transfer file contains a library identification, three colour tables, five look-up tables and
all line, pattern, and point symbols; written in that order. The ‘.dai’ file is written as modules,
where the library identification is a single module, each of the colour tables is a single module,
each line in the look-up table is a module unto itself and each symbol ( line, pattern or point
symbol ) is a module unto itself. Modules are terminated with ‘****’.

Revision data sets will always include a library identification module. The remaining modules will
only be included in the revision set as required, with the exception of the look-up table entries
which will be written as a complete replacement set.

For each module and field it is specified whether it can repeat in the file or module. Comments
that explain and give domains or constraints are included in "/* ... */".

11.1 Format of the Library Identification Module

The library identification module contains general information about the status of the transferred
library data. It defines the version of the library as well as its purpose.

11.1.1 Library Identification Module

|| ||
|| Module does not repeat. ||
|| ||

11.1.2 Library Identification (LBID)

|| Field does not repeat. ||

|| Subfields do not repeat. ||

L B I D Module Identifier
-------
/* Forms unique module identification
within the exchange set. */

MODN A(2) /* Module Name -

two alphabetic characters 'LI'
indicating module type. */

95
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 RCID I(5) /* Record Identifier -
00000 < x < 32768; with MODN shall
form unique identification within
the exchange set. */

96
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 EXPP A(3) /* Exchange Purpose -
NEW Denotes that the exchange
set is a NEW library.
REV Denotes that the exchange
set is a REVision to an
existing library. */

PTYP A(1/15) /* Product Type – e.g.,'IHO' */

ESID A(1/15) /* Exchange Set Identification Number

- continuous serial number. */

EDTN A(1/15) /* Edition Number -

continuous serial number. */

CODT A(8) /* Compilation Date of Exchange Set -

YYYYMMDD */

COTI A(6) /* Compilation Time of Exchange Set -

HHMMSS */

VRDT A(8) /* Library-Profile Versions Date –

YYYYMMDD */

PROF A(2) /* Library Application Profile –

PN Presentation New Information
PR Pres. Revision Information */

OCDT A(8) /* Date of Version of the applied

Object Catalogue - YYYYMMDD */

COMT A(1/15) /* Comment */

11.2 Format of the Look-Up Table Entry Module

Look-up table entries are transferred in this module. They have to be inserted in the respective
look-up table by the recipient. The module allows for the transfer of a complete new edition of a
look-up table as well as for the updating of a single entry within a look-up table. To send a new
edition this module is repeated for each entry to a look-up table. To update a look-up table a
new transmission of a previously transmitted entry (identified by the object class / attribute
combination) replaces or deletes the old entry depending on the content of the 'STAT' field ('NIL'
for a new edition, 'ADD' for insertion, 'MOD' for replacement, 'DEL' for deletion). Note that where
more than one look-up table entry for a specific object class is transferred, look-up table entries
must be grouped and all look-up table entries where the "Attribute Combination"-field is
populated must be inserted to the look-up table right after the look-up table entry where the
"Attribute Combination"-field is empty and which therefore contains the fail-safe presentation
(see section 10.3, for further details).

11.2.1 Look-Up Table Entry Module

97
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 || ||
|| Module does repeat. ||
|| ||

11.2.2 Look-Up Table Entry Identifier-Field (LUPT)

|| Field does not repeat. ||

|| Subfields do not repeat. ||

L U P T Look-Up Table Entry Identifier

-------
/* Identifies a look-up table Entry
module. */

MODN A(2) /* Module Identifier (Module Name):

presently a constant string = 'LU';
labels a module of 'look-up table'-
type. */

RCID I(5) /* Record Identifier:

continuous numbering where
x is 00000 < x < 32768;
uniquely identifies an instruction-
modulewithin the data-transfer
-set. */

STAT A(3) /* status of the module contents:

'NIL' no change, used for new
editions and editions */

OBCL A(6) /* Name of the addressed object

Class */

FTYP A(1) /* Addressed Object Type -

'A' Area
'L' Line
'P' Point */

DPRI I(5) /* Display Priority */

RPRI A(1) /* Radar Priority -
'O' presentation on top radar
'S' presentation suppressed
by radar */

TNAM A(1/15) /* Name of the addressed Look-up

Table Set -

'PLAIN_BOUNDARIES' or 'SYMBOLIZED_
BOUNDARIES' (areas)
'SIMPLIFIED' or 'PAPER_CHART' (points)
and 'LINES' (lines) */

98
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
11.2.3 Attribute Combination- Field (ATTC)

|| Field does repeat. ||

|| Subfields do repeat. ||

*A T T C Attribute Combination
-------
/* Describes individual characteristics
of an object which lead to the
presentation described in the
INST-field.
The attributes of the object catalogue
shall be used. */

*ATTL A(6) /* 6 Character Attribute Code. */

ATTV A(1/15) /* Attribute Value; Shall be a valid

value for the domain specified
by the attribute label in ATTL. */

11.2.4 Instruction-Field (INST)

|| Field does not repeat ||

|| Subfield does not repeat. ||

*I N S T Symbology Instruction
-------
/* Describes the instruction entry to
The look-up table; */

SINS A(1/15) /* Symbology Instruction String */

11.2.5 Display Category-Field (DISC)

|| Field does not repeat ||

|| Subfield does not repeat. ||

*D I S C Display Category
-------
/* Defines membership within a display
category */

DSCN A(1/15) /* Name of the display category */

11.2.6 Look-Up Comment-Field (LUCM)

99
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 || Field does not repeat ||
|| Subfield does not repeat. ||

*L U C M Look-Up Comment
-------
/* Describes look-up table entry */
LUED A(1/15) /* free text to describe look-up
entry */

11.3 Format of the Symbology Procedure Module

This section has been deleted because the module has not been developed.

11.4 Format of the Colour Table Module

The colour-definition (colour token, colour coordinate, usage) for colours is transferred by this
module. The module allows for the transfer of a complete new edition of a colour table as well
as for the updating of a single entry within a colour table. To send a new edition this module
contains all entries of a colour table. To update a colour table a new transmission of a
previously transmitted entry (identified by the colour token) replaces or deletes the old entry
depending on the content of the 'STAT' field ('NIL' for a new edition, 'ADD' for insertion, 'MOD'
for replacement, 'DEL' for deletion).

11.4.1 Colour Table Module

|| ||
|| Module does repeat. ||
|| ||

11.4.2 Colour Table Identifier-Field (COLS)

|| Field does not repeat. ||

|| Subfields do not repeat. ||

C O L S Colour Table Identifier

-------
/* Identifies a colour-table. */

MODN A(2) /* Module Name:

constant string ='CS';
marks a module of the
'Colour Scheme'-type */

RCID I(5) /* Record Identifier :

continuous numbering where
x is 00000 < x < 32768;
uniquely identifies a

100
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Colour-Table-Module within
the transfer-data-set. */

STAT A(3) /* status of the module contents:

'NIL' no change, used for new editions
and editions */

CTUS A(1/15) /* Name of the addressed Colour Table;

valid keywords are: 'DAY_BRIGHT';
'DAY_WHITEBACK'; 'DAY_BLACKBACK';
'DUSK'; 'NIGHT'. */

11.4.2 Colour Definition CIE-Field (CCIE

|| Field does repeat. ||

|| Subfields do not repeat. ||

*C C I E Colour Definition CIE

-------
/* Describes CIE-System's colour-
definition */

CTOK A(5) /* COLOUR (Colour-Token) */

CHRX R(1/15) /* x-Coordinate (CIE-System) */

CHRY R(1/15) /* y-Coordinate (CIE-System */

CLUM R(1/15) /* Luminance (CIE-System) */

CUSE A(1/15) /* Use of colour (free text) */

11.5 Format of the Pattern Module

Definitions for fill patterns are transferred by this module which may contain a raster image
(bit-map) or a vector definition. The maximum size of the raster image is 122 x 122 pixels. The
maximum size of the vector space is 32767 by 32767 units. See section 8.4.5 for usage of
patterns.

The module allows for the transfer of a complete new edition of fill patterns as well as for the
updating of a single fill pattern. To update a fill pattern a new transmission of a previously
transmitted fill pattern (identified by the pattern name) replaces or deletes the old version of a fill
pattern depending on the content of the 'STAT' field ('NIL' for a new edition, 'ADD' for insertion,
'MOD' for replacement, 'DEL' for deletion).

11.5.1 Pattern Module

|| ||
|| Module does repeat. ||

101
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 || ||

11.5.2 Pattern Identifier-Field (PATT)

|| Field does not repeat. ||

|| Subfields do not repeat. ||

P A T T Pattern Identifier
-------
/* Identifies a pattern-module. */

MODN A(2) /* Module Identifier (Module Name):

presently a constant string = 'PT';
labels a module of the
'pattern'-type. */

RCID I(5) /* Record Identifier:

continuous numbering where
x is 00000 < x < 32768;
uniquely identifies a pattern-module
within the data-transfer-set.
*/

STAT A(3) /* status of the module contents:

'NIL' no change, used for new editions
and edition */

11.5.3 Pattern Definition-Field (PATD)

|| Field does not repeat. ||

|| Subfields do not repeat. ||

P A T D Pattern Definition
-------
/* defines several pattern-
parameters. */

PANM A(8) /* name of the fill pattern; */

PADF A(1) /* type of pattern definition:

V Vector definition
R Raster definition */

PATP A(3) /* type of the fill pattern:

STG staggered pattern
LIN linear pattern */

PASP A(3) /* pattern-symbol spacing:

CON constant space

102
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 SCL scale dependent spacing */

PAMI I(5) /* minimum distance (units of 0.01 mm)

between pattern symbols covers
(bounding box + pivot point);
where 0 <= PAMI <= 32767 */

PAMA I(5) /* maximum distance (units of 0.01 mm)

between pattern symbols
covers(bounding box + pivot point);
where 0 <= PAMA <= 32767; PAMA is
meaningless if PASP = 'CON' */

PACL I(5) /* pivot-point's column number;

PACL is counted from the top,
left corner of the vector/raster space
to the right;-9999(left)<= PACL <=
32767(right) */

PARW I(5) /* pivot-point's row number;

PARW is counted from the top,
left corner of the vector/raster
space to the bottom;
-9999(top)<=PARW <=32767(bottom)*/

PAHL I(5) /* width of bounding box;

where 1<= PAHL <=122 for raster and
where 1<= PAHL <=32767 for vector
Note:doesnotincludevectorline
Width */

PAVL I(5) /* height of bounding box;

where 1<= PAVL <=122 for raster and
where 1<= PAGL <=32767 for vector
Note: does not include vector line
width */
PBXC I(5) /* bounding box upper left column number;
where 0<= PBXC <=122 for raster and
where 0<= PBXC <=32767 for vector */

PBXR I(5) /* bounding box upper left row number;

where 0<= PBXR <=122 for raster and
where 0<= PBXR <=32767 for vector */

11.5.4 'Pattern Exposition'-Field (PXPO)

|| Field does repeat. ||

|| Subfield does not repeat. ||

P X P O Pattern Exposition Field

-------

103
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 /* describes meaning & use of symbology
elements */

EXPT A(1/15) /* free text for symbology

explanation */

11.5.5 'Pattern Colour Reference'- Field (PCRF)

|| Field does not repeat. ||

|| Subfields do repeat. ||

P C R F Pattern Colour Reference

-------
/* Contains the colour reference for the
bitmap or vector field. */

*CIDX A(1) /* Letter (ASCII >= 64) used as colour

index within PBTM.BITR field or
within the PBTM.VECT field. */

CTOK A(5) /* colour token which is identified

by the letter in CIDX. */

11.5.6 'Pattern Bitmap'- Field (PBTM)

|| Field does repeat. ||

|| Number of repetitions shall be ||
|| identical to content of PAVL-field ||
|| Subfield does not repeat. ||

*P B T M Pattern Bitmap
-------
/* Contains one row of a raster image;
Each pixel is represented by a letter
(ASCII>=64); The letter represents
a colour token defined within the
PCRF.CTOKsubfield. The letter
'@'represents a 100% transparent
pixel(TRNSP). Note: PBTM andPVCT
are mutual exclusive. */

BITR A(1/15) /* Raster Bit-map Row -

maximal length 122 characters;
The length shall be identical to
content of PAHL-field. */

11.5.7 'Pattern Vector'- Field (PVCT)

|| Field does repeat. ||

|| Subfield does not repeat ||

104
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 *P V C T Pattern Vector
-------
/* Contains a vector image definition;
Colours are identified by a letter
(ASCII>=64); The letter represents
a colour token defined within
the PCRF.CTOKsubfield. The letter
'@'identifies a fully transparent
colour. Note: PVCT and PBTM are
mutual exclusive. */

VECD A(1/15) /* String of vector commands; */

.
11.5.8 Example for a Vector Image Pattern Definition

The example illustrates a vector definition for a fill pattern (pattern name 'SAMPLE01') which is
sent as a replacement of a previous one. The pattern shows a rectangle drawn in chart grey,
dominant (CHGRD, identified by the letter A) with a pen width of 0.6 mm (2 x 0.3mm). It is a
linear pattern (LIN). The symbol spacing is constant (CON). The distance between the symbols
is 5 mm (500 x 0.01 mm). The pivot point of the pattern symbol is situated in row 500, column
500 of the coordinate space. The pattern has a size of 10mm by 10mm (1000 x 0.01mm). The
upper left corner of the bounding box is located at position 1,1.

PATT 10PT00001MOD
PATD 55SAMPLE01VLINCON0050000000005000050001000010000000100001
PXPO 32This is a sample vector pattern
PCRF 6ACHGRD
PVCT 15SPA;SW2;PU1,1;
PVCT 31PD1000,1,1000,1000,1,1000,1,1;

See section 8 for further explanation of the vector symbol description language.

11.6 Format of the Symbol Module

Definitions for symbols are transferred by this module which contains either a raster image
(bit-map) or a vector definition of the symbol. The maximum size of the raster image is 64 x 64
pixels. The maximum extent of the vector space is 32767 by 32767 units.

The module allows for the transfer of a complete new edition of point symbols as well as for the
updating of a single symbol. To update a symbol a new transmission of a previously transmitted
symbol (identified by the symbol name) replaces or deletes the old version of a symbol
depending on the content of the 'STAT' field ('NIL' for a new edition, 'ADD' for insertion, 'MOD'
for replacement, 'DEL' for deletion).

11.6.1 Symbol Module

|| ||
|| Module does repeat. ||

105
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 || ||

11.6.2 Symbol Identifier-Field (SYMB)

|| Field does not repeat. ||

|| Subfields do not repeat. ||

S Y M B Symbol Identifier
-------
/* identifies a symbol-module. */

MODN A(2) /* Module Identifier (Module Name):

presently a constant string ='SY';
labels a module of the
'Symbol'-type. */

RCID I(5) /* Record Identifier:

continuous numbering where
x is 00000 < x < 32768;
uniquely identifies a symbol-
module within the
data-transfer-set. */

STAT A(3) /* status of the module contents:

'NIL' no change, used for new
editions and editions. */

11.6.3 Symbol Definition-Field (SYMD)

|| Field does not repeat. ||

|| Subfields do not repeat. ||

S Y M D Symbol Definition
-------
/* Defines several symbol-parameters.*/

SYNM A(8) /* name of the symbol; */

SYDF A(1) /* type of symbol definition:

V Vector definition
R Raster definition */

SYCL I(5) /* pivot-point's column-number;

SYCL is counted from the top,
left corner of the vector/raster
space to the right;
-9999(left)<= SYCL <=32767(right)*/

SYRW I(5) /* pivot-point's row-number;

106
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 PROW is counted from the top, left
corner of the vector/raster space
to the bottom ;
-9999(top)<= SYRW <= 32767(bottom) */

SYHL I(5) /* width of bounding box;

where 1<= PAHL <=128 for raster and
where 1<= PAHL <=32767 for vector
Note: does not include vector line
width */

SYVL I(5) /* height of bounding box;

where 1<= PAVL <=128 for raster and
where 1<= PAGL <=32767 for vector
Note: does not include vector line
width */

SBXC I(5) /* bounding box upper left column number;

where 1<= SBXC <=128 for raster and
where 1<= SBXC <=32767 for vector */

SBXR I(5) /* bounding box upper left row number;

where 1<= SBXR <=128 for raster and
where 1<= SBXR <=32767 for vector */

11.6.4 Symbol Exposition- Field (SXPO)

The exposition field for the symbol module is identical to the exposition field for the pattern
module (see section 11.5.4).

11.6.5 Symbol Colour Reference- Field (SCRF)

The colour reference field for the symbol module is identical to the colour reference field for the
pattern module (see section 11.5.5).

11.6.6 Symbol Bitmap- Field (SBTM)

The bitmap field for the symbol module is identical to the bitmap field for the pattern module
(see section 11.5.6).

11.6.7 Symbol Vector- Field (SVCT)

The vector field for the symbol module is identical to the vector field for the pattern module (see
section 11.5.7).

11.6.8 Example for a Vector Image Symbol Module

The example shows the vector definition for the symbol 'SAMPLE33'. The pivot point of the
symbol is situated in row 400, column 400 of the coordinate space. The symbol has a size of

107
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
8mm by 8mm (800 x 0.01 mm). The upper left corner of the bounding box is located at position
1,1.

SYMB 10SY00001NIL
SYMD 39SAMPLE33V004000040000800008000000100001
SCRF 6ACHBLK
SVCT 15SPA;SW2;PU1,1;
SVCT 28PD1000,1,800,800,1,800,1,1;

See section 8 for further explanation of the vector symbol description language.

11.7 Format of the Complex Linestyle Module

Definitions for complex linestyles are transferred by this module which contains a vector
definition.

The module allows for the transfer of a complete new edition of linestyles as well as for the
updating of a single linestyle. To update a linestyle a new transmission of a previously
transmitted linestyle (identified by the linestyle name) replaces or deletes the old version of a
linestyle depending on the content of the 'STAT' field ('NIL' for a new edition, 'ADD' for insertion,
'MOD' for replacement, 'DEL' for deletion).

11.7.1 Linestyle Module

|| ||
|| Module does repeat. ||
|| ||

11.7.2 Linestyle Identifier- Field (LNST

|| Field does not repeat. ||

|| Subfields do not repeat. ||

L N S T Linestyle Identifier
-------
/* identifies a linestyle-module. */

MODN A(2) /* Module Identifier (Module Name):

presently a constant string ='LS';
labels a module of 'Linestyle'
-type. */

RCID I(5) /* Record Identifier:

continuous numbering where
x is 00000 < x < 32768;
uniquely identifies a linestyle-module
within the data-transfer-set. */

108
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 STAT A(3) /* status of the module contents:
'NIL' no change, used for new
editions and editions */

11.7.3 Linestyle Definition- Field (LIND)

|| Field does not repeat. ||

|| Subfields do not repeat. ||

L I N D Linestyle Definition
-------
/* Defines several linestyle-
parameters. */

LINM A(8) /* name of the linestyle; */

LICL I(5) /* pivot-point's column-number;

LICL is counted from the top,
left corner of the vector space
to the right;
-9999(left)<= LICL <= 32767(right) */

LIRW I(5) /* pivot-point's row-number;

LIRW is counted from the top
left corner of the vector space
to the bottom;
-9999(top)<= LIRW <= 32767(bottom)*/

LIHL I(5) /* width of bounding box;

where 1<= LIHL <=32767;
Note: does not include vector line
width */

LIVL I(5) /* height of bounding box;

where 1<= LIVL <=32767;
Note: does not include vector line
width */

LBXC I(5) /* bounding box upper left column number;

where 0<= LBXC <=32767; */

LBXR I(5) /* bounding box upper left row number;

where 0<= LBXR <=32767; */

11.7.4 Linestyle Exposition- Field (LXPO)

The exposition field for the linestyle module is identical to the exposition field for the pattern
module (see section 11.5.4).

11.7.5 Linestyle Colour Reference- Field (LCRF)

109
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
The colour reference field for the linestyle module is identical to the colour reference field for the
pattern module (see section 11.5.5).

11.7.6 Linestyle Vector- Field (LVCT)

The vector field for the linestyle module is identical to the vector field for the pattern module (see
section 11.5.7).

11.7.7 Example for a Linestyle Module

The example shows the vector definition for the linestyle 'CBLLNE01'. The centre line of the
linestyle is situated in column 750, row 750 of the coordinate space. The linestyle shows a
curved line, width 0.3mm (1 x 0.3 mm).

LNST 10LS00000NIL
LIND 38CBLLNE01007500075000200001000075000700
LCRF 6ICHMGD
LVCT 57SPI;PU850,750;SW1;AA900,750,180;PU850,750;AA800,750,180;

See section 8 for further explanation of the vector symbol description language.

110
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
12 Look-Up Table Listings

The Presentation Library provides five look-up tables:

Lookup Table Name S-52, Annex A, Appendix

Area symbols with plain boundaries Appendix B
Area symbols with symbolized boundaries Appendix C
Line symbols Appendix D
Paper chart point symbols Appendix E
Simplified point symbols Appendix F

Some of the look-up table entries describe the presentation of Mariners' navigational objects.
Please see Part II of the PresLib for further details and definitions of Mariners' navigational
object classes.

The ECDIS must provide the mariner with the ability to select between "paper chart" and
"simplified" point symbols and also between "plain boundaries" and "symbolized boundaries"
area symbols.

111
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13 Conditional Symbology Procedure (CSP) Diagrams
13.1 Introduction

The CSP diagrams in edition 3.4 of the Presentation Library were provided in Nassi-
Shneiderman format. This style of presenting complex data flows has been cited as a potential
cause of ECDIS related display issues, therefore the decision has been taken to transform the
diagrams into Unified Modelling Language (UML) behavioural activity diagrams.

13.1.1 General

The following pages present UML activity diagrams and narrative descriptions explaining all
conditional symbology procedures which have been developed to date.

Some of the diagrams describe the presentation of Mariners' navigational objects. See Part II of
the Presentation Library for further details and definitions of the Mariners' navigational object
classes.

13.1.2 UML Constructs

13.1.3 Standards terms and definitions

The following terms and their definitions are used in the UML CSPs.

Comparison and Logical Operators

Operators Notation Definition

Equal == Operator results true if both operands represent the same
value
Not equal != Operator results true if both operands do not represent the
same value
Less than < Operator results true if the left value is less than the right
value
Less than or equal <= Operator results true if the left value is less than or equal
to to the right value
Greater than > Operator results true if the left value is greater than the
right value
Greater than or >= Operator results true if the left value is greater than or
equal to equal to the right value
AND && A Boolean operator that gives the value true if and only if
both operands are true and otherwise has a value of false.
OR || A Boolean operator that gives the value true if at least one
operand has a value of true, and otherwise has a value of
false.
NOT ! A Boolean operator with one operand that returns the
value true if the operand has the value false and vice
versa.

112
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Feature Object Attribute Values

Feature Object Notation Definition

Attribute Values
Present Present An attribute is present either with or
without a value
Null Null An attribute is present but the value
has not been populated (the HO
wants to indicate that the value is
unknown)
Has Value Has Value An attribute is present and has a
value

Statements

Statement Definition
Condition A conditional statement which evaluates an logical
expression and depending on the result executes
either the statements in the THAN branch or the
statements in the ELSE branch.
Loop Repeats a statement until an end condition indicates
the end of the loop.

13.1.4 CSP arrangement

Each of the following CSP contains;

Title CSP title used in S-52 lookup tables

Applies to Lists the S-57 feature objects which the
procedure applies to
Spatial Object(s) Defines the geometric primitives: Point,
line and area
Attribute(s) used Lists all the S-57 feature attributes used
in the procedure (and any sub-
procedures)
ECDIS User Parameter(s) Settings that are generated by the end
user.
Local Variables Defines any local variables used within
the procedure together with their initial
values – also, whether they’re required
for sub-procedures.
Return Values Overview of the results returned by the
CSP
Remarks General guide to the procedure saying
how it works and what it does

113
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.1.5 List of Conditional Symbology Procedures

13.2.1 Depth area colour fill and dredged area pattern fill (S-57) DEPARE03
13.2.2 Depth contours, including safety contour (S-57) DEPCNT03
13.2.3 Depth value (S-57) DEPVAL02
13.2.4 Light flares, light sectors & light coverage (S-57) LIGHTS06
10.6.3 Light description text string (S-57) LITDSN02
13.2.5 Obstructions and rocks (S-57) OBSTRN07
13.2.6 Quality (accuracy) of position (S-57) QUAPOS01
13.2.7 Quality of position of line objects (S-57) QUALIN01
13.2.8 Quality of position of point and area objects (S-57) QUAPNT02
13.2.9 Restricted areas - object class RESARE (S-57) RESARE04
13.2.10 Entry procedure for restrictions (S-57) RESTRN01
13.2.11 Restrictions – attribute RESTRN (S-57) RESCSP02
13.2.12 Contour labels, including safety contour (S-57) SAFCON01
13.2.13 Shoreline constructions, including accuracy of position. SLCONS04
13.2.14 Colour fill for depth areas (S-57) SEABED01
13.2.15 Symbolizing soundings, including safety depth (S-57) SNDFRM04
13.2.16 Entry procedure for symbolizing soundings (S-57) SOUNDG03
13.2.17 Symbolizing encoded objects specified by IMO SYMINS02
13.2.18 Topmarks (S-57) TOPMAR01
13.2.19 Isolated dangers in general that endanger own ship (S-57) UDWHAZ05
13.2.20 Wrecks (S-57) WRECKS05

13.1.6 Mariners’ selections

The following global parameters carrying Mariners' selections are used by the procedures:

SAFETY_DEPTH - selected safety depth (meters) [IMO PS [2]]

SHALLOW_CONTOUR - selected shallow water contour (meters) (optional)
SAFETY_CONTOUR - selected safety contour (meters) [IMO PS [2]]
DEEP_CONTOUR - selected deep water contour (meters) (optional)
TWO_SHADES - flag indicating selection of two depth shades (on/off)
SHALLOW_PATTERN - flag indicating selection of shallow water highlight (on/off)
(optional)
SHIPS_OUTLINE - flag indicating selection of ship's scale symbol (on/off )
[IMO PS [2]]
DISTANCE_TAGS - selected spacing of "distance to run" tags at a route (nm)
TIME_TAGS - selected spacing of time tags at the pasttrack (min)
FULL_SECTORS - show full length light sector lines

114
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.1.7 Shared sub-procedures

Some basic procedures are used in more than one application. For example, SNDFRMnn is
called by soundings, wrecks, rocks and obstructions to compose depth values into soundings.

Such shared sub-procedures can only be accessed through a calling procedure; they cannot be
called directly from the look-up table. When necessary, an entry procedure is set up solely to
give this access; e.g., RESTRNnn is used to give access to shared procedure RESCSPnn.

The following table explains these relationships (the suffix ‘nn’ refers to the current edition of the
CSP):

S-57 Object Sub-Procedure

CSP name Notes
(Geometry) name
sub-procedure also called by
RESCSPnn
DEPARE(a) RESTRNnn
DEPAREnn SEABEDnn

DRGARE(a) SAFCONnn

DEPARE(l)

DEPCNTnn SAFCONnn
DEPCNT(l)

LIGHTS(p) LIGHTSnn LITDSNnn

sub-procedure also called by

DEPVALnn
WRECKSnn
OBSTRN(pla)
sub-procedure also called by
QUAPNTnn
OBSTRNnn QUAPOSnn & WRECKSn
sub-procedure also called by
SNDFRMnn
SOUNDGnn & WRECKSnn
UWTROC(p)
sub-procedure also called by
UDWHAZnn
WRECKSnn
sub-procedure also called by
LNDARE(pl) QUAPNTnn
OBSTRNnn & WRECKSnn
QUAPOSnn
COALNE(l) QUALINnn

this procedure includes the

RESARE(a) RESAREnn
effect of RESTRN
RESTRNnn RESCSPnn sub-procedure also called by
ACHARE(a) DEPAREnn

CBLARE(a)

115
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 DMPGRD(a)

DWRTPT(a)

FAIRWY(a)

ICNARE(a)

ISTZNE(a)

MARCUL(a)

MIPARE(a)

OSPARE(a)

PIPARE(a)

PRCARE(a)

SPLARE(a)

SUBTLN(a)

TESARE(a)

TSSCRS(a)

TSSLPT(a)

TSSRON(a)

sub-procedure also called by

SOUNDG(p) SOUNDGnn SNDFRMnn
OBSTRNnn & WRECKSnn
WRECKS(pa) WRECKSnn sub-procedure also called by
DEPVALnn
OBSTRNnn
sub-procedure also called by
QUAPNTnn
QUAPOSnn & OBSTRNnn

sub-procedure also called by

SNDFRMnn
OBSTRNnn & SOUNDGnn
sub-procedure also called by
UDWHAZnn
OBSTRNnn

116
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 117
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.1 Conditional Symbology Procedure DEPARE03

Applies to: S-57 Object Class "depth area" (DEPARE)

S-57 Object Class "dredged area" (DRGARE)

Spatial Object(s): Area only.

Relation(s) used: Adjacency of DEPARE/DRGARE objects with group 1 objects.

Attribute(s) used: "depth range value 1" (DRVAL1); "depth range value 2" (DRVAL2)

Defaults: Display Priority given by look-up table

OVERRADAR priority given by look-up table
Display Category given by look-up table
Viewing Group given by look-up table

Required ECDIS SAFETY_CONTOUR. The manufacturer is responsible for setting the

SAFETY_CONTOUR to startup value 30 metres. This value should
stay in operation until the mariner decides to select another safety
contour.

Remarks: An object of the class "depth area" is coloured and covered with fill
patterns according to the mariners selections of shallow contour,
safety contour and deep contour. This requires a decision making
process provided by the sub-procedure "SEABED01" which is called
by this symbology procedure. Objects of the class "dredged area" are
handled by this routine as well to ensure a consistent symbolization of
all areas that represent the surface of the seabed.

The safety contour will be constructed using the edges of the DEPARE
and DRGARE objects. The safety contour may be labelled at the
request of the mariner using sub-procedure “SAFCON01”.

Based on the safety contour value entered by the mariner (see IMO
PS [2]), the edges that make up the safety contour must be shown
under all circumstances. But, while the mariner is free to enter any
safety contour depth value that he thinks is suitable for the safety of
his ship, the SENC only contains a limited choice of depth contours.
This symbology procedure examines each edge of the
DEPARE/DRGARE object to see if it falls between safe and unsafe
water. If it does, that edge will represent the safety contour selected, or
the next deeper contour if the selected contour is not available. It is
highlighted as the safety contour and put in DISPLAYBASE. Note that
this procedure will also detect the need for a safety contour at the
edge of non-navigable rivers, canals or docks which must have a
LNDARE or UNSARE under them, (UOC 4.6.6.3, 4.6.6.5, 4.7.6, 4.7.8
and 4.8.1 remarks 2 etc.), as well as at another DEPARE/DRGARE
edge.
The procedure also checks whether the edge has a ‘QUAPOS’ value
indicating unreliable positioning, and if so symbolizes it with a double
dashed line.

118
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 1 DEPARE03 conditional symbology procedure

act DEPARE03 conditional symbology procedure

Has value
('DRVAL1')?
Get the Calling Get 'DRVAL1'
Obj ect and 'DRVAL2' [No]
Entry point

[Yes] DRVAL1 = -1
Has value
('DRVAL2')?

[No]

DRVAL2 = DRVAL1 + 0.01 [Yes]

SEABED01
(DRVAL1, DRVAL2)

Is DRGARE?

[No] «loop»
For each spatial obj ect of this obj ect,
[Yes]
perform this loop
[Setup]

AP(DRGARE01) The Calling Obj ect &

'DRVAL1'

[Test]
LS(DASH,1,CHGRF) While there is a
unprocessed spatial
component?

[Body]
Get 'RESTRN'
Symbolize a spatial
component if it is
needed
Has value
('RESTRN')?

[No]
[Yes]

RESCSP03
(RESTRN)

Exit
procedure

Entry point Entry to the symbology procedure.

Get the Calling Object Get the object which is calling this procedure.
DEPARE or DRGARE Areas
Get 'DRVAL1' and 'DRVAL2' Get the value of the attributes:
'Depth range value 1' (DRVAL1)
'Depth range value 2' (DRVAL2)

119
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 and assign local variables 'DRVAL1' and 'DRVAL2' accordingly.
Has value ('DRVAL1')? Is the value of the attribute 'DRVAL1' given?
DRVAL1 = -1 Assign local variable 'DRVAL1' =-1 m.
This is above low water line as fail safe to ensure the default colour
is 'DEPIT' (intertidal area)
Has value ('DRVAL2')? Is the value of the attribute 'DRVAL2' given?
SEABED01 (DRVAL1, Perform the symbology sub-procedure to symbolize this area object ,
DRVAL2) see “13.2.14 Conditional Symbology Procedure SEABED01
DRVAL1 - input parameter - value of the local variable pass from the main
procedure
DRVAL2 - input parameter - value of the local variable pass from the main
procedure
DRVAL2 = DRVAL1 + 0.01 Assign local variable DRVAL2 = DRVAL1 + 0.01 m.
Is DRGARE? Is the calling object of the class DRGARE?
AP(DRGARE01) Draw the area pattern 'DRGARE01' from the symbol library and
show it on top of the area's colour fill.
LS(DASH,1,CHGRF) Symbolize the boundary with a dashed line, 1 unit wide colour
'CHGRF'
Get 'RESTRN' Get the value of the attribute 'Restriction' (RESTRN).
Has value ('RESTRN')? Is the value of the attribute 'RESTRN' given?
RESCSP02 (RESTRN) Perform the symbology sub-procedure to complete the symbolization
of 'DRGARE', see '13.2.11 Conditional Symbology Procedure
RESCSP02'.
RESTRN value - input value
Loop for each spatial object DEPARE03 CONTINUATION A and B
of this object, perform this Setup - the Calling Object and 'DRVAL1' value
loop Test - while there is a unprocessed spatial component.
Body - to symbolize a spatial component if it is needed.
Exit procedure Symbolization is finished

120
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 act DEPARE03 Continuations A and B Figure 2 DEPARE03 Continuations A and B
Already 'DRVAL1' <
Loop entry
processed? SAFE = FALSE; SAFETY_CONTOUR?
point
UNSAFE = FALSE;
[No] [No]
LOC_SAFETY = FALSE
[Yes] [Yes]
For each spatial
component of this SAFE = TRUE
object, perform this loop.
UNSAFE = TRUE
continue
Has value Does
('VALDCO')?
DEPCNT
LOC_VALDCO = 'VALDCO' Get 'VALDCO' share?
[Yes] [Yes]
[No] [No]

LOC_VALDCO =
LOC_VALDCO = 0.0 'unknow n'

Has value Do other DEPARE LOC_VALDCO ==

('DRVAL1')? or DRGARE share? SAFETY_CONTOUR?
Get 'DRVAL1'
[Yes] [Yes] [No]
[Yes]
[No]
[No]
LOC_SAFETY = TRUE
DRVAL1 = -1

'DRVAL1' < Does Liner Does Inland Do LNDARE Does TG1

SAFETY_ Structure Water Object or UNSARE object
CONTOUR? Object share? share? share? share?

[Yes] [No] [Yes] [Yes] [Yes]

[No] UNSAFE = TRUE [Yes] [No] [No] [No]

SAFE = TRUE

LOC_SAFETY == UNSAFE == TRUE

Select Edge FALSE? && SAFE == TRUE?
Get 'QUAPOS' View ing
[No] [Yes] [No]
Parameters
[Yes]
Has value
('QUAPOS')?
continue
[Yes] [No]

'QUAPOS' != 1
&& 10 && 11? SAFCON02
(LOC_VALDCO)
LS(SOLD,2,DEPSC)
[No]
[Yes]
Safety Contour
LOC_VALDCO != Draw Selected
Labels?
'unknown'? Symbols from
LS(DASH,2,DEPSC) 'SAFCON02'
[Yes] [Yes]
[No] [No]

continue continue continue

121
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Loop entry point For each spatial component of this object, perform this loop.
Already processed? In order to make this algorithm efficient, the manufacturer should
keep track of which spatial objects have already been processed to
eliminate the need for testing lines more than once.
continue Go to the next spatial component
SAFE = FALSE; set local SAFE to the default (FALSE)
UNSAFE = FALSE; set local UNSAFE to the default (FALSE)
LOC_SAFETY = FALSE set local LOC_SAFETY to the default (FALSE)
'DRVAL1' < Is the attribute 'DRVAL1' value of the calling object is less
SAFETY_CONTOUR? SAFETY_CONTOUR?
UNSAFE = TRUE Set the local variable 'UNSAFE' as TRUE.
SAFE = TRUE Set the local variable 'SAFE' as TRUE.
Does DEPCNT share? Is the spatial component shared by a 'DEPCNT' (Depth contour)
object?
Get 'VALDCO' Get the value of the attribute "Value of depth contour" (VALDCO)
from the object DEPCNT coincided with the spatial component.
Has value ('VALDCO')? Is the value of the attribute 'VALDCO' given?
LOC_VALDCO = 'VALDCO' Set the local variable LOC_VALDCO equal to 'VALDCO' value.
LOC_VALDCO = 0.0 Set the local variable LOC_VALDCO equal to 0.0 m.
LOC_VALDCO = 'unknown' Set the local variable LOC_VALDCO equal to 'unknown' value
LOC_VALDCO == Is LOC_VALDCO equal to the value of the safety contour?
SAFETY_CONTOUR?
LOC_SAFETY = TRUE We are certain the edge belongs to the safety contour.
Set local variable 'LOC_SAFETY' to TRUE
Do other DEPARE or Is the spatial object shared by other DEPARE (DRGARE) object?
DRGARE share?
Get 'DRVAL1' Get the value of the attribute "Depth range value 1" (DRVAL1) from
the object DEPARE or DRGARE sharing the checked spatial object.
Has value ('DRVAL1')? Is the value of the attribute 'DRVAL1' given in the object
DEPARE(DRGARE) coincided with the spatial component?
DRVAL1 = -1 Set the local variable DRVAL1 as -1.
'DRVAL1' < SAFETY_ Is the value DRVAL1 less the value of the safety contour?
CONTOUR?
UNSAFE = TRUE Set the local variable 'UNSAFE' as TRUE.
SAFE = TRUE Set the local variable 'SAFE' as TRUE.
Does TG1 object share? Is the spatial object shared by another Group1 object?
Do LNDARE or UNSARE Is the other Group1 object a LNDARE or an UNSARE?
share?
Does Inland Water Object Is the spatial object shared by a RIVERS, LAKARE, CANALS,
share? LOKBSN or DOCARE object?
Does Liner Structure Object Is the spatial object shared by at least one of the linear objects:
share? - LNDARE, GATCON or DAMCON
- SLCONS or CUSWAY with WATLEV=1, 2, 6 or empty.
LOC_SAFETY == FALSE? Is the variable LOC_SAFETY equal to FALSE?
UNSAFE == TRUE && SAFE Are the values of the local variables 'UNSAFE' and 'SAFE' equal to
== TRUE? TRUE?
continue If ‘No’, go to the next spatial component.
Select Edge Viewing Make sure the contour is shown at all scales (Attribute 'SCAMIN'
Parameters equals 'infinite') Include this edge in the category:
Display Priority 8
Radar Flag OVERRADAR
Display Group Displaybase
Viewing Group 13010
Get 'QUAPOS' Get the value of the attribute 'QUAPOS' of the current spatial
component

122
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Has value ('QUAPOS')? Is the value of the attribute 'QUAPOS' given?
LS(SOLD,2,DEPSC) Symbolize the line object with a solid line 2 units wide, colour
'DEPSC'
'QUAPOS' != 1 && 10 && Does the value of attribute 'QUAPOS' equal to neither of the
11? following values: '1', '10', and '11'?
LS(DASH,2,DEPSC) Symbolize the line object with a dashed line (2 units wide, colour
'DEPSC')
Safety Contour Labels? Has the mariner chosen to display Safety Contour Labels by used of
selection of viewing group 33021?
continue If ‘No’, go to the next spatial component
LOC_VALDCO != Is the local variable 'LOC_VALDCO' set?
'unknown'?
continue IF ‘No’, go to the next spatial component
SAFCON01 (LOC_VALDCO) Perform the symbology sub-procedure to symbolize the safety
contour label, see '13.2.12 Conditional Symbology Procedure
SAFCON01'
LOC_VALDCO input parameter
List of Selected Symbols output parameter
Draw Selected Symbols Draw the symbols that were returned by 'SAFCON01' at the centre of
from 'SAFCON01' the run-length of the line.
Symbols must be displayed upright with respect to the screen
borders and not aligned along the contour.
continue Go to the next spatial component

123
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.2 Conditional Symbology Procedure DEPCNT03

Applies to: S-57 Object Class "depth contour" (DEPCNT)

Spatial Object(s): Line

Attribute(s) used: "value of depth contour" (VALDCO)

Parameter(s): Object to be symbolized from SENC

Output Defaults: Display Priority given by look-up table,

OVERRADAR priority given by look-up table,
Display Category given by look-up table,
Viewing Group given by look-up table

Remarks: This procedure symbolizes contours, identifies any line segment of the
spatial object that has a 'QUAPOS' value indicating unreliable
positioning and symbolizes it with a dashed line, and labels the value
of the contour on demand by the Mariner.
The contour may be labelled at the request of the Mariner using sub-
procedure “SAFCON01”.
Spatial Component line definition
Figure 3 DEPCNT03 conditional symbology procedure

act DEPCNT04 conditional symbology procedure

Entry point
«loop»
For each spatial component
[Setup]

The Calling Obj ect

Get the [Test]

Calling While there is a
Obj ect unprocessed spatial
component?

[Body]
Symbolize a spatial
component if it is
needed

Exit
procedure

Entry point Entry to the symbology procedure.

Get the Calling Object Get the object which is calling this procedure.
Loop for each spatial For each spatial component of the object, perform this loop:
component Setup - the Calling Object
Test - while there is a unprocessed spatial component.
Body - to symbolize a spatial component if it is needed.
Exit procedure Symbolization is complete

124
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 4 For each spatial component

act For each spatial component

LOOP entry Has value 'QUAPOS' != 1
point ('QUAPOS')? && 10 && 11?
Get
'QUAPOS' [Yes] [Yes]

[No]

For each spatial

component of this object,
perform this loop. LS(DASH,1,DEPCN)
[No]

LS(SOLD,1,DEPCN)

Has value Display Contour

('VALDCO')? Labels?
LOC_VALDCO = 'VALDCO'
[Yes] [Yes]

[No]

[No]
LOC_VALDCO = 0.0

SAFCON02 Draw Selected

(LOC_VALDCO) Symbols from
'SAFCON02'

continue

LOOP entry point For each spatial component of this object, perform this loop.
Get 'QUAPOS' Get the value of the Attribute 'QUAPOS' of the current spatial
component
Has value ('QUAPOS')? Is the value of the attribute 'QUAPOS' given?
'QUAPOS' != 1 && 10 && Does the value of attribute 'QUAPOS' equal to neither of the
11? following values: '1', '10', and '11'?
LS(DASH,1,DEPCN) Symbolize the line with a dashed line, 1 unit wide, colour 'DEPCN'.
LS(SOLD,1,DEPCN) Symbolize the line with a solid line, 1 unit wide, colour 'DEPCN'.
Display Contour Labels? Has the mariner chosen to display contour labels by used of
selection of viewing group 33022?
Has value ('VALDCO')? Is the value of the attribute 'VALDCO' given?
LOC_VALDCO = 'VALDCO' Set the local variable 'LOC_VALDCO' equal to 'VALDCO' value.
LOC_VALDCO = 0.0 Set the local variable LOC_VALDCO equal to 0.0 m.
SAFCON01 (LOC_VALDCO) Perform the symbology procedure 'SAFCON01' to symbolize the
contour label. Pass the value of local variable 'LOC_VALDCO' to
'SAFCON01'. A list of symbols is returned.

125
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 LOC_VALDCO - input parameter
List of Symbols - output parameter
Draw Selected Symbols Draw the symbols that were returned by 'SAFCON01' at the centre of
from 'SAFCON01' the run-length of the line.
Symbols must be displayed upright with respect to the screen
borders and not aligned along the contour.
continue Go to the next spatial component.

126
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.3 Conditional Symbology Procedure DEPVAL02

Note that this is a sub-procedure called by procedures OBSTRNnn and WRECKSnn

Applies to: OBSTRN, UWTROC, WRECKS objects called the main procedures
OBSTRNnn and WRECKSnn

Spatial Object(s): Point, line, area

Relation(s) used: Common parts of overlapping area objects

Attribute(s) used: "depth range value" DRVAL1;

"water level" (WATLEV);
"exposure of sounding" (EXPSOU)

Parameter(s): Object to be symbolized from SENC. Any overlapped DEPARE or

UNSARE objects
The procedure returns local variables 'LEAST_DEPTH' and
'SEABED_DEPTH'.

Defaults: Return to main program for defaults

Remarks: If the value of the attribute VALSOU for a wreck, rock or obstruction is
missing/unknown, CSP DEPVAL will establish a default 'LEAST
DEPTH' from the attribute DRVAL1 of the underlying depth area, and
pass it to conditional procedures OBSTRN and WRECKS. However
this procedure is not valid if the value of EXPSOU for the object is 2
(object is shoaler than the DRVAL1 of the surrounding depth area), or
is unknown. It is also not valid if the value of WATLEV for the object is
other than 3 (object is always underwater). In either of these cases
the default procedures in conditional procedures OBSTRN and
WRECKS are used.

127
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 5 DEPVAL02 conditional symbology sub-procedure

act DEPVAL02 conditional symbology sub-procedure

Entry point

«loop»
For each underlying Group 1 obj ect
Get the Calling
[Setup]
Obj ect The Collection of
Underlying Obj ects TG1
& Local Variable
'LEAST_DEPTH'

Set 'LEAST_DEPTH' = 'unknow n'; [Test]

'SEABED_DEPTH' = 'unknow n' While there is
underlying group 1
obj ect

[Body]

Define Local Variable

'LEAST_DEPTH'.

Has value
(LEAST_DEPTH)?
[No]
return
[Yes]
'WATLEV' == 3 &&
('EXPSOU' == 1 ||
'EXPSOU' == 3)? SEABED_DEPTH = LEAST_DEPTH;
[No] LEAST_DEPTH = 'unknow n'

[Yes]

SEABED_DEPTH = LEAST_DEPTH

return

Entry point Entry to the symbology sub-procedure with values of the attributes
WATLEV and EXPSOU passed from the calling procedures.
Get the Calling Object Get the object which is calling this procedure.
Set 'LEAST_DEPTH' = Set the local variable 'LEAST_DEPTH' equal to 'unknown'.
'unknown'; Set the local variable 'SEABED_DEPTH' equal to 'unknown'.
'SEABED_DEPTH' =
'unknown'
Loop for each underlying For each underlying group 1 object which is wholly or partially
Group 1 object covered by the calling object, perform this loop to establish a default
value for the local variable 'LEAST_DEPTH'.
Setup - The collection of underlying objects TG1 and the local
variable 'LEAST_DEPTH';
Test - While there is underlying group 1 object;

128
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Body - Define Local Variable 'LEAST_DEPTH'.
Has value (LEAST_DEPTH)? Does the local variable 'LEAST_DEPTH" have a value?
return If ‘No’, return to the calling procedure with the value of the Local
variables 'LEAST_DEPTH' and 'SEABED_DEPTH'
'WATLEV' == 3 && Is the attribute value for 'WATLEV' equal to 3 (underwater) and is the
('EXPSOU' == 1 || 'EXPSOU' attribute value for 'EXPSOU' equal to '1' (within the range of depth of
== 3)? the surrounding depth area) or '3' (deeper than the range of depth of
the surrounding depth area)?
SEABED_DEPTH = Set the local variable 'SEABED_DEPTH' equal to 'LEAST_DEPTH'
LEAST_DEPTH; value
LEAST_DEPTH = 'unknown' Set the local variable 'LEAST_DEPTH' equal to 'unknown'
SEABED_DEPTH = Set the local variable 'SEABED_DEPTH' equal to 'LEAST_DEPTH'
LEAST_DEPTH value.
return Return to the calling procedure with the value of the Local variables
'LEAST_DEPTH' and 'SEABED_DEPTH'

Figure 6 Loop for each underlying group 1 object

act For each underlying group 1

LOOP Entry
point Is 'UNSARE'?
LEAST_DEPTH =
[Yes] 'unknow n'
break
[No]
For each underlying
Group 1 object which Then it is of the class
is wholly or partially 'DEPARE' or 'DRGARE'
covered by the calling
Get 'DRVAL1'
object

Has value ('DRVAL1')?

[No]
continue
[Yes]

LEAST_DEPTH == 'unknown'? LEAST_DEPTH =

[Yes] 'DRVAL1'
continue
[No]

LEAST_DEPTH < 'DRVAL1'? LEAST_DEPTH =

[No] 'DRVAL1'
continue
[Yes]

continue

LOOP Entry point For each underlying Group 1 object

Is 'UNSARE'? Is the underlying group 1 object of the class 'UNSARE' (unsurveyed
area)?
LEAST_DEPTH = 'unknown' Set the local variable 'LEAST_DEPTH' equal to 'unknown' value.

129
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
break Exit loop.
DRVAL1 missing or Is the value of the underlying object's attribute 'DRVAL1' missing or
unknown? unknown?
Get 'DRVAL1' Get the value of the attribute "Depth range value 1" (DRVAL1) of the
underlying object?
Has value ('DRVAL1')? Is the value of the attribute 'DRVAL1' given in the underlying object
DEPARE(DRGARE)?
continue If ‘No’, go to the next found Group 1 object.
LEAST_DEPTH == Is the value of the local variable 'LEAST_DEPTH' unknown?
'unknown'?
continue go to the next found Group 1 object.
LEAST_DEPTH = 'DRVAL1' Set the value of the local variable 'LEAST_DEPTH' equal to
'DRVAL1'.
LEAST_DEPTH < 'DRVAL1'? Is the value of the local variable 'LEAST_DEPTH' less than the value
of 'DRVAL1'?
continue go to the next found Group 1 object.
LEAST_DEPTH = 'DRVAL1' Set the value of the local variable 'LEAST_DEPTH' equal to
'DRVAL1'
continue go to the next found Group 1 object.

130
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.4 Conditional Symbology Procedure LIGHTS06

Light flares, light sectors & light coverage (S-57)

Applies to: S-57 Object Class "light" (LIGHTS)

Spatial Object(s): Point

Spatial Relation(s): Point objects at identical location

Attribute(s) used: "colour" (COLOUR); "category of light" (CATLIT); "sector 1"

(SECTR1); "sector 2" (SECTR2); «orientation» (ORIENT) "visibility of
light" (LITVIS); "value of nominal range" (VALNMR)

Parameter(s): Object to be symbolized from SENC

User parameters: Show full length leg lines.

Defaults: Display Priority given by look-up table;

OVERRADAR priority given by look-up table;
Display Category given by look-up table;
Viewing Group given by look-up table

Remarks: A light is one of the most complex S-57 objects. Presentation depends
on whether it is a light on a floating or fixed platform, range, colour etc.
This conditional symbology procedure derives the correct presentation
from these parameters and also generates an area that shows the
coverage of the light.

Notes on light sectors:

1.) The radial leg-lines defining the light sectors are normally drawn to
only 25mm from the light to avoid clutter (see continuation B).
However, the mariner should be able to select «full light-sector lines»
and have the leg-lines extended to the nominal range of the light
(VALMAR).

2.) Continuation of this procedure symbolizes the sectors at the light itself.
In addition, it should be possible, upon request, for the mariner to be
capable of identifying the colour and sector limit lines of the sectors
affecting the ship even if the light itself is off the display.

Further note: The sub-procedure LITDSN02, which generates the light description
text-string, is provided as a descriptive narrative.

131
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 7 LIGHTS06 conditional symbology procedure

act LIGHTS06 conditional symbology procedure

Has value
('VALNMR')?
Get the Calling
Get 'VALNMR' VALNMR = 9
Obj ect [No]
Entry point [Yes]

Get 'CATLIT'

Has value
'CATLIT' == 11 || 'CATLIT' 'CATLIT' == 1 ||
('CATLIT')?
'CATLIT' == 8? == 9? 'CATLIT' == 16?
Get 'ORIENT'
[Yes] [No] [No] [Yes]
[Yes] [Yes]
[No] [No]
Has value
('ORIENT')?
SY(LIGHTS82) SY(LIGHTS81) LS(DASH,1,CHBLK)
[Yes]

[No]
Exit Procedure

Is LIGHTS object
'NO SECTOR'?

Has value [Yes] [No]

Get Values: ('COLOUR')?
COLOUR = 12
'COLOUR','LITCHR', [Yes]
[No] (magenta).
'SECTR1', 'SECTR2' LIGHTS06
VALNMR >= 10 && Continuation
!('CATLIT' include 5 || 6 )
Draw a 360 degree arc Select a Colour Name && 'LITCHR' != 12?
w ith radius 26 mm by COLOUR Value [Yes]
[No]
COLOUR includes 'NO SECTOR'
1 || 6 || 11? Lights plus?
FLARE_AT_45_DEG =
[Yes] FALSE [Yes] [No]

[No]
FLARE_AT_45_DEG = Select a Symbol
TRUE Name by COLOUR

Has value 'CATLIT' == 1 || FLARE_AT_45_DEG

('ORIENT')? 'CATLIT' == 16? == TRUE?
SY(QUESTMRK1)
[No] [Yes] [No] [No]
[Yes] [Yes]

SY(SELECT,ORIENT+/-180°); SY(SELECT,45) SY(SELECT,135)

TE(‘%03.0lf deg’,’ORIENT’...)

Show Light Select a symbol name which is appropriate value

Description? of attribute 'COLOUR' equals:
See LITDSN02
 1 and 3 (white & red) SELECT= 'LIGHTS11';
[Yes]
 3 (red) SELECT= 'LIGHTS11';
 1 and 4 (white and green) SELECT=
FLARE_AT_45_DEG [No] 'LIGHTS12';
== TRUE?  4 (green) SELECT= 'LIGHTS12';
TX('LITDSN',3,2,3...)
 11 (orange) SELECT= 'LIGHTS13';
[No] (CENTRE j ustified)
 6 (yellow) SELECT= 'LIGHTS13';
[Yes]  5 and 6 (blue & wihite ) SELECT=
'LIGHTS13';
 1 (white) SELECT= 'LIGHTS13';
TX('LITDSN',3,1,3,...)  other (default) SELECT= 'LITDEF11';
(BOTTOM j ustified)
Exit Procedure

132
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Entry point Entry to the symbology procedure.
Get the Calling Object Get the object which is calling this procedure.
Get 'VALNMR' Get the value of the attribute 'Value of nominal range' (VALNMR).
Has value ('VALNMR')? Is the value of the attribute 'VALNMR' given?
VALNMR = 9 Set local variable 'VALNMR' equal to 9 M
Get 'CATLIT' Get the value of the attribute 'Category of light' (CATLIT).
Has value ('CATLIT')? Is the value of the attribute 'CATLIT' given?
'CATLIT' == 11 || 'CATLIT' Does the value of the attribute 'CATLIT' equal to 8 (floodlight) or 11
== 8? (spotlight)?
SY(LIGHTS82) Draw symbol 'LIGHTS82' at the calling object's location.
'CATLIT' == 9? Does the value of the attribute 'CATLIT' equal 9 (strip light)?
SY(LIGHTS81) Draw symbol 'LIGHTS81' at the calling object's location.
Exit Procedure Symbolization is finished
'CATLIT' == 1 || 'CATLIT' == Does the value of the attribute 'CATLIT' equal 1 (directional) or 16
16? (moiré effect)?
Get 'ORIENT' Get the value of the attribute 'Orientation' (ORIENT).
Has value ('ORIENT')? Is the value of the attribute 'ORIENT' given?
LS(DASH,1,CHBLK) Draw the direction marked by the light as defined by the attribute
'ORIENT'.
Remember that this is the bearing from seaward. It means the start
point is at sea and the end point is at the calling object's location.
Draw a line equal in length to the value of attribute 'VALNMR'.
Symbolize as follows:
'LS(DASH, 1, CHBLK)'
Get Values: Get the values of the following attributes used for next analysing:
'COLOUR','LITCHR', - 'Colour' (COLOUR);
'SECTR1', 'SECTR2' - 'Sector limit one' (SECTR1);
- 'Sector limit two' (SECTR2);
- 'Light characteristic' (LITCHR).
Has value ('COLOUR')? Is the value of the attribute 'COLOUR' given?
COLOUR = 12 (magenta). Assume the value of the 'COLOUR' is '12' (magenta)
Is LIGHTS object 'NO Is the attributes 'SECTR1' (sector limit one) or 'SECTR2' (sector limit
SECTOR'? two) values absent, or does their difference equal zero degrees, or
do they equal to 0.00 and 360.00 correspondingly in the object
which is calling this procedure?
LIGHTS06 Continuation If ‘No’, go to ‘LIGHTS06 Continuation’. It describes the sector lights
showing its line legs and arcs.
Input values of the attributes 'SECTR1', 'SECTR2', 'COLOUR' of the
calling object and local variable 'VALNMR'. See Figure 8 ‘LIGHTS06
Continuation’
VALNMR >= 10 && Check whether this is a major light:
!('CATLIT' include 5 || 6 ) Is the value of 'VALNMR' greater or equal to 10 nautical miles? AND
&& 'LITCHR' != 12? Does the value of 'CATLIT' not include '5' (aero light) or 6 (air
obstruction light)? AND
Does the value of 'LITCHR' not equal '12' (Morse)?
Select a Colour Name by Select a colour name which is appropriate value of attribute
COLOUR Value 'COLOUR' equals:
1 and 3 (white & red) SELECT= 'LITRD';
3 (red) SELECT ='LITRD';
1 and 4 (white and green) SELECT ='LITGN';
4 (green) SELECT ='LITGN';
11 (orange) SELECT ='LITYW';
6 (yellow) SELECT ='LITYW';
5 and 6 (blue & yellow) SELECT ='LITYW';
1 (white) SELECT ='LITYW';
other (default) SELECT ='CHMGD';
Draw a 360 degree arc with First symbolize a 360 degree arc with a solid line,
radius 26 mm 4 units wide, COLOUR OUTLW;
then symbolize a 360 degree arc with a solid line,

133
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 2 units wide, COLOUR as selected above.
The centre of the arc is the calling object location.
The radius of the arc on the display is 26 mm.
'NO SECTOR' Lights plus? Is there any 'No Sector' lights located at the same point as the
calling object?
FLARE_AT_45_DEG = Set the local variable 'FLARE AT 45 DEGREES' to 'FALSE'
FALSE
COLOUR includes 1 || 6 || Does the calling object COLOUR include 1 (white) or 6 (yellow) or
11? 11 (orange)?
FLARE_AT_45_DEG = Set local variable 'FLARE AT 45 DEGREES' to 'TRUE'
TRUE
Select a Symbol Name by Select a symbol name which is appropriate value of attribute
COLOUR 'COLOUR' equals:
1 and 3 (white & red) SELECT= 'LIGHTS11';
3 (red) SELECT= 'LIGHTS11';
1 and 4 (white and green) SELECT= 'LIGHTS12';
4 (green) SELECT= 'LIGHTS12';
11 (orange) SELECT= 'LIGHTS13';
6 (yellow) SELECT= 'LIGHTS13';
1 (white) SELECT= 'LIGHTS13';
5 and 6 (blue & yellow) SELECT= 'LIGHTS13';
other (default) SELECT= 'LITDEF11';
'CATLIT' == 1 || 'CATLIT' == Does the value of the attribute 'CATLIT' equal to '1' (directional) or
16? '16' (moiré)?
Has value ('ORIENT')? Is the value of the attribute 'ORIENT' given?
SY(SELECT,ORIENT+/- Draw the selected symbol at the calling object's location rotated in
180°); TE(‘%03.0lf the direction as defined by the attribute 'ORIENT' +/- 180° (ORIENT
deg’,’ORIENT’...) is direction from seaward), and write the direction from seaward at
the light as follows:
"TE(‘%03.0lf deg’,’ORIENT’, 3,3,3, '15110', 3,1, CHELK, 23)"
SY(QUESTMRK1) Draw the symbol 'QUESTMRK1' at the calling object's location
FLARE_AT_45_DEG == Is 'FLARE AT 45 DEGREES' set to TRUE?
TRUE?
SY(SELECT,45) Draw the selected symbol with a rotation of 45 degrees from upright
at the position where the object which was calling the procedure is
located.
SY(SELECT,135) Draw the selected symbol with a rotation of 135 degrees from
upright at the position where the object which was calling the
procedure is located.
Show Light Description? Have the mariner selected viewing of light descriptions? (text group
23).
See LITDSN02 Pass on to this procedure the attributes:
'CATLIT', 'LITCHR', 'SIGGRP', 'COLOUR', 'SIGPER', 'HEIGHT',
'VALNMR', 'STATUS'.

This procedure constructs a text string for the light description. This
string is returned as the argument 'LITDSN'.

Note: previous version of the presentation library provided c-code

that enabled the building of light description text strings for
presentation on the ECDIS chart display. Version 4 of the
presentation library has now removed the c-code and textual
description of how light description should be constructed is
provided
FLARE_AT_45_DEG == Is 'FLARE AT 45 DEGREES' set to TRUE?
TRUE?
TX('LITDSN',3,1,3,...) Write the returned text string 'LITDSN" as follows:
(BOTTOM justified) TX('LITDSN', 3,1,3, '15110', 2,-1, CHBLK, 23)
TX('LITDSN',3,2,3...) Write the returned text string 'LITDSN" as follows:

134
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 (CENTRE justified) TX('LITDSN', 3,2,3, '15110', 2,0, CHBLK, 23)
Exit Procedure Symbolization is finished

135
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 8 LIGHTS06 Continuation describes the sector lights showing its line legs and arcs.

act LIGHTS06 Continuation

'SECTR2' > 'SECTR1'?
SECTR2 +=360°
[No]
Entry point
[Yes]
Full length light
sector lines?
LEGLEN = VALNMR
[Yes]
[No]

LEGLEN = 25mm «loop»

For each co-located lights
[Setup]
Are there any
other lights? 'SECTR1' , 'SECTR2'
LS(DASH,1,CHBLK) for EXTENDED ARC & Co-located LIGHTS
both sector legs RADIUS = FALSE [Yes]
[Test]
While there is
[No] unprocessed
co-located LIGHTS

[Body]
Get 'LITVIS' Set the v alue of
EXTENDED ARC
RADIUS
'LITVIS' == 7 ||
'LITVIS' == 8 ||
'LITVIS' == 3?
Select a Colour Name Select a colour name which is appropriate value
[No] by COLOUR Value of attribute 'COLOUR' equals:

[Yes]  1 and 3 (white & red) SELECT='LITRD';

 3 (red) SELECT ='LITRD';
 1 and 4 (white and green) SELECT='LITGN';
 4 (green) SELECT ='LITGN';
Select: lineStyle = 'DASH', Select:
lineWidth = 1,  11 (orange) SELECT ='LITYW';
lineStyle='SOLID',  6 (yellow) SELECT ='LITYW';
colourSELECT='CHBLK' lineWidth = 2
 5 and 6 (blue & wihite ) SELECT ='LITYW';
 1 (white) SELECT ='LITYW';
 other (default) SELECT ='CHMGD';
EXTENDED ARC
RADIUS == TRUE? EXTENDED ARC
RADIUS == TRUE?
[No]
[No]

[Yes] Draw Sector Arc w ith [Yes] Draw Sector Arc w ith
selected style and
selected style and
radius 20 mm radius 20 mm

Draw Sector Arc w ith Draw Sector Arc

selected style and w ith selected style
radius 25 mm and radius 25 mm

Note 1:The sectors specified above are

Note 2: When the mariner has selected that
based on lights shown on the display. it the sector lines be extended to the
should also be possible, for the mariner to nominal range of the light, the
be informed, on demand, of the sector-
manufacturer may offer the option of
colour and sector-limits affecting his ship providing a second set of sector colour arcs
which are generated by lights located in the extended coverage of the sector
outside the display window. Exit lines.
Procedure

136
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Entry point Entry to the continuation of symbology procedure LIGHTS06.
'SECTR2' > 'SECTR1'? The value 'SECTR2' greater than the value of 'SECTR1'?
SECTR2 +=360° Add 360 degrees to the local value of 'SECTR2'.
Full length light sector Has the mariner selected full length light sector lines?
lines?
LEGLEN = VALNMR Set local variable 'LEGLEN' equal to length (in mm) of 'VALNMR'
value in the scale of ECDIS display.
LEGLEN = 25mm Set the local variable 'LEGLEN' equal to 25mm in the scale of the
ECDIS display.
LS(DASH,1,CHBLK) for both Draw both sector legs by symbology instruction 'LS(DASH, 1,
sector legs CHBLK)'.
Start the legs the position where the light object which was calling
the procedure is located. Show the sector legs in the directions which
are defined by 'SECTR1' and 'SECTR2'. Do not forget to reverse the
sector values (+/- 180 degrees) since the values are given from
seaward; Use LEGLEN from the step above.
(The LITDSN text string is not used for sector lights because it would
cause clatter).
EXTENDED ARC RADIUS = Set the value of local variable 'EXTENDED ARC RADIUS' to 'FALSE'
FALSE by default
Are there any other lights? Is there any other 'LIGHTS' object located at the same point as the
calling objects?
Loop for each co-located For each occurrence of the object class 'LIGHTS' which is co-located
lights with the calling object perform this loop to detect and symbolize
overlapping sectors with an extended arc radius for the smaller
sector.
Setup - the input values are the values 'SECTR1' and 'SECTR2' of
the calling object and the collection of the co-located LIGHTS object.
Test - While there is unprocessed co-located LIGHTS object,
Body - Set the output values is the local variable 'EXTENDED ARC
RADIUS'. See Figure 9 Loop for co-located lights objects
Get 'LITVIS' Get the value of the attribute "Light visibility" (LITVIS) from the calling
object.
'LITVIS' == 7 || Does the value of the attribute 'LITVIS' (visibility of light) equal '7'
'LITVIS' == 8 || (obscured) or '8' (partially obscured) or '3' (faint)?
'LITVIS' == 3?
Select: Select the simple dashed linestyle, 1 units wide, colour 'CHBLK'
lineStyle ='DASH',
lineWidth = 1,
colourSELECT= 'CHBLK'
EXTENDED ARC RADIUS == Is the local variable 'EXTENDED ARC RADIUS' equal to 'TRUE'
TRUE?
Draw Sector Arc with Draw the sector arc: colour, linestyle, line width as selected above.
selected style and radius 25 Radius on the display is 25mm.
mm
Draw Sector Arc with Draw the sector arc: colour, linestyle, line width as selected above.
selected style and radius 20 Radius on the display is 20 mm.
mm
Select a Colour Name by Select a colour name which is appropriate value of attribute
COLOUR Value 'COLOUR' equals:
1 and 3 (white & red) SELECT= 'LITRD';
3 (red) SELECT ='LITRD';
1 and 4 (white and green) SELECT ='LITGN';
4 (green) SELECT ='LITGN';
11 (orange) SELECT ='LITYW';
6 (yellow) SELECT ='LITYW';
5 and 6 (blue & yellow) SELECT ='LITYW';

137
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 1 (white) SELECT ='LITYW';
other (default) SELECT ='CHMGD';
Select: Select the simple solid linestyle, 2 units wide.
lineStyle='SOLID', lineWidth
=2
EXTENDED ARC RADIUS == Is the local variable 'EXTENDED ARC RADIUS' equal to 'TRUE'
TRUE?
Draw Sector Arc with First symbolize the Arc with a solid line,
selected style and radius 25 4 units wide, COLOUR OUTLW;
mm then symbolize the Arc with the COLOUR, linestyle and linewidth
selected above.
Radius on the display is 25mm.
Draw Sector Arc with First symbolize the Arc with a solid line,
selected style and radius 20 4 units wide, COLOUR OUTLW;
mm then symbolize the Arc with the COLOUR, linestyle and linewidth
selected above.
Radius on the display is 20mm.
Exit Procedure Symbolization is finished

Figure 9 Loop for co-located lights objects

act Co-located lights

is Lights sectors
overlapped?

For each occurrence of the object class 'LIGHTS'

[No]
which is co-located with the calling object
LOOP
[Yes] perform this loop to detect and symbolize
Entry point
overlapping sectors with an extended arc radius
for the smaller sector.
The input values are the values 'SECTR1' and
Arc (other) >
'SECTR2' of the calling object
Arc (calling)?
The output values is the local variable
[Yes] [No] 'EXTENDED ARC RADIUS'.

EXTENDED ARC
RADIUS = TRUE
continue

LOOP Entry point For each occurrence of the object class 'LIGHTS' which is co-
located with the calling object perform this loop
is Lights sectors Does the other 'LIGHTS' object overlap the sector of the calling
overlapped? object? ('SECTR1' and/or 'SECTR2' of the other 'LIGHTS' falls
between 'SECTR1' and 'SECTR2' of the calling object) or
('SECTR1' and/or 'SECTR2' of the calling object falls between
'SECTR1' and 'SECTR2' of the other 'LIGHTS' object).
Arc (other) > Arc (calling)? Is the ARC ('SECTR2' - 'SECTR1') of the other object larger that the
sector ARC of the calling object?
EXTENDED ARC RADIUS = Set local variable 'EXTENDED ARC RADIUS' to TRUE.
TRUE
continue Go to next co-located light object.

138
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.5 Conditional Symbology Procedure OBSTRN07

Applies to: S-57 Object Class "obstruction" (OBSTRN);

S-57 Object Class "under water rock" (UWTROC)

Spatial Object(s): Point, Line, Area.

Attribute(s) used: "value of sounding" (VALSOU);

"water level" (WATLEV);
"exposure of sounding" (EXPSOU);

Parameter(s): Object to be symbolized from SENC

Defaults: Display Priority given by look-up table; OVERRADAR priority by look-

up table; Display Category given by look-up table; Viewing Group
given by look-up table; Area Colour fill from underlying ‘DEPARE’ or
‘UNSARE’;

Remarks: Obstructions or isolated underwater dangers of depths less than he

safety contour which lie within the safe waters defined by the safety
contour are to be presented by a specific isolated danger symbol and
put in IMO category "DISPLAY BASE" (see IMO Performance
Standard for ECDIS [2]). This task is performed by the most recent
edition of sub-procedure UDWHAZnn which is called by this
symbology procedure. Objects of the class "under water rock" are
handled by this routine as well to ensure a consistent symbolization of
isolated dangers on the seabed.
The current UDWHAZnn also allows the mariner the option of
displaying isolated dangers in the waters between the safety contour
and the zero metre line.
In the case that the value of attribute VALSOU for this object is
unknown, the most recent edition of sub-procedure DEPVALnn is
called. This will provide a default 'least_depth' from the DRVAL1 of
the underlying depth area on condition that the value of attribute
EXPSOU is not 2 (shoaler than the depth area), and the value of
attribute WATLEV is 3 (always underwater).

139
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 10 OBSTRN07 conditional symbology procedure

act OBSTRN07 conditional symbology procedure

Entry point
Get the Calling
Obj ect

Get 'VALSOU'

Has value
('VALSOU')? Get 'WATLEV';
LEAST_DEPTH = 'unknow n'
[No] Get 'EXPSOU'

[Yes]

DEPVAL02
(WATLEV,EXPSOU)
DEPTH_VALUE = 'VALSOU'

LEAST_DEPTH ==
'unknown'?
DEPTH_VALUE = LEAST_DEPTH
[No]

[Yes]

'CATOBS' == 6 ||
'WATLEV' == 3?
DEPTH_VALUE = 0.01
[Yes]

[No]

'WATLEV' == 5?
DEPTH_VALUE = 0
[Yes]

[No]

DEPTH_VALUE = -15

UDWHAZ05 Is Point? Is Line?

(DEPTH_VALUE)
[No] [No]

[Yes] [Yes]

OBSTRN07 OBSTRN07 OBSTRN07

Continuation A Continuation B Continuation C

140
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Entry point Entry to the symbology procedure.
Get the Calling Object Get the object which is calling this procedure.
Get 'VALSOU' Get the value of the attribute 'Value of sounding' (VALSOU) of the
calling object
Has value ('VALSOU')? Is the value of the attribute 'VALSOU' given?
DEPTH_VALUE = 'VALSOU' Set the local variable 'DEPTH_VALUE' equal to 'VALSOU'.
Set the viewing group to 34051.
LEAST_DEPTH = 'unknown' Set the local variable 'LEAST_DEPTH' equal to 'unknown' value.
Get 'WATLEV'; Get the value of the attributes 'Water level effect' (WATLEV) and
Get 'EXPSOU' 'Exposition of sounding' (EXPSOU) of the calling object.
DEPVAL02 Performs the symbology sub-procedure 'DEPVAL02' which returns
(WATLEV,EXPSOU) a value for the local variables 'LEAST_DEPTH' and
'SEABED_DEPTH'.
Pass attributes 'WATLEV and EXPSOU' on to it
Note: 'SEABED_DEPTH' is returned from "DEPVAL02' but is not
used by this procedure.
'WATLEV' - input parameter
‘EXPSOU’ - input parameter
'LEAST_DEPTH' - output parameter
'SEABED_DEPTH' - output parameter
LEAST_DEPTH == Is the value of the local variable 'LEAST_DEPTH' equal to
'unknown'? ‘unknown’?
DEPTH_VALUE = Set the local variable 'DEPTH_VALUE' equal to the local variable
LEAST_DEPTH 'LEAST_DEPTH'.
'CATOBS' == 6 || 'WATLEV' Is the value of 'CATOBS' equal to '6' OR 'WATLEV' equal to '3'?
== 3?
DEPTH_VALUE = 0.01 Set the local variable 'DEPTH_VALUE' = 0.01 m to a fail-safe depth
based on the value of the attribute 'CATOBS'=6:
'WATLEV' == 5? Is the value of 'WATLEV' equal to '5'?
DEPTH_VALUE = 0 Set the local variable 'DEPTH_VALUE'=0 to a fail-safe depth based
on the value of the attribute WATLEV'=5:
DEPTH_VALUE = -15 Set the local variable 'DEPTH_VALUE' to a fail-safe depth based
on the value of the attribute WATLEV' or by default
if 'WATLEV'=4 (covers and uncovers) OR 'WATLEV'=1 OR
'WATLEV'= 2 (always dry) OR 'WATLEV'=' ' (unknown or missing)
then 'DEPTH_VALUE'=-15m else default
UDWHAZ05 Performs the symbology sub-procedure 'UDWHAZ05' which returns
(DEPTH_VALUE) a flag indicating whether or not to display the ISOLATED DANGER
SYMBOL [IMO PS App.2 1.3] and the selected symbol.
Pass 'DEPTH_VALUE' on to it.
Return: - selected symbol name ‘ISODRG01’;
- parameters presentation: SCAMIN, DISPLAY MODE,
PRIORITY, RADAR FLAG, VIEWING GROUP if they are
changed.
DEPTH_VALUE - input parameter
ISOLATED DANGER - output parameter
SYMBOL message
Is Point? Is the calling object of type point?
OBSTRN07 Continuation A Point objects, underwater rocks (UWTROC) and obstructions
(OBSTRN)
Is Line? Is the calling object of type line?
OBSTRN07 Continuation B Geometry type is line.
OBSTRN07 Continuation C Geometry type is area.

141
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 11 OBSTRN07Continuation A.Points objects, underwater rocks (UWTROC) and obstruction (OBSTRN)

act OBSTRN07 Continuation A

'UDWHAZ04' Does 'QUAPNT02'
result? return 'LOWACC01'?
QUAPNT02
SY( ISODGR01)
[Yes] [No]
Entry point
[No] [Yes]

Points objects,
underwater rocks SOUNDING =FALSE SY(LOWACC01)
(UWTROC) and
Exit
obstruction (OBSTRN) Has value
procedure
('VALSOU')?
[No] [Yes]
Is Calling Object
'WATLEV' == 3? UWTROC?

[Yes] [Yes] [No]

'CATOBS' == 6?
[No] [No] [Yes]
SELECT= 'WATLEV'
'UWTROC03' == 1 || 2? 'WATLEV' == 4 || 5?
[No] [No]
SELECT= [Yes] [Yes]
'UWTROC04'

SELECT= SELECT= SELECT=

'OBSTRN11' 'OBSTRN03' 'OBSTRN01'

'VALSOU' <=
SAFETY DEPTH?

[Yes]
Is Calling Object
UWTROC? 'CATOBS' == 6?

[Yes] [No] [Yes]

[No]
'WATLEV' 'WATLEV' [No]
'WATLEV'
== 4 || 5? == 4 || 5?
== 1 || 2?
[No] [No]
[Yes] [No]
[Yes]
[Yes]

SELECT= 'DANGER01'; SELECT='DANGER03'; SELECT= 'DANGER02';

SOUNDING=TRUE SOUNDING=TRUE SOUNDING=TRUE

SELECT= 'UWTROC04'; SELECT='OBSTRN11'; SELECT='DANGER01';

SOUNDING=FALSE SOUNDING=FALSE SOUNDING=TRUE

SNDFRM03 SOUNDING ==TRUE?

(DEPTH_VALUE) SY(SELECT)
[Yes]

[No]
Exit
Does 'QUAPNT02'
procedure
return 'LOWACC01'?
Draw Sounding
SY(LOWACC01)
Symbol(s) [Yes]

[No]

142
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Entry point Entry to the continuaton A of symbology procedure with a point
object: underwater rocks (UWTROC) or obstructions (OBSTRN)
QUAPNT02 Performs the symbology sub-procedure 'QUAPNT02' which returns a
flag indicating whether or not to display the LOW ACCURACY
SYMBOL and returns the selected symbol name 'LOWACC01'. See
Conditional Symbology Procedure QUAPNT02
'UDWHAZ05' result? Has the procedure 'UDWHAZ05' indicated the Isolated danger
symbol shall be shown?
SY( ISODGR01) Draw the 'ISODGR01' symbol with the set presentation parameters
selected by 'UDWHAZ05' at the calling objects location
Does 'QUAPNT02' return Is the symbol 'LOWACC01' selected by the procedure 'QUAPNT02'?
'LOWACC01'?
SY(LOWACC01) If so indicated by the procedure 'QUAPNT02', draw the returned low
accuracy symbol 'LOWACC01' with the set presentation parameters
selected by 'UDWHAZ05' at the calling object's location.
Exit procedure Symbolization is finished
SOUNDING =FALSE
Has value ('VALSOU')? Is the value of the attribute 'VALSOU' given in the calling object?
Is Calling Object UWTROC? Is the calling object of the class 'UWTROC'?
'WATLEV' == 3? Is the value of the attribute 'WATLEV' equal to '3' given in the calling
object?
SELECT= 'UWTROC03' Select symbol name SELECT='UWTROC03'
SELECT= 'UWTROC04' Select symbol name SELECT='UWTROC04' by default.
'CATOBS' == 6? Calling object must be of the class 'OBSTRN'.
Is the value of the attribute 'CATOBS' equal to '6' given in the calling
object?
SELECT= 'OBSTRN01' Select symbol name SELECT='OBSTRN01', if 'CATOBS'=6 (foul
area) OR WATLEV=no equal to 1,2,4 OR 5.
'WATLEV' == 4 || 5? Is the value of the attribute 'WATLEV' equal to '4' or '5' given in the
calling object?
SELECT= 'UWTROC04'; if 'WATLEV'=4 (covers and uncovers) OR 'WATLEV'=5 (awash)then
SOUNDING=FALSE select symbol name SELECT='UWTROC04' and set the local
variable 'SOUNDING' equal to FALSE
SELECT= 'DANGER01'; If attribute 'WATLEV' has any value except 4 and 5, <unknown> or
SOUNDING=TRUE missed then select symbol name SELECT='DANGER01' and set the
local variable 'SOUNDING' equal to TRUE
'CATOBS' == 6? Calling object must be of the class 'OBSTRN'.
Is the value of the attribute 'CATOBS' equal to '6' given in the calling
object?
'WATLEV' == 1 || 2? Is the value of the attribute 'WATLEV' equal to '1' or '2' given in the
calling object?
SELECT= 'OBSTRN11' Select symbol name SELECT='OBSTRN11' if 'WATLEV'=1 (partially
submerged of HW) or 2 (always dry).
'WATLEV' == 4 || 5? Is the value of the attribute 'WATLEV' equal to '4' or '5' given in the
calling object?
SELECT= 'OBSTRN03' Select symbol name SELECT='OBSTRN03' if 'WATLEV'=4 (covers
and uncovers) or 5 (awash).
'VALSOU' <= SAFETY Is the value of the attribute 'VALSOU' less than or equal to SAFETY
DEPTH? DEPTH?
SELECT= 'DANGER02'; Select symbol name SELECT='DANGER02' and set the local
SOUNDING=TRUE variable 'SOUNDING' equal to TRUE
Is Calling Object UWTROC? Is the calling object of the class 'UWTROC'?
'WATLEV' == 1 || 2? Is the value of the attribute 'WATLEV' equal to '1' or '2' given in the
calling object?
SELECT='OBSTRN11'; Select symbol name SELECT='OBSTRN11' 'if 'WATLEV'=1 (partially
SOUNDING=FALSE submerged of HW) or 2 (always dry). Set the local variable
'SOUNDING' equal to FALSE

143
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
'WATLEV' == 4 || 5? Is the value of the attribute 'WATLEV' equal to '4' or '5' given in the
calling object?
SELECT='DANGER03'; Select symbol name SELECT='DANGER03' 'if 'WATLEV'=(covers
SOUNDING=TRUE and uncovers) or 5 (awash). Set the local variable 'SOUNDING'
equal to TRUE
SELECT='DANGER01'; Select symbol name SELECT='DANGER01' and set the local
SOUNDING=TRUE variable 'SOUNDING' equal to TRUE if 'CATOBS' equal to '6' (foul
area) or 'WATLEV' no equal to 1,2,4 OR 5.
SY(SELECT) Draw the selected symbol at the calling object's location.
SOUNDING ==TRUE? is the local variable 'SOUNDING' equal to TRUE
SNDFRM04 Perform the symbology sub-procedure which returns a list of
(DEPTH_VALUE) sounding symbols.
Pass 'DEPTH_VALUE' on to it.
Remember the SOUNDING SYMBOL(S)
DEPTH_VALUE Input parameter
Sounding Symbols List Output parameter
Draw Sounding Symbol(s) Draw the sounding symbol(s) returned from 'SNDFRM03' at the
calling object's location.
Does 'QUAPNT02' return Is the symbol 'LOWACC01' selected by the procedure 'QUAPNT02'?
'LOWACC01'?
SY(LOWACC01) If so indicated by the procedure 'QUAPNT02', draw the returned low
accuracy symbol 'LOWACC01' at the calling object's location.
Exit procedure Symbolization is finished

144
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 12 OBSTRN07 Continuation BLine objects, obstructions (OBSTRN)

act OBSTRN07 Continuation B

Entry point

Line objects, obstructions (OBSTRN)

«loop»
For each spatial component
[Setup]
The Calling Obj ect &
Results of CSP
'UDWHAZ04'
UDWHAZ04
result?
[Test]
While there is SY(ISODGR01)
[Yes]
unprocessed spatial
component [No]

[Body] Has value

Symbolize spatail ('VALSOU')?
components [No]

[Yes]

SNDFRM03
(DEPTH_VALUE)

Draw Sounding
Symbol(s)

Exist
procedure

Entry point Entry to the continuation of symbology procedure with a line object,
obstructions (OBSTRN)
Loop for each spatial Setup - The Calling Object & Results of CSP 'UDWHAZ05'
component Test - While there is unprocessed spatial component
Body - to symbolize a spatial component if it is needed.
See Figure Loop for each spatial component of the object
UDWHAZ05 result? Has the procedure 'UDWHAZ05' indicated the Isolated danger
symbol shall be shown?
SY(ISODGR01) Draw isolated danger symbol 'ISODRG01' at the midpoint of the line
with the set presentation parameters selected by 'UDWHAZ05' CSP
Has value ('VALSOU')? Is the value of the attribute 'VALSOU' given?
SNDFRM04 Perform the symbology sub-procedure which returns a list of
(DEPTH_VALUE) sounding symbols.
Pass 'DEPTH_VALUE' on to it.
Remember the SOUNDING SYMBOL(S)
DEPTH_VALUE Input parameter
Sounding Symbols List Output parameter

145
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Draw Sounding Symbol(s) Draw the sounding symbol(s) returned from 'SNDFRM04' at the
middle point of the line.
Exist procedure Symbolization is finished

Figure 13 Loop for each spatial component of the object

act Foreach spatial component

LOOP
entry point
Get Spatial Get
Component. 'QUAPOS'

For each spatial

component of the
object, perform this Has value
loop: ('QUAPOS')?
[No]

[Yes]

'QUAPOS' == 2 || 3 ||
4 || 5 || 6 || 7 || 8 || 9?
[No]

[Yes]

UDWHAZ04 UDWHAZ04
result? result?
LC(LOWACC41) LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK)
[Yes] [Yes]

[No]

LC(LOWACC31) [No] continue

continue

'VALSOU' <= Has value

SAFETY DEPTH? (''VALSOU')?
[Yes] [Yes]

[No] [No]

LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK) LS(DASH,2,CHBLK) LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK)

continue

146
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 LOOP entry point For each spatial component of this object, perform this loop.
Get Spatial Component. Get next spatial component of the calling object.
Get 'QUAPOS' Get the value of the attribute 'Quality of position' (QUAPOS) of the
current spatial component
Has value ('QUAPOS')? Is the value of the attribute 'QUAPOS' given?
'QUAPOS' == 2 || 3 || 4 || 5 || Does the value of the attribute 'QUAPOS' equal to one of the
6 || 7 || 8 || 9? following values: '2', '3', '4', '5', '6', '7', '8' or '9'?
UDWHAZ05 result? Has the procedure 'UDWHAZ05' indicated the isolated danger
symbol shall be shown?
LC(LOWACC41) Draw the line with a complex line style 'LOWACC41' at the spatial
component with the set presentation parameters selected by
'UDWHAZ05' CSP
LC(LOWACC31) Draw the line with a complex line style 'LOWACC31' at the spatial
component
continue Go to the next spatial component
UDWHAZ05 result? Has the procedure 'UDWHAZ05' indicated the isolated danger
symbol shall be shown?
LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK) Draw the line with a dotted line, 2 units wide, colour 'CHBLK' at the
spatial component with the set presentation parameters selected by
'UDWHAZ05' CSP
Has value (''VALSOU')? Is the value of the attribute 'VALSOU' given in the calling object?
LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK) Draw the line with a dotted line, 2 units wide, colour 'CHBLK' at the
spatial component.
'VALSOU' <= SAFETY Is the value of the attribute 'VALSOU' less than or equal to SAFETY
DEPTH? DEPTH?
LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK) Draw the line with a dotted line, 2 units wide, colour 'CHBLK' at the
spatial component
LS(DASH,2,CHBLK) Draw the line with a dashed line, 2 units wide, colour 'CHBLK' at
the spatial component.
continue Go to the next spatial component

147
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 14 OBSTRN07 Continuation CArea objects, obstructions (OBSTRN)

act OBSTRN07 Continuation C

QUAPNT02
Area objects, obstructions (OBSTRN)
Entry point
UDWHAZ04
result?
AC(DEPVS) and
LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK) SY(ISODGR01)
[No] [Yes] AP(FOULAR01)
Has value
('VALSOU')? Does 'QUAPNT02'
[Yes] return 'LOWACC01'?
'VALSOU' <=
SAFETY DEPTH? [Yes] [No]
[No]
[Yes] [No]

SY(LOWACC01)

LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK) LS(DASH,2,CHGRD) Exit

procedure

SNDFRM03
(DEPTH_VALUE) Draw Sounding
Symbol(s)

'CATOBS' == 6?
AP(FOULAR01) LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK)
[Yes]

[No]
'WATLEV' == 1 ||
'WATLEV' == 2?
AC(CHBRN) LS(SOLD,2,CSTLN)
[Yes]

[No]

'WATLEV' == 4?
AC(DEPIT) LS(DASH,2,CSTLN).
[Yes]

[No]

AC(DEPVS) LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK)

Does 'QUAPNT02'
return 'LOWACC01'?
[Yes] [No]

SY(LOWACC01)

Exit
procedure

Entry point Entry to the continuation of symbology procedure with an area

object, obstructions (OBSTRN)
QUAPNT02 Performs the symbology sub-procedure 'QUAPNT02' which returns
a flag indicating whether or not to display the LOW ACCURACY
SYMBOL and returns the selected symbol.
UDWHAZ05 result? Has the procedure 'UDWHAZ05' indicated the Isolated danger

148
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 symbol shall be shown?
AC(DEPVS) and Draw the area object with an opaque colour fill with the colour
AP(FOULAR01) 'DEPVS', and the area pattern 'FOULAR01' with the set
presentation parameters selected by 'UDWHAZ05' CSP
LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK) Draw the area boundary as a dotted line, 2 units wide, in the colour
'CHBLK' with the set presentation parameters selected by
'UDWHAZ05' CSP
SY(ISODGR01) Draw the isolated symbol 'ISODGR01' with the set presentation
parameters returned by 'UDWHAZ05' in the centre of the area.
Does 'QUAPNT02' return Is the symbol 'LOWACC01' selected by the procedure
'LOWACC01'? 'QUAPNT02'?
SY(LOWACC01) If so indicated by the procedure 'QUAPNT02', draw the returned low
accuracy symbol 'LOWACC01' in the centre of the area with the set
presentation parameters selected by 'UDWHAZ05' CSP
Exit procedure Symbolization is finished
Has value ('VALSOU')? Is the value of the attribute 'VALSOU' given?
'VALSOU' <= SAFETY Is the value of the attribute 'VALSOU' less than or equal to SAFETY
DEPTH? DEPTH?
LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK) Draw the area boundary as a dotted line, 2 units wide, in the colour
'CHBLK'.
LS(DASH,2,CHGRD) Draw the area boundary as a dashed line, 2 units wide, in the
colour 'CHGRD'.
SNDFRM04 Perform the Symbology Procedure which returns a list of sounding
(DEPTH_VALUE) symbols.
Pass 'DEPTH_VALUE' on to it.
Remember the SOUNDING SYMBOL(S)
DEPTH_VALUE Input parameter
Sounding Symbols List Output parameter
Draw Sounding Symbol(s) Draw the sounding symbol(s) returned from 'SNDFRM03' in the
centre of the area
'CATOBS' == 6? Is the value of attribute 'CATOBS' equal to '6' (foul area)?
AP(FOULAR01) Draw the area object with the area pattern 'FOULAR01'.
LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK) Draw the area boundary as a dotted line, 2 units wide, in the colour
'CHBLK' LS(DOTT, 2, CHBLK).
'WATLEV' == 1 || 'WATLEV' Is the value of attribute 'WATLEV' equal to '1' (partly submerged at
== 2? HW) or '2' (always dry)?
AC(CHBRN) Draw the area object with an opaque colour fill with the colour
'CHBRN'
LS(SOLD,2,CSTLN) Draw the area boundary as solid line, 2 units wide, in the colour
'CSTLN' LS(SOLD, 2, CSTLN).
'WATLEV' == 4? Is the value of attribute 'WATLEV' equal to '4' (covers and
uncovers)?
AC(DEPIT) Draw the area object with an opaque colour fill with the colour
'DEPIT'
LS(DASH,2,CSTLN). Draw the area boundary as a dashed line, 2 units wide, in the
colour 'CSTLN' LS(DASH, 2, CSTLN).
AC(DEPVS) Draw the area object with an opaque colour fill with the colour
'DEPVS'
LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK) Draw the area boundary as a dotted line, 2 units wide, in the colour
'CHBLK' LS(DOTT, 2, CHBLK).
Does 'QUAPNT02' return Is the symbol 'LOWACC01' selected by the procedure
'LOWACC01'? 'QUAPNT02'?
SY(LOWACC01) If so indicated by the procedure 'QUAPNT02' draw the returned low
accuracy symbol at the centre of the area.
Exit procedure Symbolization is finished

149
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.6 Conditional Symbology Procedure QUAPOS01

Applies to: S-57 Object Class "land area" (LNDARE), as point and line;
S-57 Object Class “coast line” (COALNE), line only;

Spatial Object(s): Point, Line

Attribute(s) used: Spatial attribute QUAPOS

Parameter(s): Object to be symbolized from SENC

User Parameters: Show low accuracy symbol.

Defaults: Symbolization given by the look-up table;

Display Priority given by look-up table;
OVERRADAR priority given by look-up table;
Display Category given by look-up table;
Viewing Group given by look-up table

Remarks: The attribute QUAPOS, which identifies low positional accuracy, is

attached to the spatial object, not the feature object. This procedure
passes the object to procedure QUALINnn or QUAPNTnn, which
examines the spatial attributes, and returns the appropriate
symbolization to QUAPOSnn.
Figure 15 QUAPOS01 conditional symbology procedure

act QUAPOS01 conditional symbology procedure

Is Line?
Get the Calling QUAPNT02
Obj ect [No]
Entry point
[Yes]

Does 'QUAPNT02'
return 'LOWACC01?'
QUALIN02
[Yes]

[No] SY(LOWACC01)

Exit Procedure

Entry point Entry to the symbology procedure.

Get the Calling Object Get the object which is calling this procedure.
Is Line? Is the calling object of type line?
QUALIN01 Perform the symbology sub-procedure 'QUALIN01' which
symbolizes lines based on the spatial object's attribute 'QUAPOS' ,
see “13.2.7 Conditional Symbology Procedure QUALIN0”
Calling Object - input parameter
QUAPNT02 Perform the symbology sub-procedure 'QUAPNT02' which returns a
flag indicating whether or not to display the low accuracy symbol and

150
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 returns the selected symbol 'LOWACC01', see “13.2.8 Conditional
Symbology Procedure QUAPNT02”
Calling Object - input parameter
LOWACC01 - output parameter
Does 'QUAPNT02' return Is the symbol 'LOWACC01' selected by the procedure 'QUAPNT02'?
'LOWACC01?'
SY(LOWACC01) Draw the low accuracy symbol 'LOWACC01' if so indicated by the
procedure 'QUAPNT02' at the calling object location.
Exit Procedure Symbolization is finished

151
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.7 Conditional Symbology Procedure QUALIN01

(Note that this is called as a sub-procedure by QUAPOSnn).

Applies to: S-57 Object Class land area (LNDARE) as line;

S-57 Object Class coastline (COALNE) line only.

Spatial primitive(s): Line;

Spatial operations: Separate a line into its component edges.

Attribute(s) used: Spatial attribute QUAPOS

Parameter(s): Object to be symbolised from SENC.

Defaults: Display Priority given by look-up table;

OVERRADAR priority given by look-up table;
Display Category given by look-up table;
Viewing Group given by look-up table;

Remarks: The attribute QUAPOS, which identifies low positional accuracy, is

attached only to the spatial component(s) of an object. A line object
may be composed of more than one spatial components. This
procedure looks at each of the spatial components, and symbolizes
the line according to the positional accuracy.

Figure 16 QUALIN01 conditional symbology sub-procedure

act QUALIN02 conditional symbology sub-procedure

«loop»
For each spatial component of
the obj ect
[Setup]

The Calling Obj ect

[Test]
While there is
unprocessed spatial
Entry point component return

[Body]
Symbolize spatail
components

Entry point Entry from the main conditional procedure 'QUAPOS01' with the
calling object
Loop for each spatial Loop for each spatial component of the object
component of the object Setup - The Calling Object
Test - While there is unprocessed spatial component
Body - Symbolize spatial components if it is needed.
return Return to the calling procedure 'QUAPOS01'

152
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 17 Loop for each spatial component of the object

act For each spatial component of the obj ect

Get the Spatial

Get 'QUAPOS'
Component
LOOP entry
point
Has value 'QUAPOS' != 1
('QUAPOS')? && 10 && 11? Symbolize line segment
[Yes] [Yes] LC(LOWACC21)

[No]

[No]

continue
Is Calling Object
COALNE?
Symbolize line segment
[No] LS(SOLD, 1, CSTLN)

[Yes]

Must be LNDARE

Get 'CONRAD'

Has value
'CONRAD' == 1? ('CONRAD')?
Symbolize line segment
[Yes] [Yes] [No] LS(SOLD, 1, CSTLN)

[No]

Symbolize line segment

LS(SOLD, 1, CSTLN)

Symbolize line segment

LS(SOLD, 3, CHMGF),
LS(SOLD, 1, CSTLN)

continue

LOOP entry point For each spatial component of this object, perform this loop.
Get the Spatial Component Get the next spatial component (edge) of the calling object.
Get 'QUAPOS' Get the value of the attribute 'Quality of position' (QUAPOS) of the
current spatial component
Has value ('QUAPOS')? Is the value of the attribute 'QUAPOS' given?
'QUAPOS' != 1 && 10 && Does the value of attribute 'QUAPOS' equal to neither of the
11? following values: '1', '10', and '11'?
Symbolize line segment Symbolize the line segment (edge) with the pattern line 'LOWACC21'
LC(LOWACC21)
continue go to the next spatial component of the calling object
Is Calling Object COALNE? Is the calling objects of class COALNE?

153
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Symbolize line segment Symbolize the line segment (edge) with a solid line, 1 unit wide,
LS(SOLD, 1, CSTLN) colour 'CSTLN'
Get 'CONRAD' Get the value of the attribute 'Conspicuous, radar' (CONRAD) of the
calling object
Has value ('CONRAD')? Is the value of the attribute 'CONRAD' given?
Symbolize line segment Symbolize the line segment (edge) with a solid line, 1 unit wide,
LS(SOLD, 1, CSTLN) colour 'CSTLN'
'CONRAD' == 1? Does the value of the attribute 'CONRAD' equal to '1' (radar consp.)?
Symbolize line segment Symbolize the line segment (edge) with a solid line, 1 unit wide,
LS(SOLD, 1, CSTLN) colour 'CSTLN'
Symbolize line segment Symbolize the line segment (edge) with a solid line, 3 units wide,
LS(SOLD, 3, CHMGF), colour 'CHMGF' and symbolize the same line segment (edge) with a
LS(SOLD, 1, CSTLN) solid line, 1 unit wide, colour 'CSTLN'
continue go to the next spatial component of the calling object

154
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.8 Conditional Symbology Procedure QUAPNT02

Quality of position of point and area objects (S-57) Conditional Symbology Procedure for
additional symbology for point and area objects when positional accuracy is low. (Note that
this is called as a sub-procedure by OBSTRNnn, QUAPOSnn, SLCONSnn, WRECKSnn).

Applies to: S-57 Object Class "Land area" (LNDARE) as point;

S-57 Object Class "Obstruction" (OBSTRN) as point and area;
S-57 Object Class "Shoreline construction" (SLCONS) as point;
S-57 Object Class "Wrecks" (WRECKS) as point and area.
S-57 Object Class "Under water rock" (UWTROC) as point.

Spatial Object(s): Point, Area.

Attribute(s) used: Spatial attribute QUAPOS

Parameter(s): Object to be symbolized from SENC.

User Parameters: View low accuracy symbols.

Defaults: Symbolization given by the look-up table:

Display Priority given by look-up table;
OVERRADAR priority given by look-up table;
Display Category given by look-up table;
Viewing Group given by look-up table

Remarks: The attribute QUAPOS, which identifies low positional accuracy, is

attached only to the spatial component(s) of an object.

This procedure checks whether the mariner has requested that the
symbol SY(LOWACC01) is to be shown; retrieves any QUAPOS
attributes; and returns the appropriate symbols to the calling
procedure.

155
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 18 QUAPNT02 conditional symbology sub-procedure

act QUAPNT02 conditional symbology sub-procedure

Entry point Show Low Accuracy
Get the Calling symbols?
ACCURATE=TRUE
Obj ect [No]
return
[Yes]
Please note that this
procedure is called by
other procedures.
«loop»
For each spatial component
[Setup]
The Calling Obj ect
Return to the calling
procedure with the
[Test] message that the low
While there is
unprocessed spatial accuracy symbol is not
component required!

[Body]
Set v alue of
ACCURATE

ACCURATE == FALSE?
[No]
return
[Yes]

Return to the calling

procedure with the
message that the low
accuracy symbol is to SELECT = 'LOWACC01'
be shown, also return return
the selected symbol
'LOWACC01'

Entry point Entry from the calling conditional procedure.

Get the Calling Object Get the object which is calling this procedure.
ACCURATE=TRUE Set local variable 'ACCURATE' equal to true.
Show Low Accuracy Has the mariner chosen to view the low accuracy symbols
symbols? (LOWACC01) (i.e. viewing group equals 31011)?
return If ‘No’, return to the calling procedure with the message that the low
accuracy symbol is not required!
Loop for each spatial For each spatial component of the object perform this loop
component
ACCURATE == FALSE? Is the local variable 'ACCURATE' set to 'FALSE?
return If ‘No’, return to the calling procedure with the message that the low
accuracy symbol is not required.
SELECT = 'LOWACC01' Select the 'Low Accuracy' symbol 'LOWACC01' Return to the calling
procedure.
return Return to the calling procedure with the message that the low
accuracy symbol is to be shown, also return the selected symbol
‘LOWACC01’.

156
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 19 Loop for each spatial component

act For each spatial component

Loop entry
point Has value
Get the Spatial ('QUAPOS')?
Get
Component 'QUAPOS' [No]
continue
[Yes]

For each spatial 'QUAPOS' == 2 || 3 ||

component of the object, 4 || 5 || 6 || 7 || 8 || 9?
perform this loop: [No]
continue
[Yes]

ACCURATE=FALSE

break

Loop entry point For each spatial component of the object, perform this loop:
Get the Spatial Component Get the next spatial component of the calling object.
Get 'QUAPOS' Get the value of the attribute 'Quality of position' (QUAPOS) of the
current spatial component
Has value ('QUAPOS')? Is the value of the attribute 'QUAPOS' given?
continue If ‘No’, go to the next spatial component of the calling object.
'QUAPOS' == 2 || 3 || 4 || 5 || Does the value of the attribute 'QUAPOS' equal to one of the
6 || 7 || 8 || 9? following values: '2', '3', '4', '5', '6', '7', '8' or '9'?
continue If ‘No’, go to the next spatial component of the calling object.
ACCURATE=FALSE Set local variable 'ACCURATE'='FALSE'.
break Loop by spatial components

157
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.9 Conditional Symbology Procedure RESARE04

Applies to: S-57 objects of class Restricted Area (RESARE)

Spatial Object(s): Area

Attribute(s) used: CATREA, RESTRN (List-type)

User Parameters: “Symbolized Area Boundaries”.

Defaults: Display priority given by look-up table;

OVERRADAR priority given by look-up table;
Display category given by look-up table;
Viewing group given by look-up table.

Remarks: A list-type attribute is used because an area of the object class

RESARE may have more than one category attribute (CATREA). For
example an inshore traffic zone might also have fishing and anchoring
prohibition and a prohibited area might also be a bird sanctuary or a
mine field.
This conditional procedure is set up to ensure that the categories of
most importance to safe navigation are prominently symbolized, and to
pass on all given information with minimum clutter. Only the most
significant restriction is symbolized, and an indication of further
limitations is given by a subscript "!" or "i". Further details are given
under conditional symbology procedure RESTRNnn.
Other object classes with attribute RESTRN are handled by conditional
symbology procedure RESTRNnn.

158
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 20 RESARE04 conditional symbology procedure

act RESARE04 conditional symbology procedure

Has value
('RESTRN')?
Get the Calling Get 'RESTRN'; Continuation E
Obj ect Get 'CATREA' [No]
Entry point
[Yes]

Does 'RESTRN' Does 'RESTRN'

Continuation B include 1 || 2? include 7 || 8 || 14? Continuation A
[Yes] [No] [Yes]

[No]
Does 'RESTRN' include
Does 'RESTRN' include 13 || 16 || 17 || 23 || 25 ||
Continuation C 3 || 4 || 5 || 6 || 24? 26 || 27? Continuation D
[Yes] [No] [Yes]

[No]

Doea 'RESTRN' include

9 || 10 || 11 || 12 || 15 ||
18 || 19 || 20 || 21 || 22?
SY(INFARE51) SY(RSRDEF51)
[Yes] [No]

Symbolized area
boundaries?
LC(CTYARE51) LS(DASH,2,CHMGD)
[Yes] [No]

Exit Procedure

Entry point Entry to the symbology procedure.

Get the Calling Object Get the object which is calling this procedure.
Get 'RESTRN'; Get Get the values of the attributes 'Restriction' (RESTRN) and
'CATREA' 'Category of restricted area' (CATREA) from the calling object
Has value ('RESTRN')? Is the value of the attribute 'RESTRN' given?
Continuation E If ‘No’, RESARE04 Continuation E. See Figure
Does 'RESTRN' include 7 || Does the value of the attribute 'RESTRN' include '7' (entry
8 || 14? prohibited) and/or '8' (entry restricted) and/or '14' (area to be
avoided)?
Continuation A RESARE04 Continuation A
Does 'RESTRN' include 1 || Does the value of the attribute 'RESTRN' include '1' (anchoring
2? prohibited) and/or '2' (anchoring restricted)?
Continuation B RESARE04 Continuation B

159
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Does 'RESTRN' include 3 || Does the value of the attribute 'RESTRN' include '3' (fishing
4 || 5 || 6 || 24? prohibited) and/or '4' (fishing restricted) and/or '5' (trawling
prohibited) and/or 6 (trawling restricted) and/or '24' (dragging
prohibited)?
Continuation C RESARE04 Continuation C
Does 'RESTRN' include 13 || Does the value of 'RESTRN' include '13' (no wake area) and/or '16'
16 || 17 || 23 || 25 || 26 || 27? (discharging prohibited) and/or '17' (discharging restricted) and/or
'23' (lightering prohibited) and/or '25' (stopping prohibited) and/or '26'
(landing prohibited) and/or '27' (speed restricted)?
Continuation D RESARE04 Continuation D
Does 'RESTRN' include 9 || Does the value of the attribute 'RESTRN' include '9' (dredging
10 || 11 || 12 || 15 || 18 || 19 || prohibited) and/or '10' (dredging restricted) and/or '11' (diving
20 || 21 || 22? prohibited) and/or '12' (diving restricted) and/or '15' (construction
prohibited) and/or '18' (development prohibited) and/or '19'
(development restricted) and/or '20' (drilling prohibited) and/or '21'
(drilling restricted) and/or '22' (removing artifacts prohibited)?
SY(INFARE51) Draw the symbol 'INFARE51' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
SY(RSRDEF51) Draw the symbol 'RSRDEF51' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
Symbolized area Has the mariner selected symbolized area boundaries?
boundaries?
LC(CTYARE51) Symbolize area boundary with the line pattern 'CTYARE51'.
LS(DASH,2,CHMGD) Symbolize area boundary with the dash line with width 2 and colour
'CHMGD'.
Exit Procedure Symbolization is finished.

160
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 21 RESARE04 Continuation A. Entry restricted or prohibited

act RESARE04 Continuation A

Entry point Entry restricted or prohibited

Does 'RESTRN' include 1 || 2 || 3 || 4 || 5 || 6 ||

13 || 16 || 17 || 23 || 24 || 25 || 26 || 27?
DisplayPriority=6 SY(ENTRES61)
[Yes]

[No] Has value ('CATREA') &&

Does 'CATREA' include 1 ||
8 || 9 || 12 || 14 || 18 || 19 ||
21 || 24 || 25 || 26?
SY(ENTRES61)
[Yes]

[No]

Does 'RESTRN' include 9 || 10 || 11

|| 12 || 15 || 18 || 19 || 20 || 21 || 22?
SY(ENTRES71)
[Yes]
[No]
Has value ('CATREA') &&
Does 'CATREA' include 4 || 5
|| 6 || 7 || 10 || 20 || 22 || 23?
SY(ENTRES71)
[Yes]

[No]

SY(ENTRES51)

Symbolized area
boundaries?

[Yes]

[No]

LC(ENTRES51) LS(DASH,2,CHMGD)

Exit Procedure

Entry point The checking of 'Entry Restricted or Prohibited'

DisplayPriority=6 Set 'Display Priority' parameter equal to '6' for the follow-up
symbolization.
Does 'RESTRN' include 1 || Does the value of the attribute 'RESTRN' include '1' (anchoring
2 || 3 || 4 || 5 || 6 || 13 || 16 || prohibited) and/or '2' (anchoring restricted) and/or '3' (fishing
17 || 23 || 24 || 25 || 26 || 27? prohibited) and/or '4' (fishing restricted) and/or '5' (trawling prohibited)
and/or '6' (trawling restricted) and/or '13' (no wake area) and/or '16'
(discharging prohibited) and/or '17' (discharging restricted) and/or '23'
(lightering prohibited) and/or '24' (dragging prohibited) and/or '25'
(stopping prohibited) and/or '26' (landing prohibited) and/or '27'
(speed restricted)?

161
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
SY(ENTRES61) Draw the symbol 'ENTRES61' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
Has value ('CATREA') && Is the value of the attribute 'CATREA' given and does it include '1'
Does 'CATREA' include 1 || (offshore safety zone) and/or '8' (degaussing area) and/or '9' (military
8 || 9 || 12 || 14 || 18 || 19 || 21 area) and/or '12' (navigation aid safety zone) and/or '14' (minefield)
|| 24 || 25 || 26? and/or '18' (swimming area) and/or '19' (waiting area) and/or '21'
(dredging area) and/or '24' (no wake area) and/or '25' (swinging area)
and/or '26' (water skiing area)?
SY(ENTRES61) Draw the symbol 'ENTRES61' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
Does 'RESTRN' include 9 || Does the value of the attribute 'RESTRN' include '9' (dredging
10 || 11 || 12 || 15 || 18 || 19 || prohibited) and/or '10' (dredging restricted) and/or '11' (diving
20 || 21 || 22? prohibited) and/or '12' (diving restricted) and/or '15' (construction
prohibited) and/or '18' (development prohibited) and/or '19'
(development restricted) and/or '20' (drilling prohibited) and/or '21'
(drilling restricted) and/or '22' (removing artefacts prohibited)?
SY(ENTRES71) Draw the symbol 'ENTRES71' in the center of the visible part of the
calling object area.
Has value ('CATREA') && Is the value of the attribute 'CATREA' given and does it include '4'
Does 'CATREA' include 4 || (nature reserve) and/or '5' (bird sanctuary) and/or '6' (game preserve)
5 || 6 || 7 || 10 || 20 || 22 || 23? and/or '7' (seal sanctuary) and/or '10' (historic wreck) and/or '20'
(research area) and/or '22' (fish sanctuary) and/or '23' (ecological
reserve)?
SY(ENTRES71) Draw the symbol 'ENTRES71' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
SY(ENTRES51) Draw the symbol 'ENTRES51' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
Symbolized area Has mariner selected Symbolized Area Boundaries?
boundaries?
LC(ENTRES51) Symbolize area boundary with the pattern line 'ENTRES51'
LS(DASH,2,CHMGD) Symbolize area boundary with the dash line with the width '2' and
colour 'CHMGD'.
Exit Procedure Symbolization is finished. Exit from procedure.

162
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 22 RESARE04 Continuation BAnchoring restricted or prohibited.

act RESARE04 Continuation B

Entry point Anchoring restricted or prohibited.

Does 'RESTRN' include 3 || 4 || 5 || 6 ||

13 || 16 || 17 || 23 || 24 || 25 || 26 || 27?
DisplayPriority=6 SY(ACHRES61)
[Yes]

[No] Has value ('CATREA') &&

Does 'CATREA' include 1 ||
8 || 9 || 12 || 14 || 18 || 19 ||
21 || 24 || 25 || 26?
SY(ACHRES61)
[Yes]

[No]

Does 'RESTRN' include 9 || 10 || 11 ||

12 || 15 || 18 || 19 || 20 || 21 || 22?
SY(ACHRES71)
[Yes]
[No]
Has value ('CATREA') &&
Does 'CATREA' include 4 || 5
|| 6 || 7 || 10 || 20 || 22 || 23?
SY(ACHRES71)
[Yes]
[No]

SY(ACHRES51)

Symbolized area
boundaries?
[Yes]
[No]

LC(ACHRES51) LS(DASH,2,CHMGD)

Exit Procedure

Entry point The checking of 'Anchoring Restricted or Prohibited'.

DisplayPriority=6 Set display priority equal to 6 for the follow-up symbolization.
Does 'RESTRN' include 3 || Does the value of the attribute 'RESTRN' include '3' (fishing
4 || 5 || 6 || 13 || 16 || 17 || 23 prohibited) and/or '4' (fishing restricted) and/or '5' (trawling prohibited)
|| 24 || 25 || 26 || 27? and/or '6' (trawling restricted) and/or '13' (no wake area) and/or '16'
(discharging prohibited) and/or '17' (discharging restricted) and/or '23'
(lightering prohibited) and/or '24' (dragging prohibited) and/or '25' (
stopping prohibited) and/or '26' (landing prohibited) and/or '27'
(speed restricted)?
SY(ACHRES61) Draw the symbol 'ACHRES61' in the centre of the visible part of the

163
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 calling object area.
Has value ('CATREA') && Is the value of the attribute 'CATREA' given and does it include '1'
Does 'CATREA' include 1 || (offshore safety zone) and/or '8' (degaussing area) and/or '9' (military
8 || 9 || 12 || 14 || 18 || 19 || 21 area) and/or '12' (navigation aid safety zone) and/or '14' (minefield)
|| 24 || 25 || 26? and/or '18' (swimming area) and/or '19' (waiting area) and/or '21'
(dredging area) and/or '24' (no wake area) and/or '25' (swinging area)
and/or '26' (water skiing area)?
SY(ACHRES61) Draw the symbol 'ACHRES61' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
Does 'RESTRN' include 9 || Does the value of the attribute 'RESTRN' include '9' (dredging
10 || 11 || 12 || 15 || 18 || 19 || prohibited) and/or '10' (dredging restricted) and/or '11' (diving
20 || 21 || 22? prohibited) and/or '12' (diving restricted) and/or '15' (construction
prohibited) and/or '18' (development prohibited) and/or '19'
(development restricted) and/or '20' (drilling prohibited) and/or '21'
(drilling restricted) and/or '22' (removing artefacts prohibited)?
SY(ACHRES71) Draw the symbol 'ACHRES71' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
Has value ('CATREA') && Is the value of the attribute 'CATREA' given and does it include '4'
Does 'CATREA' include 4 || (nature reserve) and/or '5' (bird sanctuary) and/or '6' (game preserve)
5 || 6 || 7 || 10 || 20 || 22 || 23? and/or '7' (seal sanctuary) and/or '10' (historic wreck) and/or '20'
(research area) and/or '22' (fish sanctuary) and/or '23' (ecological
reserve)?
SY(ACHRES71) Draw the symbol 'ACHRES71' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
SY(ACHRES51) Draw the symbol 'ACHRES51' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
Symbolized area Has mariner selected Symbolized Area Boundaries?
boundaries?
LC(ACHRES51) Symbolize area boundary with the pattern line 'ACHRES51'
LS(DASH,2,CHMGD) Symbolize area boundary with the dash line with the width '2' and the
colour 'CHMGD'.
Exit Procedure Symbolization is finished. Exit from procedure.

164
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 23 RESARE04 Continuation CFishing restricted or prohibited

act RESARE04 Continuation C

Entry point Fishing restricted or prohibited

Does 'RESTRN' include 13 || 16

|| 17 || 23 || 24 || 25 || 26 || 27?
DisplayPriority=6 SY(FSHRES61)
[Yes]

[No] Has value ('CATREA') &&

Does 'CATREA' include 1 || 8
|| 9 || 12 || 14 || 18 || 19 || 21
|| 24 || 25 || 26?
SY(FSHRES61)
[Yes]

[No]
Does 'RESTRN' include 9 || 10 || 11
|| 12 || 15 || 18 || 19 || 20 || 21 || 22?
SY(FSHRES71)
[Yes]
[No]
Has value ('CATREA') &&
Does 'CATREA' include 4 || 5
|| 6 || 7 || 10 || 20 || 22 || 23?
SY(FSHRES71)
[Yes]
[No]

SY(FSHRES51)

Symbolized area
boundaries?

[Yes]
[No]

LC(FSHRES51) LS(DASH,2,CHMGD)

Exit Procedure

Entry point The checking of Fishing restricted or prohibited

DisplayPriority=6 Set display priority equal to 6 for the follow-up symbolization.
Does 'RESTRN' include 13 || Does the value of the attribute 'RESTRN' include '13' (no wake area)
16 || 17 || 23 || 24 || 25 || 26 || and/or '16' (discharging prohibited) and/or '17' (discharging restricted)
27? and/or '23' (lightering prohibited) and/or '24' (dragging prohibited)
and/or '25' (stopping prohibited) and/or '26' (landing prohibited)
and/or '27' (speed restricted)?
SY(FSHRES61) Draw the symbol 'FSHRES61' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.

165
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Has value ('CATREA') && Is the value of the attribute 'CATREA' given and does it include '1'
Does 'CATREA' include 1 || (offshore safety zone) and/or '8' (degaussing area) and/or '9' (military
8 || 9 || 12 || 14 || 18 || 19 || 21 area) and/or '12' (navigation aid safety zone) and/or '14' (minefield)
|| 24 || 25 || 26? and/or '18' (swimming area) and/or '19' (waiting area) and/or '21'
(dredging area) and/or '24' (no wake area) and/or '25' (swinging area)
and/or '26' (water skiing area)?
SY(FSHRES61) Draw the symbol 'FSHRES61' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
Does 'RESTRN' include 9 || Does the value of the attribute 'RESTRN' include '9' (dredging
10 || 11 || 12 || 15 || 18 || 19 || prohibited) and/or '10' (dredging restricted) and/or '11' (diving
20 || 21 || 22? prohibited) and/or '12' (diving restricted) and/or '15' (construction
prohibited) and/or '18' (development prohibited) and/or '19'
(development restricted) and/or '20' (drilling prohibited) and/or '21'
(drilling restricted) and/or '22' (removing artefacts prohibited)?
SY(FSHRES71) Draw the symbol 'FSHRES71' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
Has value ('CATREA') && Is the value of the attribute 'CATREA' given and does it include '4'
Does 'CATREA' include 4 || (nature reserve) and/or '5' (bird sanctuary) and/or '6' (game preserve)
5 || 6 || 7 || 10 || 20 || 22 || 23? and/or '7' (seal sanctuary) and/or '10' (historic wreck) and/or '20'
(research area) and/or '22' (fish sanctuary) and/or '23' (ecological
reserve)?
SY(FSHRES71) Draw the symbol 'FSHRES71' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
SY(FSHRES51) Draw the symbol 'FSHRES51' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
Symbolized area Has mariner selected Symbolized Area Boundaries?
boundaries?
LC(FSHRES51) Symbolize area boundary with the pattern line 'FSHRES51'
LS(DASH,2,CHMGD) Symbolize area boundary with the dash line with the width '2' and the
colour 'CHMGD'.
Exit Procedure Symbolization is finished. Exit from procedure.

166
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 24 RESARE04 Continuation DOwn ship restrictions

act RESARE04 Continuation D

Entry point Own ship restrictions

Does 'RESTRN' include 9 || 10 || 11 ||

12 || 15 || 18 || 19 || 20 || 21 || 22?
DisplayPriority=6 SY(CTYARE71)
[Yes]

[No]
Has value ('CATREA') &&
Does 'CATREA' include 4 || 5
|| 6 || 7 || 10 || 20 || 22 || 23?
SY(CTYARE71)
[Yes]

[No]

SY(CTYARE51)

Symbolized area
boundaries?

[Yes]

[No]

LC(CTYARE51) LS(DASH,2,CHMGD)

Exit Procedure

Entry point The checking of 'Own ship restrictions'

DisplayPriority=6 Set display priority equal to 6 for the follow-up symbolization.
Does 'RESTRN' include 9 || Does the value of the attribute 'RESTRN' include '9' (dredging
10 || 11 || 12 || 15 || 18 || 19 || prohibited) and/or '10' (dredging restricted) and/or '11' (diving
20 || 21 || 22? prohibited) and/or '12' (diving restricted) and/or '15' (construction
prohibited) and/or '18' (development prohibited) and/or '19'
(development restricted) and/or '20' (drilling prohibited) and/or '21'
(drilling restricted) and/or '22' (removing artefacts prohibited)?
SY(CTYARE71) Draw the symbol 'CTYARE71' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
Has value ('CATREA') && Is the value of the attribute 'CATREA' given and does it include '4'
Does 'CATREA' include 4 || (nature reserve) and/or '5' (bird sanctuary) and/or '6' (game preserve)
5 || 6 || 7 || 10 || 20 || 22 || 23? and/or '7' (seal sanctuary) and/or '10' (historic wreck) and/or '20'
(research area) and/or '22' (fish sanctuary) and/or '23' (ecological
reserve)?
SY(CTYARE71) Draw the symbol 'CTYARE71' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
SY(CTYARE51) Draw the symbol 'CTYARE51' in the centre of the visible part of the

167
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 calling object area.
Symbolized area Has mariner selected Symbolized Area Boundaries?
boundaries?
LC(CTYARE51) Symbolize area boundary with the pattern line 'CTYARE51'
LS(DASH,2,CHMGD) Symbolize area boundary with the dash line with the width '2' and the
colour 'CHMGD'.
Exit Procedure Symbolization is finished. Exit from procedure.

Figure 25RESARE04 Continuation ENo 'RESTRN' applies

act RESARE04 Continuation E

Entry point No 'RESTRN' applies

Does 'CATREA' include 1 ||

Has value 8 || 9 || 12 || 14 || 18 || 19 || Does 'CATREA' include 4 || 5
('CATREA')? 21 || 24 || 25 || 26? || 6 || 7 || 10 || 20 || 22 || 23?
SY(CTYARE71)
[Yes] [Yes] [Yes]

[No]

[No] SY(CTYARE51)

Does 'CATREA' include 4 || 5

[No]
|| 6 || 7 || 10 || 20 || 22 || 23?
SY(INFARE51)
[Yes]

[No]

SY(RSRDEF51)

SY(RSRDEF51)

Symbolized area
boundaries?

[Yes]

[No]

LC(CTYARE51) LS(DASH,2,CHMGD)

Exit Procedure

Entry point The checking 'No RESTRN applies'

Has value ('CATREA')? Is the value of the attribute 'CATREA' given?
SY(RSRDEF51) If ‘No', draw the symbol 'RSRDEF51' in the centre of the visible part

168
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 of the calling object area.
Does 'CATREA' include 1 || Is the value of the attribute 'CATREA' given and does it include '1'
8 || 9 || 12 || 14 || 18 || 19 || 21 (offshore safety zone) and/or '8' (degaussing area) and/or '9' (military
|| 24 || 25 || 26? area) and/or '12' (navigation aid safety zone) and/or '14' (minefield)
and/or '18' (swimming area) and/or '19' (waiting area) and/or '21'
(dredging area) and/or '24' (no wake area) and/or '25' (swinging area)
and/or '26' (water skiing area)?
Does 'CATREA' include 4 || Does the value of the attribute 'CATREA' include '4' (nature area)
5 || 6 || 7 || 10 || 20 || 22 || 23? and/or '5' (bird sanctuary) and/or '6' (game preserve) and/or '7' (seal
sanctuary) and/or '10' (historic wreck) and/or '20' (research area)
and/or '22' (fish sanctuary) and/or '23' (ecological reserve)?
SY(CTYARE71) Draw the symbol 'CTYARE71' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
SY(CTYARE51) Draw the symbol 'CTYARE51' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
Does 'CATREA' include 4 || Does the value of the attribute 'CATREA' include '4' (nature area)
5 || 6 || 7 || 10 || 20 || 22 || 23? and/or '5' (bird sanctuary) and/or '6' (game preserve) and/or '7' (seal
sanctuary) and/or '10' (historic wreck) and/or '20' (research area)
and/or '22' (fish sanctuary) and/or '23' (ecological reserve)?
SY(INFARE51) Draw the symbol 'INFARE51' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
SY(RSRDEF51) An unrecognized value of 'CATREA" was given. Draw the symbol
'RSRDEF51' in the centre of the visible part of the calling object area.
Symbolized area Has mariner selected Symbolized Area Boundaries?
boundaries?
LC(CTYARE51) Symbolize area boundary with the pattern line 'CTYARE51'
LS(DASH,2,CHMGD) Symbolize area boundary with the dash line with the width '2' and the
colour 'CHMGD'.
Exit Procedure Symbolization is finished. Exit from procedure.

169
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.10 Conditional Symbology Procedure RESTRN01

Applies to: The following S-57 Object Class objects, but only when they carry
the attribute RESTRN:
TSSLPT, TSSRON, TSSCRS, DWRTPT, PRCARE,
ISTZNE;FAIRWAY, DRGARE, ACHARE; CBLARE, PIPARE,
DMPGRD, MARCUL; OSPARE, SUBTLN, SPLARE, MIPARE,
ICNARE; TESARE.

Spatial Object(s): Area

Attribute(s) used: RESTRN (passed on to sub procedure RESCSPnn)

User Parameter(s): Symbolize Area Boundaries (used by sub procedure RESCSPnn)

Defaults: Display Priority given by look-up table; OVERRADAR priority given

by look-up table; Display Category given by look-up table; Viewing
Group given by look-up table.

Remarks: Objects subject to RESTRNnn are actually symbolised in sub-

process RESCSPnn, since the latter is also be accessed from other
conditional symbology procedures. RESTRNnn merely acts as a
“signpost” for RESCSPnn.
Object class RESARE is symbolised for the effect of attribute
RESTRN in a separate conditional symbology procedure called
RESAREnn.
Since many of the areas concerned cover shipping channels, the
number of symbols used is minimised to reduce clutter. To do this,
values of RESTRN are ranked for significance as follows:
“Traffic Restriction” values of RESTRN:
1. RESTRN 7,8: entry prohibited or restricted
2. RESTRN 14: IMO designated «area to be avoided» part of
a TSS
3. RESTRN 1,2: anchoring prohibited or restricted
4. RESTRN 3,4,5,6: fishing or trawling prohibited or restricted
5. “Other Restriction” values of RESTRN are:
 RESTRN 9,10: dredging prohibited or restricted,
 RESTRN 11, 12: diving prohibited or restricted,
 RESTRN 13: no wake area.

Note: Unlike all other originators of conditional symbology procedures,

RESTRN is an attribute, not an object class. It is therefore not
possible to provide viewing groups for the restrictions it imposes
without creating undesirable complications in the procedure.

170
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 26 RESTRN01 conditional symbology procedure

act RESTRN02 conditional symbology procedure

Has value ('RESTRN')?

Get the Calling
Get 'RESTRN'
Obj ect [No]
Entry point

[Yes]

The following S-57 Object Class objects, but only when

they carry the attribute RESTRN:
TSSLPT, TSSRON, TSSCRS, DWRTPT, PRCARE,
ISTZNE; FAIRWAY, DRGARE, ACHARE; CBLARE, RESCSP02
PIPARE, DMPGRD, MARCUL; OSPARE, SUBTLN,
(RESTRN)
SPLARE, MIPARE, ICNARE;TESARE.

Objects subject to RESTRNnn are actually symbolised in

sub-process RESCSPnn, since the latter can also be
accessed from other conditional symbology procedures.
RESTRNnn merely acts as a «signpost» for RESCSPnn.
Exit Procedure

Entry point Entry to the symbology procedure.

Get the Calling Object Get the object which is calling this procedure
Get 'RESTRN' Get the values of the attributes 'Restriction' (RESTRN) from the
calling object
Has value ('RESTRN')? Is the value of the attribute 'RESTRN' given?
RESCSP02 (RESTRN) Perform the sub-procedure to draw symbology of restrictions in the
area object, see “ 13.2.11 Conditional Symbology Procedure
RESCSP02”
RESTRN Input parameter – value of RESTRN attribute of the calling object
Exit Procedure Symbolization is finished.

171
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.11 Conditional Symbology Procedure RESCSP02

Note that this is called as a sub-procedure by DEPAREnn and RESTRNnn

Applies to: Applies to the following S-57 Object Classes, but only when they carry
the attribute RESTRN: TSSLPT, TSSRON, TSSCRS, DWRTPT,
PRCARE, ISTZNE; FAIRWAY, DRGARE, ACHARE; CBLARE,
PIPARE, DMPGRD, MARCUL; OSPARE, SUBTLN, SPLARE,
MIPARE, ICNARE; TESARE;
Spatial Object(s): Area

Parameter(s): Object to be symbolised from ENC.

Attribute(s) used: The attribute 'RESTRN' value is passed on to this procedure by the
calling procedure.

Defaults: Symbolization given by the look-up table;

Display Priority given by look-up table;
OVERRADAR priority given by look-up table;
Display Category given by look-up table;
Viewing Group given by look-up table.

Remarks: See procedure RESTRNnn

172
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 27 RESCSP02 (RESTRN) conditional symbology sub-procedure

act RESCSP03 (RESTRN) conditional symbology sub-procedure

Entry point

Does 'RESTRN' include 1 || 2 || Does 'RESTRN' include 9 ||

Does 'RESTRN' 3 || 4 || 5 || 6 || 13 || 16 || 17 || 10 || 11 || 12 || 15 || 18 || 19
include 7 || 8 || 14? 23 || 24 || 25 || 26 || 27? || 20 || 21 || 22?

[Yes] [No] [No]

[Yes] [Yes]
Entry restricted
or prohibited
SY(ENTRES61) SY(ENTRES71) SY(ENTRES51)

[No]

return

Does 'RESTRN' include 3 || 4 || Does 'RESTRN' include 9 ||

Does 'RESTRN' 5 || 6 || 13 || 16 || 17 || 23 || 24 10 || 11 || 12 || 15 || 18 || 19
include 1 || 2? || 25 || 26 || 27? || 20 || 21 || 22 ?

[Yes] [No] [No]

[Yes]
[Yes]
Anchoring restricted
or prohibited.
SY(ACHRES61) SY(ACHRES71) SY(ACHRES51)

[No]

return

Does 'RESTRN' include 9 ||

Does 'RESTRN' include Does 'RESTRN' include 13 || 10 || 11 || 12 || 15 || 18 || 19
3 || 4 || 5 || 6 || 24? 16 || 17 || 23 || 25 || 26 || 27? || 20 || 21 || 22?

[Yes] [No] [No]

[Yes] [Yes]
Fishing restricted
or prohibited
SY(FSHRES61) SY(FSHRES71) SY(FSHRES51)
[No]

return

Does 'RESTRN' include 13 || Does 'RESTRN' include 9 || 10 || 11

16 || 17 || 23 || 25 || 26 || 27? || 12 || 15 || 18 || 19 || 20 || 21 || 22?
SY(CTYARE51)
[Yes] [No]
[Yes]

Own ship restrictions.

[No] SY(CTYARE71) return

Does 'RESTRN' include 9 || 10 || 11 ||

12 || 15 || 18 || 19 || 20 || 21 || 22?
SY(RSRDEF51)
[No]
[Yes]

SY(INFARE51)
return

173
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Entry point For all objects having the attribute 'RESTRN'.
The attribute 'RESTRN' value is passed on to this procedure by the
calling procedure.
Does 'RESTRN' include 7 || Does the value of the attribute RESTRN include
8 || 14? '7' (entry prohibited) ADN/OR
'8' (entry restricted) AND/OR
'14' (area to be avoided)?
Does 'RESTRN' include 1 || Does the value of the attribute RESTRN include
2 || 3 || 4 || 5 || 6 || 13 || 16 || '1' (anchoring prohibited) AND/OR
17 || 23 || 24 || 25 || 26 || 27? '2' (anchoring restricted) AND/OR
'3' (fishing prohibited) AND/OR
'4' (fishing restricted) AND/OR
'5' (trawling prohibited) AND/OR
'6' (trawling restricted) AND/OR
'13' (no wake area) AND/OR
'16' (discharging prohibited) AND/OR
'17' (discharging restricted) AND/OR
'23' (lightering prohibited) AND/OR
'25' (stopping prohibited) AND/OR
'24' (dragging prohibited) AND/OR
'26' (landing prohibited) AND/OR
'27' (speed restricted)?
SY(ENTRES61) Draw the symbol 'ENTRES61' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
Does 'RESTRN' include 9 || Does the value of the attribute RESTRN include
10 || 11 || 12 || 15 || 18 || 19 || '9' (dredging prohibited) AND/OR
20 || 21 || 22? '10' (dredging restricted) AND/OR
'11' (diving prohibited) AND/OR
'12' (diving restricted) AND/OR
'15' (construction prohibited) AND/OR
'18' (development prohibited) AND/OR
'19' (development restricted) AND/OR
'20' (drilling prohibited) AND/OR
'21' (drilling restricted) AND/OR
'22' (removing artifacts prohibited)?
SY(ENTRES71) Draw the symbol 'ENTRES71' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
SY(ENTRES51) Draw the symbol 'ENTRES51' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
return to the calling procedure
Does 'RESTRN' include 1 || Does the value of the attribute RESTRN include
2? '1' (anchoring prohibited) ADN/OR
'2' (anchoring restricted) ?
Does 'RESTRN' include 3 || Does the value of the attribute RESTRN include
4 || 5 || 6 || 13 || 16 || 17 || 23 '3' (fishing prohibited) AND/OR
|| 24 || 25 || 26 || 27? '4' (fishing restricted) AND/OR
'5' (trawling prohibited) AND/OR
'6' (trawling restricted) AND/OR
'13' (no wake area) AND/OR
'16' (discharging prohibited) AND/OR
'17' (discharging restricted) AND/OR
'23' (lightering prohibited) AND/OR
'24' (dragging prohibited) AND/OR
'25' (stopping prohibited) AND/OR
'26' (landing prohibited) AND/OR
'27' (speed restricted)?
SY(ACHRES61) Draw the symbol 'ACHRES61' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
Does 'RESTRN' include 9 || Does the value of the attribute RESTRN include
10 || 11 || 12 || 15 || 18 || 19 || '9' (dredging prohibited) AND/OR

174
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
20 || 21 || 22 ? '10' (dredging restricted) AND/OR
'11' (diving prohibited) AND/OR
'12' (diving restricted) AND/OR
'15' (construction prohibited) AND/OR
'18' (development prohibited) AND/OR
'19' (development restricted) AND/OR
'20' (drilling prohibited) AND/OR
'21' (drilling restricted) AND/OR
'22' (removing artifacts prohibited)?
SY(ACHRES71) Draw the symbol 'ACHRES71' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
SY(ACHRES51) Draw the symbol 'ACHRES51' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
return to the calling procedure
Does 'RESTRN' include 3 || Does the value of the attribute RESTRN include
4 || 5 || 6 || 24? '3' (fishing prohibited) ADN/OR
'4' (fishing restricted) AND/OR
'5' (trawling prohibited) ADN/OR
'6' (trawling restricted) AND/OR
'24' (dragging prohibited)?
Does 'RESTRN' include 13 || Does the value of the attribute RESTRN include
16 || 17 || 23 || 25 || 26 || 27? '13' (no wake area) AND/OR
'16' (discharging prohibited) AND/OR
'17' (discharging restricted) AND/OR
'23' (lightering prohibited) AND/OR
'25' (stopping prohibited) AND/OR
'26' (landing prohibited) AND/OR
'27' (speed restricted)?
SY(FSHRES61) Draw the symbol 'FSHRES61' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
Does 'RESTRN' include 9 || Does the value of the attribute RESTRN include
10 || 11 || 12 || 15 || 18 || 19 || '9' (dredging prohibited) AND/OR
20 || 21 || 22? '10' (dredging restricted) ADN/OR
'11' (diving prohibited) AND/OR
'12' (diving restricted) ADN/OR
'15' (construction prohibited) AND/OR
'18' (development prohibited) ADN/OR
'19' (development restricted) AND/OR
'20' (drilling prohibited) ADN/OR
'21' (drilling restricted) AND/OR
'22' (removing artifacts prohibited)?
SY(FSHRES71) Draw the symbol 'FSHRES71' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
SY(FSHRES51) Draw the symbol 'FSHRES51' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
return to the calling procedure
Does 'RESTRN' include 13 || Does the value of the attribute RESTRN include
16 || 17 || 23 || 25 || 26 || 27? '13' (no wake area) AND/OR
'16' (discharging prohibited) AND/OR
'17' (discharging restricted) AND/OR
'23' (lightering prohibited) AND/OR
'25' (stopping prohibited) AND/OR
'26' (landing prohibited) AND/OR
'27' (speed restricted)?
Does 'RESTRN' include 9 || Does the value of the attribute RESTRN include
10 || 11 || 12 || 15 || 18 || 19 || '9' (dredging prohibited) AND/OR
20 || 21 || 22? '10' (dredging restricted) ADN/OR
'11' (diving prohibited) AND/OR
'12' (diving restricted) ADN/OR

175
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 '15' (construction prohibited) AND/OR
'18' (development prohibited) ADN/OR
'19' (development restricted) AND/OR
'20' (drilling prohibited) ADN/OR
'21' (drilling restricted) AND/OR
'22' (removing artifacts prohibited)?
SY(CTYARE71) Draw the symbol 'CTYARE71' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
SY(CTYARE51) Draw the symbol 'CTYARE51' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
return to the calling procedure
Does 'RESTRN' include 9 || Does the value of the attribute RESTRN include
10 || 11 || 12 || 15 || 18 || 19 || '9' (dredging prohibited) AND/OR
20 || 21 || 22? '10' (dredging restricted) ADN/OR
'11' (diving prohibited) AND/OR
'12' (diving restricted) ADN/OR
'15' (construction prohibited) AND/OR
'18' (development prohibited) ADN/OR
'19' (development restricted) AND/OR
'20' (drilling prohibited) ADN/OR
'21' (drilling restricted) AND/OR
'22' (removing artifacts prohibited)?
SY(INFARE51) Draw the symbol 'INFARE51' in the centre of the visible part of the
calling object area.
SY(RSRDEF51) An unknown value of 'RESTRN' was given. Draw the symbol
'RSRDEF51' in the centre of the visible part of the calling object area.
return to the calling procedure.

176
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.12 Conditional Symbology Procedure SAFCON01

Note that this is called as a sub-procedure by DEPAREnn and DEPCNTnn

Applies to: symbolize edges that are part of the safety contour and depth
contours.

Spatial Object(s): Line

Parameter(s): Input parameter is the local variable 'DEPTH_VALUE' passed from the
called procedure. A list of symbols is returned.

Remarks: This conditional procedure will create a list of symbols name selected
that will be displayed at the mid-point of the edge.

Note: The contours symbolization of 100 meters and deeper is

manufacturer-optional. The symbols required are contained in the
digital version of the Symbol Library, but are not contained in the man-
readable version.

177
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 28 SAFCON01 conditional symbology sub-procedure

act SAFCON02 conditional symbology sub-procedure

Create List of
symbols (initially
blank)
Entry point

Symbol Prefix
Variable = 'SAFCON'

DEPTH_VALUE < 0 || DEPTH_VALUE < 10 &&

DEPTH_VALUE > 99999 ? Has it a fractional value?
[Yes] [No] [No]
Return
undetermined [Yes]
contour symbols

'SAFCON6X' + 'SAFCON0X' +
FRACTION LEADING_DIGIT

DEPTH_VALUE < 10?

'SAFCON0X' +
DEPTH_VALUE [Yes] [No]

DEPTH_VALUE < 31 &&

Has it a fractional value?
Return 'list of
'SAFCON5X' + 'SAFCON1X' + 'SAFCON2X' +
symbols'
FRACTION SECOND_DIGIT LEADING_DIGIT [Yes]

[No]

DEPTH_VALUE < 100?

'SAFCON1X' + 'SAFCON2X' +
SECOND_DIGIT LEADING_DIGIT [Yes]

[No]
There is a manufacturer-optional part below.

DEPTH_VALUE
< 1000?
'SAFCON9X' + 'SAFCON0X' + 'SAFCON8X' +
THIRD_DIGIT SECOND_DIGIT LEADING_DIGIT [Yes]

[No]

DEPTH_VALUE
< 10000?
'SAFCON1X' + 'SAFCON2X' + 'SAFCON3X' +
THIRD_DIGIT SECOND_DIGIT LEADING_DIGIT [Yes]

'SAFCON7X' + [No]
FOURTH_DIGIT

Return 'list of
symbols'
DEPTH_VALUE
< 100000?
'SAFCON2X' + 'SAFCON3X' + 'SAFCON4X' +
THIRD_DIGIT SECOND_DIGIT LEADING_DIGIT [Yes]

[No]

'SAFCON7X' + 'SAFCON1X' +
FIFTH_DIGIT FOURTH_DIGIT Return undetermined
contour symbols

178
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Entry point The symbology sub-procedure is called by other procedure. Pass the
local variable DEPTH_VALUE.
Create List of symbols Create a 'list of symbols' to be presented at the position of the
(initially blank) contour label. This list is initially blank.
Symbol Prefix Variable = Set the symbol prefix variable to 'SAFCON'.
'SAFCON'
DEPTH_VALUE < 0 || Is the local variable DEPTH_VALUE less than 0 or greater than
DEPTH_VALUE > 99999 ? 99999 metres?
Return undetermined Return to the calling procedure indicating that the contour symbols
contour symbols could not be determined
DEPTH_VALUE < 10 && Has Is the local variable DEPTH_VALUE less than 10 metres and has it a
it a fractional value? fractional value?
'SAFCON0X' + Isolate 'LEADING_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'. Create symbol name
LEADING_DIGIT by adding '00' + 'LEADING_DIGIT' to 'SYMBOL_PREFIX' (e.g. 3.6
metres - isolate '3' and create 'SAFCON03').
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
'SAFCON6X' + FRACTION Isolate 'FRACTION' of 'DEPTH_VALUE' and multiply by 10. Truncate
all digits after the decimal. Do not round up.
Create symbol name by adding '60' + 'FRACTION' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
DEPTH_VALUE < 10? Is the local variable DEPTH_VALUE less than 10 metres?
'SAFCON0X' + Create symbol name by adding '00' + 'DEPTH_VALUE' to
DEPTH_VALUE 'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
DEPTH_VALUE < 31 && Has Is the local variable DEPTH_VALUE less than 31 metres and has it a
it a fractional value? fractional value?
(Note: common practice in hydrography is to show fractions of a
depth value up to 30 metres depth).
'SAFCON2X' + Isolate 'LEADING_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
LEADING_DIGIT Create symbol name by adding '20' + 'LEADING_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
'SAFCON1X' + Isolate 'SECOND_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
SECOND_DIGIT Create symbol name by adding '10' + 'SECOND_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
'SAFCON5X' + FRACTION Isolate 'FRACTION' of 'DEPTH_VALUE' and multiply by 10.
Truncate all digits after the decimal. Do not round up.
Create symbol name by adding '50' + 'FRACTION' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
DEPTH_VALUE < 100? Is the local variable DEPTH_VALUE less than 100 metres?
'SAFCON2X' + Isolate 'LEADING_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'/
LEADING_DIGIT Create symbol name by adding '20' + 'LEADING_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
'SAFCON1X' + Isolate 'SECOND_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
SECOND_DIGIT Create symbol nmae by adding '10' + 'SECOND_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
Return 'list of symbols' Return to the calling procedure with the 'List of Symbols' which were
selected.
Note: the following routine is manufacturer-optional.
DEPTH_VALUE < 1000? Is the local variable DEPTH_VALUE less than 1000 metres?
'SAFCON8X' + Isolate 'LEADING_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'/
LEADING_DIGIT Create symbol name by adding '80' + 'LEADING_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.

179
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
'SAFCON0X' + Isolate 'SECOND_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
SECOND_DIGIT Create symbol name by adding '00' + 'SECOND_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
'SAFCON9X' + THIRD_DIGIT Isolate 'THIRD_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
Create symbol name by adding '90' + 'THIRD_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
DEPTH_VALUE < 10000? Is the local variable DEPTH_VALUE less than 10000 metres?
'SAFCON3X' + Isolate 'LEADING_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'/
LEADING_DIGIT Create symbol name by adding '30' + 'LEADING_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
'SAFCON2X' + Isolate 'SECOND_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
SECOND_DIGIT Create symbol name by adding '20' + 'SECOND_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
'SAFCON1X' + THIRD_DIGIT Isolate 'THIRD_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
Create symbol name by adding '10' + 'THIRD_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
'SAFCON7X' + Isolate 'FOURTH_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
FOURTH_DIGIT Create symbol name by adding '70' + 'FOURTH_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
DEPTH_VALUE < 100000? Is the local variable DEPTH_VALUE less than 100 000 metres?
Return undetermined If ‘No’, return to the calling procedure indicating that the contour
contour symbols symbols could not be determined
'SAFCON4X' + Isolate 'LEADING_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'/
LEADING_DIGIT Create symbol name by adding '40' + 'LEADING_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
'SAFCON3X' + Isolate 'SECOND_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
SECOND_DIGIT Create symbol name by adding '30' + 'SECOND_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
'SAFCON2X' + THIRD_DIGIT Isolate 'THIRD_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
Create symbol nmae by adding '20' + THIRD_DIGIT to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
'SAFCON1X' + Isolate 'FOURTH_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
FOURTH_DIGIT Create symbol name by adding '10' + 'FOURTH_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
'SAFCON7X' + FIFTH_DIGIT Isolate 'FIFTH_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
Create symbol name by adding '70' + 'FIFTH_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the 'list of symbols' to be presented.
Return 'list of symbols' Return to the calling procedure with the 'List of Symbols' which were
selected.

180
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.13 Conditional Symbology Procedure SLCONS04

Applies to: S-57 Object Class "shoreline construction" (SLCONS)

Spatial Object(s): Point, Line, Area

Attribute(s) used: S-57 object attributes: (CATSLC, CONDTN, WATLEV). Spatial

attribute QUAPOS

User Parameter(s): None.

Defaults: Display Priority given by look-up table; OVERRADAR priority

given by look-up table; Display Category given by look-up
table; Viewing Group given by look-up table. Note these
parameters may vary depending on the feature’s geometric
primitive.

Remarks: Shoreline construction objects which have a QUAPOS attribute

on their spatial component indicating that their position is
unreliable are symbolized by a special linestyle in the place of
the varied linestyles normally used. Otherwise this procedure
applies the normal symbolization.

181
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 29 SLCONS04 conditional symbology procedure

act SLCONS04 conditional symbology procedure

Get the Calling

Obj ect
Entry point

Is Point?

[No]

[Yes]

«loop»
For each spatial component of the
QUAPNT02
obj ect
[Setup]

The Calling Obj ect

Does 'QUAPNT02'
return 'LOWACC01'? [No]
[Test]
While there is
unprocessed spatial
[Yes]
component

[Body]
SY(LOWACC01) Symbolize spatail
components

Exit Procedure

Entry point The calling Shoreline Construction object.

Is Point? Is the calling object type Point?
QUAPNT02 Perform the symbology procedure 'QUAPNT02' which returns a flag
indicating whether or not to display the low accuracy symbol and
returns the selected symbol 'LOWACC01'. It happens if the attribute
'QUAPOS' of the spatial object equal one of the following values: '2',
'3', '4', '5', '6', '7', '8' or '9'.
Calling Object Input parameter
LOWACC01 Output parameter
Does 'QUAPNT02' return Is the symbol 'LOWACC01' selected by the procedure 'QUAPNT02'?
'LOWACC01'?
SY(LOWACC01) If so indicated by the procedure 'QUAPNT02', draw the returned low
accuracy symbol 'LOWACC01' at the calling object's location in the
viewing group 31011
Loop for each spatial Loop for each spatial component of the calling object:
component of the object Setup - The Calling Object.

182
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Test - While there is unprocessed spatial component
Body - Symbolize spatial components
Exit Procedure Symbolization is finished

Figure 30 Loop for each spatial component of area and line SLCONS object

act For each spatial component of the obj ect

Has value 'QUAPOS' != 1
Get spatial ('QUAPOS')? && 10 && 11?
LC(LOWACC21)
component [Yes] [Yes]
LOOP entry
point [No] [No]

Symbolize the
spatial component

continue

Symbolize as follows, using strict look up table

matching procedures:
"SLCONS" "" "LS(SOLD,2,CSTLN)"
"SLCONS" "CONDTN1" "LS(DASH,1,CSTLN)"
"SLCONS" "CONDTN2" "LS(DASH,1,CSTLN)"
"SLCONS" "CATSLC6" "LS(SOLD,4,CSTLN)"
"SLCONS" "CATSLC15" "LS(SOLD,4,CSTLN)"
"SLCONS" "CATSLC16" "LS(SOLD,4,CSTLN)"
"SLCONS" "WATLEV2" "LS(SOLD,2,CSTLN)"
"SLCONS" "WATLEV3" "LS(DASH,2,CSTLN)"
"SLCONS" "WATLEV4" "LS(DASH,2,CSTLN)"

LOOP entry point Spatial components of the calling object.

Get spatial component Get the next spatial component of the calling object.
Has value ('QUAPOS')? Is the value of the attribute 'QUAPOS' given?
'QUAPOS' != 1 && 10 && Does the value of attribute 'QUAPOS' equal to neither of the following
11? values: '1', '10', and '11'?
LC(LOWACC21) Draw spatial component with line pattern 'LOWACC21'
Symbolize the spatial Symbolize the spatial component with as follows, using strict look-up
component table matching procedures:
"SLCONS" "" "LS(SOLD,2,CSTLN)"
"SLCONS" "CONDTN1" "LS(DASH,1,CSTLN)"
"SLCONS" "CONDTN2" "LS(DASH,1,CSTLN)"
"SLCONS" "CATSLC6" "LS(SOLD,4,CSTLN)"
"SLCONS" "CATSLC15" "LS(SOLD,4,CSTLN)"
"SLCONS" "CATSLC16" "LS(SOLD,4,CSTLN)"
"SLCONS" "WATLEV2" "LS(SOLD,2,CSTLN)"
"SLCONS" "WATLEV3" "LS(DASH,2,CSTLN)"
"SLCONS" "WATLEV4" "LS(DASH,2,CSTLN)"
continue Go to the next spatial component of the object.

183
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.14 Conditional Symbology Procedure SEABED01

(Note that this is a sub-procedure called by DEPAREnn)

Applies to: Symbolization of areas that form the seabed

Remarks: This conditional procedure will create a Colour fill for depth areas (S-
57)

Spatial Object(s): Area

Parameter(s):
 DRVAL1 (minimum depth) passed from calling procedure
 DRVAL2 (maximum depth) passed from calling procedure
 SHALLOW_CONTOUR depth value selected by the mariner
 SAFETY_CONTOUR depth value selected by the mariner
 DEEP_CONTOUR depth value selected by the mariner

Required User parameters: The following ECDIS user parameters are required in the
procedure. The manufacturer is responsible for setting default values
as shown in square brackets.:
 SHALLOW_CONTOUR = 2.0 [2 metres] (referred to as “SHC” in the
diagrams).
 DEEP_CONTOUR = 30.0 [30 metres]
 SAFETY_CONTOUR = 30.0 [30 metres] (referred to as “SFC” in the
diagrams)
 TWO_SHADES [default = on] - flag selected by the mariner
(TWO_SHADES 'on' draws 2 depth area colour shades, 'off' draws 4)
 SHALLOW_PATTERN = [default = off] - flag selected by the mariner
(«optional»)

The default values must stay in operation until the mariner decides to
select other parameters.

Note: The requirement to show four depth shades is not mandatory.

However the requirement to for ECDIS to have the ability to display
the shallow pattern is now mandatory.
In addition the following local variables are used by the procedure:
 COLOUR
 SHALLOW

184
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 31 SEABED01(DRVAL1,DRAVL2) conditional symbology sub-procedure

act SEABED01(DRVAL1,DRAVL2) conditional symbology sub-procedure

Get the Calling

Obj ect
SFC="SAFETY_CONTOUR"
SHC="SHALLOW_CONTOUR"
Entry point

SELECT
Colour='DEPIT';
SHALLOW=TRUE

TWO_SHADES == 'ON'?

[Yes] [No]
'DRVAL1' >= 0 &&
'DRVAL1' >= 0 &&
'DRVAL2' > 0 ?
'DRVAL2' > 0?

[No] [No]
[Yes] [Yes]

SELECT SELECT
Colour='DEPVS' Colour='DEPVS'

'DRVAL1' >= SHC &&

'DRVAL2' > SHC?

'DRVAL1' >= SFC && [Yes]

'DRVAL2 > SFC?
[No]

[Yes]
SELECT
[No] Colour='DEPMS'

'DRVAL1' >= SFC &&

'DRVAL2' > SFC?
SELECT
Colour='DEPDW',
[Yes]
SHALLOW=FALSE
[No]

SELECT
Color='DEPMD',
SHALLOW=FALSE

'DRVAL1' >= DEEP_CONTOUR &&

'DRVAL2' > DEEP_CONTOUR?

[No]

[Yes]

SELECT
Colour='DEPDW',
SHALLOW=FALSE

So, possible fill colours SHALLOW_PATTERN == 'ON'

are the following: && SHALLOW == TRUE?
1. 'DEPIT' AP(DIAMOND1)
AC(Colour)
2. 'DEPDW' [Yes]
3. 'DEPMD'
4. 'DEPVS' [No]
5. 'DEPMS'
Return

185
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Entry point Entry from the calling conditional procedure.
DRVAL1 and DRVAL2 are passed from the calling procedure
Get the Calling Object Get the object which is calling main procedure DEPARE03 and input
parameters DRVAL1 and DRVAL2
TWO_SHADES == 'ON'? Has the mariner selected the 'two-colour shading' for depth zones?
'DRVAL1' >= 0 && 'DRVAL2' Is 'DRVAL1' greater than or equal to '0' metres (low water line) and is
> 0? 'DRVAL2' greater than '0' metres?
SELECT Colour='DEPVS' Select colour name 'DEPVS'
'DRVAL1' >= SFC && Is 'DRVAL1' greater than or equal to the value of the 'SAFETY
'DRVAL2 > SFC? CONTOUR' as selected by the mariner and is 'DRVAL2' greater than
the value of the 'SAFETY CONTOUR'?
SELECT Colour='DEPDW', Select colour name 'DEPDW' and set local variable SHALLOW equal
SHALLOW=FALSE to 'FALSE'
SELECT Colour='DEPIT'; Select colour name 'DEPIT' (intertidal area) and set local variable
SHALLOW=TRUE SHALLOW equal to 'TRUE'.
'DRVAL1' >= 0 && 'DRVAL2' Is 'DRVAL1' greater than or equal to '0' metres (low water line) and is
>0? 'DRVAL2' greater than '0' metres?
SELECT Colour='DEPVS' Select colour name 'DEPVS'
'DRVAL1' >= SHC && Is 'DRVAL1' greater than or equal to the value of the 'SHALLOW
'DRVAL2' > SHC? CONTOUR' as selected by the mariner and is 'DRVAL2' greater than
the value of the 'SHALLOW CONTOUR'?
SELECT Colour='DEPMS' Select colour name 'DEPMS'
'DRVAL1' >= SFC && Is 'DRVAL1' greater than or equal to the value of the 'SAFETY
'DRVAL2' > SFC? CONTOUR' as selected by the mariner and is 'DRVAL2' greater than
the value of the 'SAFETY CONTOUR'?
SELECT Color='DEPMD', Select colour name 'DEPMD' and set local variable
SHALLOW=FALSE SHALLOW=FALSE
'DRVAL1' >= Is 'DRVAL1' greater than or equal to the value of the
DEEP_CONTOUR && DEEP_CONTOUR as selected by the mariner and is 'DRVAL2'
'DRVAL2' > greater than the value of the DEEP_CONTOUR?
DEEP_CONTOUR?
SELECT Colour='DEPDW', Select colour name 'DEPDW' and set local variable
SHALLOW=FALSE SHALLOW=FALSE
AC(Colour) Draw the area object with an opaque colour fill.
Use the colour which was selected last.
SHALLOW_PATTERN == Has the mariner decided to make shallow areas more prominent
'ON' && SHALLOW == ('SHALLOW_PATTERN' on) and is 'SHALLOW' set to true?
TRUE?
AP(DIAMOND1) Draw the fill pattern 'DIAMOND1' from the symbol library and show it
on top of the area's colour fill.
Return Return to the calling procedure

186
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.15 Conditional Symbology Procedure SNDFRM04
(Note that this is a sub-procedure called by SOUNDGnn, OBSTRNnn, and WRECKSnn)

Applies to: Symbolization of depth values. It formats the passed value into a
sounding form.

Spatial Object(s): Point

Parameter(s):
 DEPTH_VALUE passed from calling procedure;
 QUAPOS of the spatial objects and QUASOU, TECSOU and STATUS
of the object that are calling the main procedure

Required ECDIS parameters:

SAFETY_DEPTH selected by the mariner The manufacturer is
responsible for setting the SAFETY_DEPTH to 30 meters (see also
conditional symbology procedures "DEPAREnn" and "DEPCNTnn").
This value should stay in operation until the mariner decides to select
another safety depth.

Remarks: Soundings differ from plain text because they have to be readable
under all circumstances and their digits are placed according to
special rules and according to the location of the feature object. This
conditional symbology procedure accesses a set of carefully designed
sounding symbols provided by the symbol library and compiles them
into sounding labels. It also symbolizes swept depth and special
symbols representing low reliability as indicated by attributes
QUASOU, TECSOU, STATUS and QUAPOS.

187
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 32 SNDFRM04 conditional symbology sub-procedure

act SNDFRM04 conditional symbology sub-procedure

DEPTH_VALUE <=
Create 'List of SAFETY_DEPTH?
SYMBOL_PREFIX =
Symbol' (initially
[No] 'SOUNDG'
blank) [Yes]
Entry point

SYMBOL_PREFIX =
Get 'TECSOU'
'SOUNDS'

Does 'TECSOU' Has value

include 4 || 6 ? ('TECSOU')?
'SYMBOL_PREFIX' +
'B1' [Yes] [Yes]

[No] [No]

(Has values ('QUASOU') && Does

'QUASOU' include 3 || 4 || 5 || 8 || 9') || Conditional symbology procedure
(Has value ('STATUS') && Does for symbolizing of depth values.
'STATUS' include 18)? Please note that this symbology
Get 'QUASOU';
procedure is called by other
Get 'STATUS' [No]
procedures. 'DEPTH-VALUE' is
Get the Spatial passed on to this procedure by the
Obj ect calling procedure.

Has value 'QUAPOS' != 1

[Yes]
('QUAPOS')? && 10 && 11?
'SYMBOL_PREFIX' +
[Yes] [Yes] 'C2'

[No] [No]

'SYMBOL_PREFIX' +
'C2'

DEPTH_VALUE < 0?
'SYMBOL_PREFIX' +
'A1' [Yes] [No]

DEPTH_VALUE digits DEPTH_VALUE < 10?

representation
[Yes]
algorithm 1
[No]
DEPTH_VALUE < 31 &&
DEPTH_VALUE digits Has it a fractional value?
representation
algorithm 2 [Yes]
[No]

DEPTH_VALUE digits DEPTH_VALUE < 100? Truncate

representation 'DEPTH_VALUE' to
[Yes] INTEGER
algorithm 3
Return [No]
'List of
Symbols' DEPTH_VALUE < 1000?
DEPTH_VALUE digits
representation
[Yes]
algorithm 4
Return
[No] 'List of
DEPTH_VALUE Symbols'
DEPTH_VALUE digits < 10000? DEPTH_VALUE digits
representation representation
[Yes] [No]
algorithm 5 algorithm 6

188
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Entry point 'DEPTH_VALUE' is passed on to this procedure by the calling
procedure.
Create 'List of Symbol' Create 'List of Symbols' to be presented at the position of the
(initially blank) sounding
This list is initially blank.
DEPTH_VALUE <= Is the DEPTH_VALUE equal or LESS than the value of
SAFETY_DEPTH? 'SAFETY_DEPTH' that was selected by the mariner?
SYMBOL_PREFIX = Set local variable 'SYMBOL_PREFIX' to 'SOUNDS' (SOUNDing -
'SOUNDS' Shallow).
(Note: all sounding symbols with dominant colour have that prefix).
[IMO PS 3.7]
SYMBOL_PREFIX = Set local variable 'SYMBOL_PREFIX' to 'SOUNDG'. (SOUNDing -
'SOUNDG' General)
(Note: all sounding symbols with faint colour have that prefix).
Get 'TECSOU' Get the value of the calling object's attribute 'Technique of sounding
measurement' (TECSOU).
Has value ('TECSOU')? Is the value of the attribute 'TECSOU' given?
Does 'TECSOU' include 4 || Does the attribute 'TECSOU' include '4' (found by diver) or '6' (swept
6? depth)?
'SYMBOL_PREFIX' + 'B1' Create symbol name: 'SYMBOL_PREFIX' + 'B1' (i.e. 'SOUNDSB1' or
'SOUNDGB1').
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.
Get 'QUASOU'; Get Get the value of the object's attributes 'QUASOU' and 'STATUS'.
'STATUS' (Attribute 'QUAPOS' is on the spatial object).
(Has values ('QUASOU') && Is the value of the attribute 'QUASOU' given and does it include
Does 'QUASOU' include 3 || '3','4','5','8' or '9' AND/OR
4 || 5 || 8 || 9') || Is the value of the attribute 'STATUS' given and does it include '18'
(Has value ('STATUS') && (uncertain sounding)?
Does 'STATUS' include 18)?
'SYMBOL_PREFIX' + 'C2' Create symbol name: 'SYMBOL_PREFIX' + 'C2' (i.e. SOUNDSC2' or
'SOUNDGC2').
Add this symbol to the 'List of symbols' to be presented.
Get the Spatial Object Get the corresponding spatial object of the calling object.
Has value ('QUAPOS')? Is the value of the attribute 'QUAPOS' given?
'QUAPOS' != 1 && 10 && Does the value of attribute 'QUAPOS' equal to neither of the
11? following values: '1', '10', and '11'?
'SYMBOL_PREFIX' + 'C2' Create symbol name: 'SYMBOL_PREFIX' + 'C2' (i.e. SOUNDSC2' or
'SOUNDGC2').
Add this symbol to the 'List of symbols' to be presented.
DEPTH_VALUE < 0? Is 'DEPTH_VALUE' less than zero meters?
'SYMBOL_PREFIX' + 'A1' Create symbol name: 'SYMBOL_PREFIX' + 'A1' (i.e. SOUNDSA1').
Add this symbol to the 'List of symbols' to be presented.
DEPTH_VALUE < 10? Is 'DEPTH_VALUE' less than 10 meters?
DEPTH_VALUE digits Isolate 'LEADING_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
representation algorithm 1 Set 'LEADING_DIGIT' to positive value.
Create symbol name by adding '10' + 'LEADING_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX' (e.g. 3.6 metres - isolate the '3' and create either
'SOUNDS13' or 'SOUNDG13').
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.

Isolate 'FRACTION' of 'DEPTH_VALUE' and multiply by 10.

Truncate all digits after the decimal. Do not round up. Create symbol
name by adding '50' + 'FRACTION' to 'SYMBOL_PREFIX' (e.g. 3.6
metres - isolate the '6' and create either 'SOUNDS56' or
'SOUNDG56').
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.
DEPTH_VALUE < 31 && Has Is 'DEPTH_VALUE' less than 31 metres and has it a fractional value?
it a fractional value? (Note: common practice in hydrography is to show fractions of a

189
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 depth value up to 30 metres depth)
DEPTH_VALUE digits Isolate 'LEADING_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
representation algorithm 2 Create symbol name by adding '20' + 'LEADING_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX' (e.g. 26.7 metres - isolate the '2' and create
either 'SOUNDS22' or 'SOUNDG22').
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.

Isolate 'SECOND_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.

Create symbol name by adding '10' + 'SECOND_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX' (e.g. 26.7 metres - isolate the '6' and create
either 'SOUNDS16' or 'SOUNDG16').
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.

Isolate 'FRACTION' of 'DEPTH_VALUE' and multiply by 10.

Truncate all digits after the decimal. Do not round up. Create symbol
name by adding '50' + 'FRACTION' to 'SYMBOL_PREFIX' (e.g. 26.7
metres - isolate the '7' and create either 'SOUNDS57' or
'SOUNDG57').
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.
Truncate 'DEPTH_VALUE' to Truncate 'DEPTH_VALUE' to integer. Do not round up
INTEGER
DEPTH_VALUE < 100? Is 'DEPTH_VALUE' less than 100 meters?
DEPTH_VALUE digits Isolate 'LEADING_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
representation algorithm 3 Create symbol name by adding '10' + 'LEADING_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.

Isolate 'SECOND_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.

Create symbol name by adding '00' + 'SECOND_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.
DEPTH_VALUE < 1000? Is 'DEPTH_VALUE' less than 1000 meters?
DEPTH_VALUE digits Isolate 'LEADING_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
representation algorithm 4 Create symbol name by adding '20' + 'LEADING_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.

Isolate 'SECOND_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.

Create symbol name by adding '10' + 'SECOND_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.

Isolate 'LAST_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.

Create symbol name by adding '00' + 'LAST_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.
DEPTH_VALUE < 10000? Is 'DEPTH_VALUE' less than 10 000 meters?
DEPTH_VALUE digits Isolate 'LEADING_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
representation algorithm 5 Create symbol name by adding '20' + 'LEADING_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.

Isolate 'SECOND_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.

Create symbol name by adding '10' + 'SECOND_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.

Isolate 'THIRD_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.

Create symbol name by adding '00' + 'THIRD_DIGIT' to

190
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.

Isolate 'LAST_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.

Create symbol name by adding '40' + 'LAST_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.
Return 'List of Symbols' Return to the calling procedure with the 'List of Symbols' which were
selected.
DEPTH_VALUE digits Isolate 'LEADING_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.
representation algorithm 6 Create symbol name by adding '30' + 'LEADING_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.

Isolate 'SECOND_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.

Create symbol name by adding '20' + 'SECOND_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.

Isolate 'THIRD_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.

Create symbol name by adding '10' + 'THIRD_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.

Isolate 'FOURTH_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.

Create symbol name by adding '00' + 'FOURTH_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.

Isolate 'LAST_DIGIT' of 'DEPTH_VALUE'.

Create symbol name by adding '40' + 'LAST_DIGIT' to
'SYMBOL_PREFIX'.
Add this symbol name to the list of symbols to be presented.
Return 'List of Symbols' Return to the calling procedure with the 'List of Symbols' which were
selected.

191
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
12.2.16 Conditional Symbology Procedure SOUNDG03

Applies to: S-57 Object Class "soundings" (SOUNDG)

Spatial Object(s): 3D Edge (the array of points with three coordinates)

ECDIS Parameter(s):

Defaults: Display Priority given by look-up table;

OVERRADAR priority given by look-up table;
Display Category given by look-up table;
Viewing group given by look-up table.

Remarks: In S-57 soundings are elements of sounding arrays rather than

individual objects. Thus this conditional symbology procedure
examines each sounding of a sounding array one by one. To
symbolize the depth values it calls the procedure SNDFRM04 which in
turn translates the depth values into a set of symbols to be shown at
the soundings position.

Figure 33 SOUNDG03 conditional symbology procedure

act SOUNDG03 conditional symbology procedure

«loop»
For each point of the 3D edge
spatial obj ect
[Setup]
Get Obj ect's
Sounding Array; The
Calling Obj ect

Entry point
Get the calling [Test]
obj ect While there is
unprocessed point of Exit procedure
Sounding Array

[Body]
Symbolize point of the
Sounding Array

Entry point The calling object SOUNDG

Get the calling object Get the object which is calling this procedure.
Loop for each point of the 3D Perform the loop for each spot sounding that is point (vertex) of
edge spatial object the 3D edge spatial object.
Setup - Get Object's Sounding Array; The Calling Object.
Test - While there is unprocessed point of Sounding Array
Body - Symbolize point of the Sounding Array
Exit procedure Symbolization is finished

192
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 34 Loop for each Spot Sounding

act For each Sounding

For each sounding that is a part of the object's sounding array, perform this loop

SNDFRM04
Set DEPTH_VALUE (DEPTH_VALUE) Draw Sounding Symbol(s)

LOOP entry continue

point

LOOP entry point For each sounding that is a part of the object's sounding array,
perform this loop
Set DEPTH_VALUE Get the depth value of the spot sounding from 3D edge vertex of the
spatial object that is currently examined and set it to the local
variable DEPTH_VALUE.
SNDFRM04 Perform the symbology sub-procedure 'SNDFRM04 to select
(DEPTH_VALUE) symbols to draw the depth value.
Pass the value of the local variable DEPTH_VALUE, the calling
object and attributes of spatial objects on to 'SNDFRM04'.
A list of symbols is returned
DEPTH_VALUE Input parameter
Sounding Symbols List Output parameter
Draw Sounding Symbol(s) Draw the symbols which were selected by 'SNDFRM04'. Place them
at the position which is given by the currently examined spot
sounding.
continue Go to the next point of the 3D Edge spatial object.

193
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.17 Conditional Symbology Procedure SYMINS02

Applies to: S-57 (Edition 3.1.1) Object Class "New Object" (NEWOBJ)

Attribute used: "Symbol Instruction" (SYMINS)

Parameter(s): Object to be symbolized from SENC

Defaults: Display Priority given by look-up table, OVERRADAR priority given by

look-up table, Display Category given by look-up table, Viewing Group
given by look-up table, Area colour fill from underlying DEPARE or
UNSARE

Remarks: The ‘New Object’ feature object class has been included in order to
cater for possible future requirements of the IMO that affects safety of
navigation which cannot adequately be encoded by any existing object
class. It must not be used unless approved by the Transfer Standard
Maintenance and Application Development Working Group (TSMAD)
and the Colours and Symbols Maintenance Working Group (CSMWG)
and issued as an ENC Encoding Bulletin.

Figure 35 SYMINS02 conditional symbology procedure

act SYMINS02 conditional symbology procedure

Has value
('SYMINS')? Create 'List of
Get the Calling
Get 'SYMINS' Symbology Instruction'
Obj ect [Yes] (Initially blank)
Entry point

Select Symbology
[No] Instructions

Is the Symbology
Is Point? Instruction(s) valid?
SY(NEWOBJ01)
[Yes] [No]

[No] [Yes]

Is Line?
LC(NEWOBJ01) Symbolize
[Yes]
Obj ect
[No]

SY(NEWOBJ01);
LS(DASH,2,CHMGD)
Exit Procedure

Exit Procedure

194
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Entry point Entry to the symbology procedure with the calling 'New Object'
Get the Calling Object Get the object which is calling this procedure
Get 'SYMINS' Get the value of the attribute 'Symbol Instruction' (SYMINS)
Has value ('SYMINS')? Is the value of the attribute 'SYMINS' given?
Create 'List of Symbology Create 'List of Symbology Instructions' to be presented at the
Instruction' (Initially blank) position of the calling object. This list is initially blank.
Select Symbology Select Symbology instruction(s) from the value of 'SYMINS' to the
Instructions 'List of Symbology Instructions'.
There can be: AC(); AP(); LS(); LC(); SY(); TX(); TE().
The symbology instructions have to be added to the list in the order
as they are in the SYMINS attribute value.
The symbology instruction must not be added in selected list if:
- it is not recognized as symbology instruction;
- it calls an invalid symbology name;
- it has invalid symbology parameters;
- it cannot be implemented for the calling object geometry (e.g. line
symbology instructions for point object and etc.)
Is the Symbology Is the List of Symbology Instructions empty?
Instruction(s) valid? (i.e. the previous Action could not select the correct symbology
instructions from the value of 'SYMINS').
Symbolize Object Using the selected Symbology Instruction(s) from the list to
symbolize the calling object according to its geometry.
Point symbolization (i.e. SY(), TX() and TE()) have to be drawn in the
middle point of the line or in the area centre of the calling object.
Exit Procedure Symbolization is finished
Is Point? Is the object of type point?
SY(NEWOBJ01) Draw the symbol 'NEWOBJ01' at the location of the calling object.
Is Line? Is the object of type line?
LC(NEWOBJ01) Symbolize area boundary with the line pattern 'NEWOBJ01'.
SY(NEWOBJ01); Draw the symbol 'NEWOBJ01' in the centre of the calling area object.
LS(DASH,2,CHMGD) Draw the area boundary as a dashed line, 2 units wide, in the colour
'CHMGD'.
Exit Procedure Exit from the procedure with default symbolization

195
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.18 Conditional Symbology Procedure TOPMAR01

Applies to: S-57 Object Class "top mark" (TOPMAR)

Spatial Object(s): Point

Relation(s) used: Point objects at identical location

Attribute(s) used: "shape of topmark" (TOPSHP)

Parameter(s): Object to be symbolized from SENC

Defaults: Display Priority given by look-up table

OVERRADAR priority given by look-up table
Display Category given by look-up table
Viewing Group given by look-up table.
This procedure is only used in traditional symbology – the simplified
symbology does not have separate topmark display.

Remarks: Topmark objects are to be symbolized through consideration of their

platforms e.g. a buoy. Therefore this conditional symbology procedure
searches for platforms by looking for other objects that are located at
the same position. Based on the finding whether the platform is rigid or
floating, the respective upright or sloping symbol is selected and
presented at the objects location. Buoy symbols and topmark symbols
have been carefully designed to fit to each other when combined at the
same position. The result is a composed symbol that looks like the
traditional symbols the mariner is used to.

196
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 36 TOPMAR01 conditional symbology procedure

act TOPMAR02 conditional symbology procedure

Get the Calling

Get 'TOPSHP'
Obj ect
Entry point

Has value
('TOPSHP')?
FLOATING=FALSE
[No] [Yes]

«loop»
For each co-located point obj ect
[Setup]
Collect all point obj ects, co-located
w ith the calling obj ect

[Test]
While FLOATING == FALSE OR there
is an unprocessed point of the
co-located obj ect

[Body]
Set FLOATING = TRUE if there is a
obj ect of the floating platform

FLOATING == TRUE?
This object cannot be
properly symbolized.
[Yes] [No]
Therefore select
symbol 'QUESMRK1'
from the symbol library
and show it at the
position where the
object which was SELECT Symbol Name SELECT Symbol Name
calling this procedure 'TOPMARxx' for 'TOPMARxx' for RIGID
is located. FLOATING platform platform

SY(QUESMRK1)

SY(SELECT)
Exit
Procedure

Entry point Entry to the symbology procedure with the calling 'Topmark'
Get the Calling Object Get the object which is calling the procedure.
Get 'TOPSHP' Get the value of the object's attribute 'Topmark/daymark shape'
(TOPSHP).

197
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Has value ('TOPSHP')? Is the value of the attribute 'TOPSHP' given?
SY(QUESMRK1) If ‘No’, this object cannot be properly symbolized therefore draw
symbol 'QUESMRK1' from the symbol library at the position where
the object which was calling this procedure is located.
FLOATING=FALSE Set local variable 'FLOATING' equal to FALSE as default value.
It means there is one of the following object of the rigid platform:
'BCN...', 'BRIDGE', 'BUISGL','DAYMAR', 'LNDMRK', 'MORFAC
without CATMOR=7', 'OFSPLF', 'PILPNT', 'SLCONS', 'CRANES',
'FLODOC', 'FORSTC', 'FSHFAC', 'HULKES', 'PONTON', 'OBSTRN',
'PYLONS', 'SILTNK' and 'WRECKS'.
Loop for each co-located Loop for each point object which is located at the same position as
point object the object which is calling this procedure. the value of local variable
'FLOATING' is returned.
Setup - Collect all point objects, co-located with the calling object;
Test –While FLOATING == FALSE OR there is an unprocessed
point of the co-located object;
Body - Set FLOATING = TRUE if there is an object of the floating
platform
FLOATING == TRUE? Is the object with a topmark sitting on top of a floating platform
('FLOATING' equals 'TRUE')?
SELECT='TOPMARxx' for Select appropriate symbol name depends on the attribute 'TOPSHP'
FLOATING platform value for floating platform a buoys, light float or Light vessel, see
table below
SELECT='TOPMARxx' for Select appropriate symbol name depends on the attribute 'TOPSHP'
RIGID platform value for rigid platform a beacons, day marks or land marks or etc.
see table below

TOPSHP Value FLOATING Symbol Name RIGID Symbol Name

1 TOPMAR02 TOPMAR22
2 TOPMAR04 TOPMAR24
3 TOPMAR10 TOPMAR30
4 TOPMAR12 TOPMAR32
5 TOPMAR13 TOPMAR33
6 TOPMAR14 TOPMAR34
7 TOPMAR65 TOPMAR85
8 TOPMAR17 TOPMAR86
9 TOPMAR16 TOPMAR36
10 TOPMAR08 TOPMAR28
11 TOPMAR07 TOPMAR27
12 TOPMAR14 TOPMAR14
13 TOPMAR05 TOPMAR25
14 TOPMAR06 TOPMAR26
15 TMARDEF2 TOPMAR88
16 TMARDEF2 TOPMAR87
17 TMARDEF2 TMARDEF1
18 TOPMAR10 TOPMAR30
19 TOPMAR13 TOPMAR33
20 TOPMAR14 TOPMAR34

198
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 21 TOPMAR13 TOPMAR33
22 TOPMAR14 TOPMAR34
23 TOPMAR14 TOPMAR34
24 TOPMAR02 TOPMAR22
25 TOPMAR04 TOPMAR24
26 TOPMAR10 TOPMAR30
27 TOPMAR17 TOPMAR86
28 TOPMAR18 TOPMAR89
29 TOPMAR02 TOPMAR22
30 TOPMAR17 TOPMAR86
31 TOPMAR14 TOPMAR14
32 TOPMAR10 TOPMAR30
33 TMARDEF2 TMARDEF1
Default TMARDEF2 TMARDEF1

SY(SELECT) Draw the selected symbol at the calling object's location.

Exit Procedure Symbolization is finished

Figure 37 Loop for each co-located point object

act For each co-located point obj ect

Does the point object
LOOP entry represent the floating
point platform?

[Yes]

For each point object which is

located at the same position as
the object which is calling this FLOATING=TRUE
[No]
procedure perform this loop:

continue break

LOOP entry point The point object which is located at the same position as the object
which is calling this procedure.
Does the point object Is the point object of a class which represents a floating platform:
represent the floating 'LITFLT', 'LITVES' or 'BOY...' or MORFAC with CATMOR=7?
platform?
continue If ‘No’, get the next point object
FLOATING=TRUE Set the local variable 'FLOATING' equal to TRUE.
break Stop examining point objects at the same location.

199
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.19 Conditional Symbology Procedure UDWHAZ05

Applies to: Underwater hazards of all kinds encoded by S-57 Object Class:
“obstruction” (OBSTRN), “underwater rock” (UWTROC) and “wreck”
(WRECKS).

Spatial Object(s): Point, Line, Area

Spatial Operations used: adjacency, intersection or coverage of areas and areas with
line; location of point objects within areas

Attribute(s) used: "depth range value1" (DRVAL1); water level effect (WATLEV)

ECDIS Parameter(s):SAFETY_CONTOUR (SFC) depth value selected by the mariner;

DEPTH_VALUE passed in by calling procedure.
SHOW_ISOLATED_DANGERS_IN_SHALLOW_WATERS (sub
procedure?).
The manufacturer is responsible for setting the SAFETY_CONTOUR
to 30 meters (see also conditional symbology procedure
“DEPAREnn”). This value must stay in operation until the mariner
decides to select another safety contour.

Defaults: Display Priority given by look-up table;

OVERRADAR priority given by look-up table;
Display Category given by look-up table;
Viewing Group given by look-up table.

Remarks: This procedure covers “Isolated dangers in general that endanger own
ship (S-57)” (def?) (Note that this is a sub procedure called by
OBSTRNnn and WRECKSnn). Obstructions or isolated underwater
dangers of depths less than the safety contour which lie within the safe
waters defined by the safety contour are to be presented by a specific
isolated danger symbol as hazardous objects. They are then put in
IMO category “DISPLAY BASE” (see IMO Performance Standards for
ECDIS [2]).
In addition, if the mariner selects the option "show isolated dangers in
shallow water", this procedure will highlight with the isolated danger
symbol all rocks, wrecks, obstructions, which lie in 'unsafe' shallow
waters between the safety contour and the drying line, putting them in
IMO category STANDARD. This option is provided in case the mariner
is forced by circumstances to navigate in waters shallower than the
safety contour shown on the display (for example, if the safety contour
should default to a value much deeper than that preferred by the
mariner).

Note: In this procedure the term “safety contour” refers to the safety contour
selected by the mariner, as distinct from the safety contour shown on
the display (which may be a default value).

200
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 38 UDWHAZ05 conditional symbology sub-procedure

act UDWHAZ05 conditional symbology sub-procedure

Get the Calling

DANGER = FALSE
Obj ect
Entry point

DEPTH_VALUE <=
SAFETY_CONTOUR?
«loop»
[No] For each occurrence of the underlying
[Yes]
return message area obj ect
"isolated danger [Setup]
symbol is not
required" Collect all underlying area
DEPARE & DRGARE obj ects

[Test]
While DANGER == FALSE OR
there is an unprocessed
DEPARE/DRGARE obj ect

'WATLEV' == 1 || DANGER ==
'WATLEV' == 2? [Body]
TRUE?
Set DANGER = TRUE if there
[Yes] [Yes] is the deeper underlying
obj ect

[No]
No Isolated Danger.
Display Base category.
DIsplay_Priority = 8, SHOW_ISOLATED_DANGER_
View ing_Group=14050. IN_SHALLOW_WATER == 'ON'?
[No]
[No] return message
[Yes] "isolated
danger symbol
is not required"

return message UDWHAZ05

"isolated Continuation A
danger symbol
is not required"
SELECT=
'ISODGR01'

The object is an isolated underwater

danger located within a depth area
equal to or greater than the
Display Base category. SAFETY_CONTOUR.
SCAMIN = infinite, The depth of the hazardous object is
Display_Priority=8, equal or shallower than the chosen
Radar_Flag='O', SAFETY_CONTOUR.
View ing_Group=14010 Thus, the object has to be presented
by the 'Isolated Danger Symbol'.

return isolated
danger symbol

201
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Entry point The calling object and the local variable 'DEPTH_VALUE' are
passed from the calling procedure.
Get the Calling Object Get the object which is calling this procedure
DANGER = FALSE Set the local variable 'DANGER', which will indicate is the object is
an isolated danger or not, to 'FALSE'.
DEPTH_VALUE <= Is 'DEPTH_VALUE' less than or equal to the value of the
SAFETY_CONTOUR? SAFETY_CONTOUR selected by the mariner?
return message "isolated If ‘No’, return to the calling procedure with the message that
danger symbol is not Isolated Danger Symbol is not required.
required"
Loop for each occurrence For each occurrence of the object classes 'DEPARE' and
of the underlying area 'DRGARE' which intersects or includes the location of this object,
object perform this loop to find out if it deeper than the Safety Contour. If
so, it changes local variable 'DANGER' to TRUE
Setup - Collect all underlying area DEPARE & DRGARE objects;
Test - While DANGER == FALSE OR there is an unprocessed
underlying DEPARE/DRGARE object;
Body - Set DANGER = TRUE if there is the deeper underlying
object
DANGER == TRUE? Is the local variable DANGER equal TRUE?
'WATLEV' == 1 || 'WATLEV' Is the value of attribute 'WATLEV' 1 or 2 in the calling object?
== 2?
No Isolated Danger. Object is an isolated above water danger, and is in own ship safe
Display Base category. water and should be 'DISPLAYBASE' with no isolated danger
DIsplay_Priority = 8, symbol.
Viewing_Group=14050.

Display Category DISPLAYBASE

Display Priority 8
Viewing Group 14050
return message "isolated Return to the calling procedure with the message that Isolated
danger symbol is not Danger Symbol is not required.
required"
SELECT= 'ISODGR01' The object is an isolated underwater danger located within a depth
area equal to or greater than the safety contour.
The depth of the hazardous object is equal or shallower than the
chosen Safety Contour.
Thus, the object has to be presented by the 'Isolated Danger
Symbol'.
Select symbol name 'ISODGR01'
Display Base category. Set SCAMIN (minimum scale) attribute to infinite.
SCAMIN = infinite,
Display_Priority=8, Display Category DISPLAYBASE
Radar_Flag='O', Display Priority 8
Viewing_Group=14010 Radar Flag OVERRADAR
Viewing Group 14010
return isolated danger Return to the calling procedure with the message that Isolated
symbol Danger Symbol is to be drawn. Also return the selected symbol
name and presentation parameters.
SHOW_ISOLATED_DANGE Has the mariner selected
R_ IN_SHALLOW_WATER 'SHOW_ISOLATED_DANGER_IN_SHALLOW_WATER' option?
== 'ON'?
UDWHAZ05 Continuation A UDWHAZ05 Continuation A
return message "isolated Return to the calling procedure with the message that Isolated
danger symbol is not Danger Symbol is not required.
required"

202
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 39 Loop for each occurrence of the underlying deep area object DEPARE,DRGARE

act Loop for each occurrence of the underlying deep area obj ect DEPARE,DRGARE
LOOP Entry
point

Has value DRVAL1 >=

('DRVAL1')? SAFETY_CONTOUR?
Get 'DRVAL1' DANGER = TRUE
[Yes] [Yes]

[No] [No]

continue continue break

the loop

LOOP Entry point The area DEPARE or DRGARE object which intersects or includes
the location of the calling object.
Get 'DRVAL1' Get the attribute 'DRVAL1' value of the examined object 'DEPARE'
or 'DRGARE'.
Has value ('DRVAL1')? Is the value of the attribute DRVAL1 given in the object
DEPARE(DRGARE) ?
continue Get the next object DEPARE or DRGARE which intersects or
includes the location of the calling object because we consider empty
'DRVAL1' or <unknown> as always less than SAFETY_CONTOUR
DRVAL1 >= Is the value of the attribute 'DRVAL1' greater than or equal to the
SAFETY_CONTOUR? value of the SAFETY_CONTOUR?
continue Get the next object DEPARE or DRGARE which intersects or
includes the location of the calling object because the current one is
shallower SAFETY_CONTOUR.
DANGER = TRUE Set value of the local variable DANGER equal to TRUE.
break the loop Stop examining area objects. End loop.

203
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 40 UDWHAZ05 Continuation A

act UDWHAZ05 Continuation A

Entry point

«loop»
For each occurrence of the underlying
area obj ect
[Setup]

Collect all underlying area

DEPARE & DRGARE obj ects

[Test]

While DANGER == FALSE OR

there is an unprocessed DANGER == TRUE?
DEPARE/DRGARE obj ect
[No]
return message
[Body] "isolated danger
Set DANGER = TRUE if the symbol is not
calling obj ect lies betw een required"
'0'm and SFC.
[Yes]

'WATLEV' == 1 ||
No Isolated Danger, The object is an isolated
'WATLEV' == 2?
Display Standard category, underwater danger in waters
Display_Priority=8, between the SAFETY_CONTOUR
[Yes]
View ing_Group= 24050. and the zero metre contour, and
the mariner has selected the
[No]
'SHOW ISOLATED DANGERS IN
SHALLOW WATER' option.
The depth of the dangerous
object is equal to or shallower
return message SELECT =
'ISODGR01' than the Safety Contour selected
"isolated by the mariner.
danger symbol
Thus the object has to be
is not required" presented by the 'Isolated Danger
Symbol'.

Then object is an isolated

above water danger in waters
between the zero metre contour Display Standard category,
and the Safety Contour and Display_Priority=8,
should not be displayed with an Radar_Flag='O',
isolated danger symbol. Viw ing_Group=24020

return isolated
danger symbol

Entry point The calling object and the local variable 'DANGER' are passed from
the calling procedure.

204
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Loop for each occurrence of For each occurrence of the object classes 'DEPARE' and 'DRGARE'
the underlying area object which intersects or includes the location of this object, perform this
loop to find out if it lies between the zero metre contour and the
Safety Contour.
Setup - Collect all underlying area DEPARE & DRGARE objects;
Test - While DANGER == FALSE OR there is an unprocessed
underlying DEPARE/DRGARE object;
Body - Set DANGER = TRUE if the calling object lies between '0'm
and SAFETY CONTOUR.
DANGER == TRUE? Is the local variable DANGER equal TRUE?
return message "isolated If ‘No’, return to the calling procedure with the message that Isolated
danger symbol is not Danger Symbol is not required.
required"
'WATLEV' == 1 || 'WATLEV' Is the value of attribute 'WATLEV' equal to 1 or 2 in the calling
== 2? object?
No Isolated Danger, Display Then object is an isolated above water danger in waters between the
Standard category, zero metre contour and the Safety Contour and should not be
Display_Priority=8, displayed with an isolated danger symbol.
Viewing_Group= 24050. Display Category STANDARD
Display Priority 8
Viewing Group 24050
return message "isolated Return to the calling procedure with the message that Isolated
danger symbol is not Danger Symbol is not required.
required"
SELECT = 'ISODGR01' The object is an isolated underwater danger in waters between the
Safety Contour and the zero metre contour, and the mariner has
selected the 'Show isolated dangers in shallow water' option.
The depth of the dangerous object is equal to or shallower than the
Safety Contour selected by the mariner.
Thus the object has to be presented by the 'Isolated Danger Symbol'.
Display Standard category, Set presentation parameters of the calling object :
Display_Priority=8, Display Category STANDARD
Radar_Flag='O', Display Priority 8
Viwing_Group=24020 Radar Flag OVERRADAR
Viewing Group 24020
return isolated danger Return to the calling procedure with the message that the Isolated
symbol Danger Symbol is to be shown. Also return the Selected symbol and
the parameters of presentation.

Figure 41 Loop for each occurrence of the underlying shallow area object DEPARE, DRGARE

act Loop for each occurrence of the underlying shallow area obj ect DEPARE, DRGARE
LOOP Entry
Point

Has value DRVAL1 >= 0 && DRVAL1

('DRVAL1')? < SAFETY_CONTOUR?
Get 'DRVAL1' DANGER = TRUE
[Yes] [Yes]

[No] [No]

continue continue break

the loop

205
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
LOOP Entry Point The area DEPARE or DRGARE object which intersects or includes
the location of the calling object.
Get 'DRVAL1' Get the attribute 'DRVAL1' value of the examined object 'DEPARE' or
'DRGARE'.
Has value ('DRVAL1')? Is the value of the attribute 'DRVAL1' given in the object
DEPARE(DRGARE) ?
continue If there is no an explicit value, get the next underlying area object. If
the attribute 'DRVAL1' presents but there is no a value, it means that
is intertidal area.
DRVAL1 >= 0 && Is the value of the attribute 'DRVAL1' greater than or equal to the
DRVAL1 < SAFETY_ ZERO metre contour and less than the SAFETY_CONTOUR?
CONTOUR?
continue Get the next underlying area object because the current one is
deeper than SAFETY_CONTOUR.
DANGER = TRUE Object is an isolated danger. Set local variable 'DANGER' to TRUE.
break the loop Stop examining area objects. End loop.

206
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
13.2.20 Conditional Symbology Procedure WRECKS05

Applies to: S-57 Object Class "wrecks" (WRECKS)

Spatial Object(s): Point, Area

Attribute(s) used: "value of sounding" (VALSOU); "category of wreck" (CATWRK); "water

level" (WATLEV); "exposition of sounding" (EXPSOU)

User Parameter(s):

Defaults: Display Priority given by look-up table;

OVERRADAR priority given by look-up table;
Display Category given by look-up table;
Viewing Group given by look-up table;
Area colour fill from underlying DEPARE or UNSARE.

Remarks: Wrecks of depths less than the safety contour which lie within the safe
waters defined by the safety contour are to be presented by a specific
isolated danger symbol and put in IMO category “DISPLAY BASE”
(see IMO Performance Standards for ECDIS [2]). This task is
performed by the sub-procedure “UDWHAZnn” which is called by this
symbology procedure.
CSP "UDWHAZnn" also allows the mariner the option of displaying
isolated dangers in the waters between the safety contour and the
zero metre line.
In the case that the value of attribute VALSOU for the wreck is
unknown, sub-procedure "DEPVALnn” is called. This will provide a
return value for 'LEAST_DEPTH', the default for which is the DRVAL1
of the underlying depth area, but only on condition that the value of
attribute EXPSOU is not 2 (shoaler than the depth area) or unknown,
and the value of attribute WATLEV is 3 (always underwater). For the
case that a wreck of unknown VALSOU lies in deep water, sub-
procedure 'DEPVAL' also provides the DRVAL1 of the underlying
depth area as the 'SEABED_DEPTH' for use in calculating a 'safe
clearance depth' over the wreck in accordance with IHO publication S-
4, appendix to specification B-422.7.

207
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 act WRECKS05 conditional symbology procedure Figure 42 WRECKS05 conditional symbology procedure

Get the Calling

Get 'VALSOU'
Obj ect
Entry point
Has value
('VALSOU')? Get 'WATLEV';
LEAST_DEPTH = 'unknow n';
Get 'EXPSOU';
[Yes] [No] SEABED_DEPTH = 'unknow n'
Get 'CATWRK';

LEAST_DEPTH
== 'unknown'? DEPVAL02
DEPTH_VALUE =
(WATLEV, EXPSOU)
LEAST_DEPTH [No]
[Yes]
Has value Has value
('WATLEV')? ('CATWRK')?

[Yes] [No] [Yes]

[No]

'WATLEV'
'CATWRK' == 1?
== 3 || 5?
[No] [No]
[Yes]
[Yes]

DEPTH_VALUE = DEPTH_VALUE
DEPTH_VALUE = -15 = 20.1
'VALSOU';
View ing_Group=34051
SEABED_DEPTH
== 'unknown'?
LEAST_DEPTH =
DEPTH_VALUE = 0 SEABED_DEPTH - 66.0 [No]

SNDFRM03 LEAST_DEPTH < 20.1?

(DEPTH_VALUE)
[No] [Yes]

[Yes] DEPTH_VALUE =
LEAST_DEPTH

Perform the symbology procedure Perform the symbology

'UDWHAZ04' which returns a flag procedure 'QUAPNT02'
indicating whether or not to display which returns a flag
the 'Isolated Danger' symbol. indicating whether or not to
UDWHAZ04 Pass 'DEPTH_VALUE' on to it QUAPNT02 display the 'Low Accuracy'
(DEPTH_VALUE) symbol, also return the
selected symbol

Has 'UDWHAZ04' indicated

WRECKS05 'Isolated Danger Symbol'? Is Point? WRECKS05
Continuation A Continuation B
[No] [Yes] [No]
[Yes]

Does 'QUAPNT02'
return 'LOWACC01'?
SY(ISODGR01)
[No]

[Yes] Exit Procedure

SY(LOWACC01)

208
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Entry point Entry to the continuation of symbology procedure with a object,
wrecks (WRECKS)
Get the Calling Object Get the object which is calling this procedure.
Get 'VALSOU' Get the value of the attribute 'Value of sounding' (VALSOU) of the
calling object
Has value ('VALSOU')? Is the value of the attribute 'VALSOU' given?
DEPTH_VALUE = 'VALSOU'; Set the local variable 'DEPTH_VALUE' equal to 'VALSOU'.
Viewing_Group=34051 Set the viewing group to 34051 for all presentation object.
SNDFRM04 perform the symbology sub-procedure 'SNDFRM03' which
(DEPTH_VALUE) symbolizes depth values.
Pass 'DEPTH_VALUE' and the calling object on to it.
A list of symbols is returned. Remember the Sounding Symbol(s)
DEPTH_VALUE Input parameter
Sounding Symbols List Output parameter
LEAST_DEPTH = Set the local variable 'LEAST_DEPTH' equal to 'unknown' value.
'unknown'; Set the local variable 'SEABED_DEPTH' equal to 'unknown' value.
SEABED_DEPTH =
'unknown'
Get 'WATLEV'; Get Get the value of the attributes 'Water level effect' (WATLEV),
'EXPSOU'; Get 'CATWRK'; 'Exposition of sounding' (EXPSOU) and 'Category of wreck'
(CATWRK) of the calling object.
DEPVAL02 (WATLEV, Performs the symbology sub-procedure 'DEPVAL02' which returns a
EXPSOU) value for the local variables 'LEAST_DEPTH' and 'SEABED_DEPTH'.
Pass attributes 'WATLEV and EXPSOU' on to it.
WATLEV Input parameter
EXPSOU Input parameter
LEAST_DEPTH Output parameter
SEABED_DEPTH Output parameter
LEAST_DEPTH == Is the value of the local variable 'LEAST_DEPTH' equal to 'unknown'?
'unknown'?
DEPTH_VALUE = Set the local variable 'DEPTH_VALUE' equal to the local variable
LEAST_DEPTH 'LEAST_DEPTH'.
Has value ('CATWRK')? Is the value of the attribute 'CATWRK' given?
'CATWRK' == 1? Does the value of the attribute 'CATWRK' = 1 (non-dangerous
wreck)?
DEPTH_VALUE = 20.1 Set value of the local variable 'DEPTH_VALUE' equal to 20.1 m
SEABED_DEPTH == Is the local variable 'SEABED_DEPTH' equal to 'unknown'?
'unknown'?
LEAST_DEPTH = Set the local variable 'LEAST_DEPTH' equal to (SEABED_DEPTH -
SEABED_DEPTH - 66.0 66.0)
LEAST_DEPTH < 20.1? Is the local variable 'LEAST_DEPTH' less than 20.1?
DEPTH_VALUE = Set the local variable 'DEPTH_VALUE' equal to 'LEAST_DEPTH'
LEAST_DEPTH
Has value ('WATLEV')? Is the value of the attribute 'WATLEV' given?
'WATLEV' == 3 || 5? Is the attribute 'WATLEV' value equal to 3 (always underwater) or 5
(awash of low water)?
Else 'WATLEV' is equal to other values.
DEPTH_VALUE = 0 IF 'WATLEV'='3' (always underwater) or 'WATLEV'='5' (... at low
water)
THEN set value of the local variable 'DEPTH_VALUE' equal to '0'.
DEPTH_VALUE = -15 If 'WATLEV' is unknown/undefined OR 'WATLEV' is not equal '3' or '5'
OR 'CATWRK' is not equal '1', set value of the local variable
'DEPTH_VALUE' equal to '-15'm
UDWHAZ05 Performs the symbology sub-procedure 'UDWHAZ05' which returns a
(DEPTH_VALUE) flag indicating whether or not to display the ISOLATED DANGER
SYMBOL [IMO PS App.2 1.3] and the selected symbol.
Pass 'DEPTH_VALUE' on to it.

209
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Return: selected symbol name 'ISODGR01';
Parameters presentation: SCAMIN, DISPLAY MODE, PRIORITY,
RADAR FLAG, VIEWING GROUP if they are changed.
DEPTH_VALUE Input parameter
'Isolated Danger Symbol' Output parameter
QUAPNT02 Perform the symbology sub-procedure 'QUAPNT02' which returns a
flag indicating whether or not to display the low accuracy symbol and
returns the selected symbol 'LOWACC01'
'Low Accuracy Symbol' Output parameter
Is Point? Is the calling object of type point?
WRECKS05 Continuation B Area objects, wrecks (WRECKS). Pass the list of selected symbols
from 'UDWHAZ05', 'SNDFRM04' and 'QUAPNT02' sup-procedures,
values of 'VALSOU' attribute if they are.
Has 'UDWHAZ05' indicated Has the procedure 'UDWHAZ05' indicated that the isolated danger
'Isolated Danger Symbol'? symbol shall be drawn?
WRECKS05 Continuation A Symbolization of point objects "wreck" (WRECKS) without 'Isolated
Danger Symbol'.
Pass the list of selected symbols from SNDFRM04 and QUAPNT02
sup-procedures, values of 'VALSOU' attribute if they are.
SY(ISODGR01) Draw the selected symbol 'ISODGR01'
(isolated danger) at the calling object's location.
Does 'QUAPNT02' return Is the symbol 'LOWACC01' selected by the procedure 'QUAPNT02'?
'LOWACC01'?
SY(LOWACC01) If so indicated by the procedure 'QUAPNT02', draw the returned low
accuracy symbol 'LOWACC01' at the calling object's location.
Exit Procedure Symbolization is finished.

210
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 43 WRECKS05 Continuation A

act WRECKS05 Continuation A

Has value 'VALSOU' <=
('VALSOU')? SAFETY DEPTH?

[Yes] [No]
Entry point
[No] [Yes]

Draw Appropriate
Symbol. SY(...) SY(DANGER01) SY(DANGER02)

Draw Sounding
Symbol(s)

Does 'QUAPNT02'
return 'LOWACC01'?

[No]
Exit
[Yes] Procedure
SY(LOWACC01)

Perform Look-up table symbolization to draw symbol.

"WRECKS","","SY(WRECKS05)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","CATWRK1WATLEV3","SY(WRECKS04)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","CATWRK2WATLEV3","SY(WRECKS05)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","CATWRK4","SY(WRECKS01)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","CATWRK5","SY(WRECKS01)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV1","SY(WRECKS01)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV2","SY(WRECKS01)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV3","SY(WRECKS01)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV4","SY(WRECKS01)","4","O","OTHER","34050"

Entry point The calling object and lists of selected symbols from SNDFRM04
and QUAPNT02 sup-procedures are passed from the calling
procedure.
Has value ('VALSOU')? Is the value of the attribute 'VALSOU' given?
'VALSOU' <= SAFETY Is the value of the attribute 'VALSOU' less than or equal to SAFETY
DEPTH? DEPTH?
SY(DANGER01) Draw the symbol 'DANGER01' at the calling object's location.
SY(DANGER02) Draw the symbol 'DANGER02' at the calling object's location.
Draw Sounding Symbol(s) Draw the sounding symbol(s) returned from 'SNDFRM04' on top at
the calling object's location.
Draw Appropriate Symbol. Perform Look-up table symbolization to draw symbol.
SY(...) The values of presentation parameters ( Display Priority; Over Radar
Flag; Display Category and Viewing Group) must be taken in
according to assigned values in 'UDWHAZ05' sub-procedure or
default values:

"WRECKS","","SY(WRECKS05)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","CATWRK1WATLEV3","SY(WRECKS04)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","CATWRK2WATLEV3","SY(WRECKS05)","4","O","OTHER","34050"

211
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 "WRECKS","CATWRK4","SY(WRECKS01)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","CATWRK5","SY(WRECKS01)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV1","SY(WRECKS01)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV2","SY(WRECKS01)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV3","SY(WRECKS01)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV4","SY(WRECKS01)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
Does 'QUAPNT02' return Is the symbol 'LOWACC01' selected by the procedure 'QUAPNT02'?
'LOWACC01'?
SY(LOWACC01) If so indicated by the procedure 'QUAPNT02', draw the returned low
accuracy symbol 'LOWACC01' at the calling object's location.
Exit Procedure Symbolization is Finished

212
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 44 WRECKS05 Continuation B

act WRECKS05 Continuation B

«loop»
Loop for each spatial component
of area WRECKS
[Setup]
The calling Obj ect
AND result of
'UDWHAZ04'
Has value
('VALSOU')?
Draw Appropriate
[Test]
While there is Area, AC(...)
[No]
unprocessed spatial
Entry point
component

[Body]
Symbolize spatail [Yes]
components

Has 'UDWHAZ04' indicated

'Isolated Danger Symbol'?

[No]
[Yes]
Has 'UDWHAZ04' indicated
'Isolated Danger Symbol'?
Draw Sounding
SY(ISODGR01)
Symbol(s) [Yes]

[No]

Does 'QUAPNT02' return

'LOWACC01'?
SY(LOWACC01)
[Yes]

[No]

Exip
Procedure Perform Look-up table symbolization to draw colour filling of the
calling object:
The values of presentation parameters ( Display Priority; Over
Radar Flag; Display Category and Viewing Group) must be taken
in according to assigned values in 'UDWHAZ04' sub-procedure or
default values:

"WRECKS","","AC(DEPVS)","4","S","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV1","AC(CHBRN)","4","S","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV2","AC(CHBRN)","4","S","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV4","AC(DEPIT)","4","S","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV5","AC(DEPVS)","4","S","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV3","AC(DEPVS)","4","S","OTHER","34050"

Entry point The calling object and lists of selected symbols from SNDFRM04,
UDWHAZ05 and QUAPNT02 sup-procedures are passed from the
calling procedure.

213
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Loop for each spatial For each spatial component of area WRECKS perform this loop.
component of area Setup - The Calling Object AND results of 'UDWHAZ05'
WRECKS Test - While there is unprocessed spatial component
Body - to symbolize a spatial component if it is needed.
Has value ('VALSOU')? Is the value of the attribute 'VALSOU' given?
Has 'UDWHAZ05' indicated Has the procedure 'UDWHAZ05' indicated that the isolated danger
'Isolated Danger Symbol'? symbol shall be shown?
SY(ISODGR01) Draw the selected symbol 'ISODGR01' returned by 'UDWHAZ05' in
the centre of the area.
Draw Sounding Symbol(s) Draw the sounding symbol(s) returned from 'SNDFRM04' at the
centre of the area
Draw Appropriate Area, Perform Look-up table symbolization to draw colour filling of the
AC(...) calling object.
The values of presentation parameters ( Display Priority; Over Radar
Flag; Display Category and Viewing Group) must be taken in
according to assigned values in 'UDWHAZ05' sub-procedure or
default values:

"WRECKS","","AC(DEPVS)","4","S","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV1","AC(CHBRN)","4","S","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV2","AC(CHBRN)","4","S","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV4","AC(DEPIT)","4","S","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV5","AC(DEPVS)","4","S","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV3","AC(DEPVS)","4","S","OTHER","34050"
Has 'UDWHAZ05' indicated Has the procedure 'UDWHAZ05 indicated that the isolated danger
'Isolated Danger Symbol'? symbol shall be shown?
Does 'QUAPNT02' return Has the procedure 'QUAPNT02' indicated that the quality of position
'LOWACC01'? symbol shall be shown?
SY(LOWACC01) Draw the selected symbol 'LOWACC01' returned by 'QUAPNT02' in
the centre of the area.
Exit Procedure Symbolization is finished

214
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Figure 45 Loop for each spatial component of area WRECKS

act Loop for each spatial component of area WRECKS

LOOP
Entry point
For each spatial component of the
Get the Spatial
object, perform this loop:
Component

'QUAPOS' != 1
Has value && 10 && 11?
('QUAPOS')? Symbolize Spatial
Component.
[Yes] [Yes] LC(LOWACC41)
continue
[No]
[No]
Has 'UDWHAZ04' indicated
'Isolated Danger Symbol'?
Symbolize Spatial
Component.
[Yes] LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK)
[No]

'VALSOU' <= Has value

SAFETY_DEPTH? ('VALSOU')?

[Yes] [Yes] [No] continue

[No]

Symbolize Spatial Symbolize Spatial

Symbolize Spatial
Component. Component.
Component. LS(...)
LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK) LS(DASH,2,CHBLK)

Perform Look-up table symbolization to draw the area boundary spatial

component.

continue "WRECKS","","LS(DOTT, 2, CSTLN)","4","O","OTHER","34050"

"WRECKS","WATLEV1","LS(SOLD,2, CSTLN)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV2","LS(SOLD,2, CSTLN)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV4","LS(DASH, 2, CSTLN)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV5","LS(DOTT, 2, CSTLN)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV3","LS(DOTT, 2, CSTLN)","4","O","OTHER","34050"

LOOP Entry point The spatial components of the calling object.

Get the Spatial Component Get the next spatial object (edge) of the calling object.
Has value ('QUAPOS')? Is the spatial attribute 'QUAPOS' given?
'QUAPOS' != 1 && 10 && Does the value of attribute 'QUAPOS' equal to neither of the
11? following values: '1', '10', and '11'?
Symbolize Spatial Symbolize the area boundary spatial component with
Component. 'LC(LOWACC41)'
LC(LOWACC41)
continue go to the next spatial component.
Has 'UDWHAZ05' indicated Has the procedure 'UDWHAZ05' indicated that the isolated danger
'Isolated Danger Symbol'? symbol shall be shown?
Symbolize Spatial Symbolize the area boundary spatial component with a dotted line, 2
Component. units wide, colour 'CHBLK'

215
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK) The values of presentation parameters ( Display Priority; Radar Flag;
Display Category and Viewing Group) must be taken in according to
assigned values in 'UDWHAZ05' sub-procedure.

continue go to the next spatial component.

Has value ('VALSOU')? Is the value of the attribute 'VALSOU' given?
'VALSOU' <= Is the value of the attribute 'VALSOU' less than or equal to
SAFETY_DEPTH? SAFETY_DEPTH?
Symbolize Spatial Symbolize the area boundary spatial component with a dotted line, 2
Component. units wide, colour 'CHBLK'
LS(DOTT,2,CHBLK)
Symbolize Spatial Symbolize the area boundary spatial component with a dashed line,
Component. 2 units wide, colour 'CHBLK'
LS(DASH,2,CHBLK)
Symbolize Spatial Perform Look-up table symbolization to draw the area boundary
Component. LS(...) spatial component.

"WRECKS","","LS(DOTT, 2, CSTLN)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV1","LS(SOLD,2, CSTLN)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV2","LS(SOLD,2, CSTLN)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV4","LS(DASH, 2, CSTLN)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV5","LS(DOTT, 2, CSTLN)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
"WRECKS","WATLEV3","LS(DOTT, 2, CSTLN)","4","O","OTHER","34050"
continue go to the next spatial component.

216
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
14 Tables
14.1 Colour Tables

The colour tables are designed for different conditions of ambient illumination on the bridge.

The colours are defined in CIE (Commission Internationale de l'Eclairage) values. The
ECDIS manufacturer is responsible for computing the correct RGB values for the monitor he
uses, from CIE values.

ECDIS manufacturers must refer to section 4 of S-52 for details for the design and use of the
colour tables.

There are 63 colours in these tables. With the addition of the transparent colour (TRNSP)
there are 64 colour tokens.

14.2 Viewing Group Layers

Numbering scheme for viewing groups (Mariners' information in italics)

DISPLAY BASE STANDARD DISPLAY OTHER INFORMATION

00000-09999 reserved for administrative purposes
10000 reserved 20000 reserved 30000 reserved
40000 reserved 50000 reserved 60000 reserved
11000 A,B information about the 21000 A,B 31000 A,B
chart display 51000 tool 61000 tools
41000 tools

12000 C, D, E, F land features 22000 C, D, E, F 32000 C, D, E, F

42000 own ship, planned route 52000 own ship etc. 62000 own ship etc.

13000 H, I depths & currents 23000 H,I 33000 H,I

43000 Mariners' features 53000 Mariners' features 63000 Mariners' features

14000 J,K,L obstructions, 24000 J,K,L 34000 J,K,L

pipelines 54000 other vessels 64000 other vessels
44000 other vessels
15000 M traffic, routes 25000 M 35000 M
45000 manufacturers' features 55000 manufacturers' 65000 manufacturers’
features features

16000 N special areas 26000 N 36000 N

46000 Mariners' assignments 56000 Mariners' 66000 Mariners'
assignments assignments

17000 P,Q,R,S buoys, beacons, 27000 P,Q,R,S 37000 P,Q,R,S

lights, radar 57000 reserved 67000 reserved
47000 reserved for Mariners'
information
18000 T,U services & small craft 28000 T,U 38000 T,U
facilities 58000 reserved 68000 reserved

217
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
48000 reserved for Mariners'
information

19000-19999 reserved 29000-29999 reserved 39000-39999 reserved

49000-49999 reserved 59000-59999 reserved 69000-69999 reserved
70000-99999 reserved for future
use.

Note: These viewing groups reflect the display category, but they do not set it. Display
Category is set by field 6 of the look-up table.

Gaps between sets and groups have been left deliberately to allow for future expansion. "na"
means that a particular set or group is not yet assigned

218
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
CHART INFORMATION - DISPLAY BASE

RESERVED
10000-10999 Reserved for chart information
A, B CHART FURNITURE
11000 Information about the Chart Display
11010 cursor [symbol SY(CURSRA01)]
11020 na (not assigned)
11030 scalebar, latitude scale [SY(SCALEB10),SY( SCALEB11)]
11040 north arrow [SY(NORTHAR1)]
11050 no data [colour NODTA, AP(NODATA03)], unsurveyed (UNSARE),
incompletely surveyed area
11060 Non-HO data boundary LC(NONHODAT)
C, D, E, F TOPOGRAPHY AND INFRASTRUCTURE
12000 Land area
12010 land area (LANDARE)
12200 Dangers above water
12210 bridge (BRIDGE), pylon (PYLONS), overhead cable (CBLOHD), conveyor
(CONVYR), overhead pipeline (PIPOHD), offshore platform (OFSPLF)
12400 Shoreline
12410 coastline (COALNE), ice shelf, glacier (ICEARE), shoreline construction
(SLCONS), tie-up wall, dolphin (MORFAC), gate (GATCON, pile (PILPNT),
crib, wellhead, ice boom (OBSTRN), floating dock (FLODOC), hulk
(HULKES), pontoon (PONTON), oil boom (OILBAR), log boom (LOGPON),
flood barrage (DAMCON, CATDAM3)
12420 dock (DOCARE), lock (LOKBSN), canal (CANALS), river (RIVERS)
H, I HYDROGRAPHY
13000 Safety Contour
13010 safety contour (from conditional symbology procedure DEPCNT03)
13020 na
13030 depth area (DEPARE), dredged area (DRGARE),
J, K, L SUBSEA FEATURES
14000 Dangers under water
14010 isolated underwater dangers in water deeper than the displayed safety
contour (rocks, wrecks, obstructions, mooring cables from conditional
symbology procedure)
M TRACKS AND ROUTES
15000-15999 na (not assigned)
N SPECIAL AREAS
16000-16999 na (not assigned)
P, Q, R, S AIDS TO NAVIGATION
17000-17999 na (not assigned)
T, U SERVICES
18000-18999 na (not assigned)
RESERVED
19000-19999 Reserved for chart information

The groupings are given to illustrate the contents of the Display Base. All objects of this
category must be permanently retained on the ECDIS display.

219
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
CHART INFORMATION - STANDARD DISPLAY

RESERVED
20000 Reserved for chart information
A, B INFORMATION ABOUT THE CHART DISPLAY
21000 Information about the Chart Display
21010 Unknown object (magenta question mark)
21020 Generic Object (NEWOBJ01)
21030 Chart scale boundary, overscale data [AP(OVERSCO1)]
21040 na
21050 na
21060 Place-holder for geographic names (LNDRGN, SEAARE)
C, D, E, F NATURAL & MAN-MADE FEATURES, PORT FEATURES
22000 Major Coastal Features
22010 Lake (LAKARE), sloping ground (SLOGRD), slope top (SLOTOP), dyke
(DYKCON), causeway (CAUSWY), dam (DAMCON),
22200 Conspicuous landmarks:
22210 Radar conspicuous object - (any object with attribute CONRAD 1)

22220 Visually conspicuous object (any object with attribute CONVIS 1)

22230 na
22240 Built up area (BUAARE)
H, I DEPTHS, CURRENTS, etc.
23000 Depths
23010 Area of depth less than the safety contour (DIAMON01 pattern)
23020 na
23030 Swept area (SWPARE)
J, K, L SEABED, OBSTRUCTIONS, PIPELINES
24000 Seabed dangers
24010 Mooring cables (MORFAC, CATMOR6), (CBLSUB, CATCBL6), tunnel on
Seabed (TUNNEL, BURDEP=0), sandwaves (SNDWAV)
M TRAFFIC ROUTES
25000 Routes and Tracks
25010 Leading line, clearing line (NAVLNE), traffic lane (TSSLPT), deep water route
(DWRTPT), traffic separation area (TSEZNE), traffic separation line (TSELNE),
traffic roundabout (TSSRON), traffic crossing (TSSCRS), precautionary area
(PRCARE), traffic separation scheme boundary (TSSBND), deep water route
centre line (DWRTCL), two way route part (TWRTPT), inshore traffic zone
(ISTZNE).
25020 Recommended track (RECTRC), recommended traffic lane (RCTLPT),
recommended route centreline (RCRTCL)
25030 Ferry route (FERYRT)
25040 Radar line (RADLNE), limit of shore radar (RADRNG)
25060 Radio calling in point (RDOCAL)

220
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
N SPECIAL AREAS
26000 Restricted and Cautionary Areas
26010 Restricted area (RESARE)
26020 na
26030 na
26040 Submarine transit lane (SUBTLN), military practice area (MIPARE), sea
plane landing area (SPLARE), offshore production area (OSPARE)
26050 Fairway (FAIRWY)
26150 Caution area (CTNARE)
26200 Information Areas. Protected Areas
26210 Fishing ground (FSHGRD), marine farm (MARCUL),Fishing
Facility(FSHFAC)
26220 Anchorage area (ACHARE), anchor berth (ACHBRT),
26230 na
26240 Dumping ground (DMPGRD),
26250 Cargo transhipment (CTSARE), incineration (ICNARE)
26260 Archipelagic sea lane (ASLXIS, ARCSLN)
P, Q, R, S BUOYS & BEACONS, LIGHTS, FOG SIGNALS, RADAR
27000 Buoys, Beacons, Topmarks, Lights, Fog Signals
27010 Buoy (BOYxxx), light float (LITFLT), mooring buoy (MORFAC, CATMOR7)
27011 Light vessel (LITVES)
27020 Beacon (BCNxxx)
27025 Daymark (DAYMAR)
27030 Distance mark (DISMAR)
27040 Direction of buoyage IALA buoyage regions (M_NSYS)
27050 topmarks (TOPMAR) - for paper chart symbols
27060 gridiron (GRIDRN)
27070 light (LIGHTS)
27080 fog signal (FOGSIG), retro-reflector (RETRFL)
27200 Radar
27210 racon (RTPBCN)
27220 na
27230 radar reflector (RADRFL)
T, U SERVICES & SMALL CRAFT FACILITIES
28000 Services
28010 pilot boarding point (PILBOP)
28020 signal station, traffic (SISTAT), sig. stn. warning (SISTAW)
RESERVED
29000 reserved for chart information

OTHER CHART INFORMATION

RESERVED
30000 reserved for chart information
A, B INFORMATION ABOUT THE CHART DISPLAY
31000 Information about the Chart Display
31010 accuracy of data (M_ACCY), survey reliability (M_SREL), quality of data
(M_QUAL)

221
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
31011 symbol LOWACC01, identifying low accuracy data, applied to the spatial
object of point and area wrecks, rocks and obstructions and to point land
areas
31020 nautical publication (M_NPUB)
31030 Additional Information INFORM,NINFOM
31031 Additional Documents NTXTDS, TXTDSC, PICREP
31040 data scale and coverage (M_CSCL, M_COVR)
31050 na
31060 na
31070 na
31080 magnetic variation (MAGVAR), local magnetic anomaly (LOCMAG)
C, D, E, F NATURAL & MAN-MADE FEATURES, PORT FEATURES
32000 Natural Features
32010 dunes , hills (SLOGRD), ridge, clifftop (SLOTOP), contours and elevation
(LNDELV)
32020 na
32030 trees , vegetation, mangrove (VEGATN), marsh (LNDRGN)
32040 na
32050 river (RIVERS) or lake (LAKARE); also rapids (RAPIDS), waterfall
(WATFAL)
32060 Na
32070 tideway (TIDWAY)
32080 na
32200 Shore Structures
32210 na
32220 any of the following not classified as CONVIS1 (conspicuous): landmark
(LNDMRK), building (BUISGL), tank, silo, water tower (SILTNK), wall
(FNCLNE), fort (FORSTC)
32230 na
32240 airport (AIRARE), runway (RUNWAY)
32250 railway (RAILWY), road (ROADWY), tunnel (TUNNEL), control point
(CTRPNT)
32260 na
32270 quarry, refinery, power station, tank farm, wind farm, factory, timber yard
(PRDARE)
32280 na
32400 Port Features
32410 harbour type (HRBFAC), customs check point (CHKPNT) [note: "small craft
facilities" (SMCFAC) is in group 38210]
32420 na
32430 na
32440 berth number (BERTHS), mooring facility (such as bollard) (MORFAC), ,
gate (such as lock gate) (GATCON) , dry dock (DRYDOC), crane
(CRANES)
32450 na
32460 na
H, I DEPTHS, CURRENTS ETC
33000 Depths, Currents, Tide rips, etc.
33010 Soundings (SOUNDG)

222
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
33020 depth contours (DEPCNT) other than the safety contour
33021 label for the safety contour
33022 label for contours other than the safety contour
33030 na
33040 water turbulence (WATTUR)
33050 tidal information (T_HMON, T_NHMN, T_TIMS)
33060 current and tidal stream information (CURENT, TS_FEB, TS_PAD,
TS_PNH, TS_PRH, TS_TIS)
J, K, L SEABED, OBSTRUCTIONS, PIPELINES
34000 Seabed Information: rocks, wrecks & obstructions, pipes & cables
34010 nature of seabed (SBDARE)
34020 spring (SPRING), sea weed (WEDKLP)
34030 Pipeline area (PIPARE), cable area (CBLARE)
34040 na
34050 rocks (UWTROC), wrecks (WRECKS), obstructions (OBSTRN), which are
not a danger to own-ship's navigation (these are all Display Base if a
danger to own-ship)
34051 non-dangerous rocks (UWTROC), wrecks (WRECKS) and obstructions
(OBSTRN) which have a VALSOU attribute and are not a danger to own-
ship’s navigation (these objects are all Display Base if a danger to own-
ship)
34060 na
34070 submarine cable (CBLSUB), submarine pipeline (PIPSOL)
M TRAFFIC ROUTES
35000 Routes
35010 na
N SPECIAL AREAS
36000 Administrative Areas, (by cursor enquiry)
36010 continental shelf (COSARE),
36020 harbour area (HRBARE) free port area (FRPARE), customs zone
(CUSZNE)
36030 na
36040 fishery zone (FSHZNE)
36050 contiguous zone (CONZNE), exclusive economic zone (EXEZNE), national
territorial area (NATARE), territorial sea (TESARE), territorial sea baseline
(STSLNE), administration area (ADMARE)
P, Q, R, S BUOYS & BEACONS, LIGHTS, FOG SIGNALS, RADAR
37000-37999 na
T, U SERVICES & SMALL CRAFT FACILITIES
38000 Services
38010 radar station (RADSTA), radio station (RDOSTA)
38020 na
38030 coastguard station (CGUSTA), rescue station (RSCSTA)
38200 Small craft facilities
38210 small craft facilities (SMCFAC)
RESERVED
39000 reserved for chart information

223
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
MARINERS' INFORMATION - DISPLAY BASE

RESERVED
40000 Reserved for Mariners’ information
TOOLS
41000-41999 na
OWN-SHIP, PLANNED ROUTES, PAST TRACKS
42000 Own ship
42010 Own ship (ownship), symbol or scaled version, together with heading line,
beam bearing line and course and speed vector
42200 Selected Planned Route
42210 legline (leglin, select 1), way points (waypnt, select 1)
42220 Course to make good for selected leglines
MARINERS' FEATURES
43000 na
OTHER VESSELS
44000 na
MANUFACTURERS' FEATURES
45000-45999 Manufacturers’ Features
MARINERS' ASSIGNMENTS TO DISPLAY BASE
46000-46999 Mariners' and manufacturers' objects assigned to Display Base by the
Mariner
RESERVED
47000-49999 reserved for Mariners’ information

MARINERS' INFORMATION - STANDARD DISPLAY

RESERVED
50000 reserved for Mariners’ information
TOOLS
51000-51999 na
OWN-SHIP, PLANNED ROUTES, PAST TRACKS
52000 Notations on Selected Planned Route
52010 wheel-over line (wholin), selected route
52020 course to make good on leglines (leglin, select 1) of selected route
52030 planned position (pinpos), distance to go, and other notations on selected
planned route
52200 Alternate Planned Route
52210 leglin (leglin, select 2), waypoint (waypnt, select 2) of alternate planned
route
52220 na
52230 wheel-over line (wholin), alternate route
52240 other notations, alternate route
52400 Past Track
52410 event (events)
52420 na
52430 primary past track (pastrk, catpst 1)
52440 notations on primary past track

224
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
52450 na
52460 secondary past track (pastrk catpst 2)
MARINERS' FEATURES
53000 Mariners' features
53010 danger highlight (dnghlt)
53030 Mariners' information note (marnot catnot 1)
53040 Mariners' cautionary note (marnot catnot 2)
53050 Mariners' feature (marfea)
53060 na
53070 na
53080 tidal current observed (tidcur, catcur 2), tidal current predicted (tidcur,
catcur 1)
OTHER VESSELS
54000 Other Ships
54010 other ships (vessels) from radar
54020 notations on other ships (acqsta)
54030 other ships from other sources or undefined sources

MANUFACTURERS' FEATURES
55000 Manufacturers’ Features
55010 manufacturers' feature (mnufea, catnot 1)
55020 manufacturers' feature (mnufea, catnot 2)
MARINERS' ASSIGNMENTS TO STANDARD DISPLAY
56000-66999 Mariners' and manufacturers' Objects Assigned to Standard Display by the
Mariner
RESERVED
57000-59999 reserved for Mariners’ information

OTHER MARINERS' INFORMATION

RESERVED
60000 reserved for Mariners’ information
TOOLS
61000 Tools
61010 electronic bearing line (ebline), variable range marker (vrmark)
61020 na
61030 range rings (rngrng)
61040 cursor, style B (cursor, cursty2)
61050 cursor reference point (refpnt)
OWN-SHIP, PLANNED ROUTES, PAST TRACKS
62000 Position fixes
62010 position fix (positn)
62020 position line (poslin)
MARINERS' FEATURES
63000-63999 na
OTHER VESSELS
64000-64999 na

225
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
MANUFACTURERS' FEATURES
65000-65999 Manufacturers’ Features
MARINERS' ASSIGNMENTS TO OTHER INFORMATION
66000-66999 Mariners' and manufacturers' objects assigned to other information by the
Mariner
RESERVED
67000-69999 reserved for Mariners’ information

14.3 ECDIS Viewing Group Implementation

For standardization of the ECDIS Human Machine Interface (HMI) and to facilitate generic
training of Mariners as a minimum the following viewing group layers must be implemented
to control display of charted objects. An ECDIS may provide more display on/off controls
than are available in this table, but OEMs must use the viewing group layer names
contained in this table. The viewing group names are derived from the IMO PS.

Viewing Group Name of viewing group layer in the Viewing groups included
Layer ECDIS
1 Display Base 10000 - 19999
Standard Display:
2 Drying line 22010
3 Buoys, beacons, aids to navigation 21020, 22200 – 22240, 27000,
27010, 27011, 27020, 27025,
27040, 27050, 27070, 27080,
27200, 27210, 27230, 27030,
27060
3.1 Buoys, beacons, structures 21010, 21020, 22200 - 22240,
27000-27050, 27080, 27200 –
27230, 27030, 27060
3.2 Lights 27070
4 Boundaries and limits 23030, 26050, 26220, 26240,
26250
5 Prohibited and restricted areas 26000, 26010, 26040
6 Chart scale boundaries 21030
7 Cautionary notes 26150
8 Ships’ routeing systems and ferry 25010-25060
routes
9 Archipelagic sea lanes 26260
10 Miscellaneous Switches on and off all not
covered objects by viewing group
layers 20000-29999
Other
11 Spot soundings 33010
12 Submarine cables and pipelines 34030, 34070
13 All isolated dangers 34050, 34051
14 Magnetic variation 31080
15 Depth contours 33020
16 Seabed 34010, 34020, 33040
17 Tidal 33050, 33060
18 Miscellaneous Switches on and off all not
covered objects by viewing group

226
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 layers 30000-39999 or not
covered cases by independent
mariner selections (see 10.3.4.4)

14.4 Text Groupings

Value of Text Text Group Description S-57 Object and Attribute

Group Acronyms
00-10 reserved for future assignment by
IHO.
IMPORTANT Text
10
11 Vertical Clearance of Bridges BRIDGE, VERCLR, VERCCL
VERCOP, VERCSA
Vertical Clearance of Overhead CBLOHD, VERCLR
Cable
Vertical Clearance of Overhead PIPOHD, VERCLR
Pipeline
Vertical Clearance of Conveyor CONVYR, VERCLR
Bearing of Navline NAVLNE, ORIENT
Recommended Route RCRTCL
Deep Water Route Centreline Line DWRTCL
Recommended Track RECTRC
Name and Communications RDOCAL, OBJNAM,
Channel of Radio Calling-In Point COMCHA
Other Text
20
21 Name or Number of Buoys BOYxxx, OBJNAM
Name or Number of Beacons BCNxxx, OBJNAM
Name or Number Daymarks DAYMAR, OBJNAM
Name or Number Light Vessel LITVES, OBJNAM
Name or Number Light Float LITFLT, OBJNAM
Name or Number Offshore OFSPLF, OBJNAM
Platform
22 Na (Not Allocated)
23 Light Description String
24 Note on chart data (INFORM) or See 10.6.1.1
nautical publication (TXTDSC)
25 Nature of Seabed SBDARE, NATSUR
26 Geographic Names ACHARE, OBJNAM
BRIDGE, OBJNAM
BUAARE, OBJNAM
BUISGL, OBJNAM
DOCARE, OBJNAM
FAIRWY, OBJNAM
LNDARE, OBJNAM
LNDMRK, OBJNAM
LNDRGN, OBJNAM
SEAARE, OBJNAM
TIDEWY, OBJNAM
PILBOP, OBJNAM
27 Value of Magnetic Variation MAGVAR, VALMAG

227
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Value of Swept Depth SWPARE, DRVAL1
28 Height of Islet Or Land Feature LNDARE,HEIGHT
29 Berth Number BERTHS, OBJNAM
ACHBRT, OBJNAM
30 Na
*31 National Language Text NOBJNM
32-49 Reserved For IHO
50-69 Mariners' Text, Including Planned
Speed Etc.
70-79 Manufacturer’s Text
80-99 Future Requirements

14.5 ECDIS Text Group Implementation

To enable the Mariner to make selections regarding the text visible in the chart display the
ECDIS must use the individual text groups collected under text group layer.

For standardization of the ECDIS Human Machine Interface (HMI) and to facilitate generic
training of Mariners as a minimum the following text group layers must be implemented to
control the display of text. An ECDIS may provide more textual on/off controls than are
available in this table, but OEMs must use the names of text group layer contained in this
table.

An example of more detailed selections;

The table has text group layer “Other text”. An OEM may wish to subdivide this category
into “names”, “light description” and “other”.

Text Group Name of Text group layer in the Text groups included
Layer ECDIS
1 Important text 11
2 Other text 20-49, 0-10
2.1 Names 21, 26, 29
2.2 Light description 23
2.3 All other 0-10, 25, 27, 28, 32-49

NOTE: *National text is a supplementary option for ECDIS. If used, the style must be similar
to that of the Presentation Library.

14.6 Abbreviations

The abbreviations in sections 14.6.1 through 14.6.3 are used on the ECDIS display. The
meaning of each abbreviation must be readily available to the mariner through the pick
report.

14.6.1 'TE' text command abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used with the “TE” command word:

Prefixes Suffixes ‘C’ Format Command

bn = beacon (INT1) kn = knots (INT1) % = instruction follows,

228
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
by = buoy deg = degrees %s = text string,
clr = overhead clearance %d = integer number,
clr cl = clearance closed %n.mlf = floating point number
clr op = clearance open with n characters
sf clr = safe clearance (including the deci-
No = number (INT1) mal), m of which
Plt = pilot come after the deci-
Prod = offshore production (INT1) mal point.
LtV = light vessel
Varn = magnetic variation
ch = communication channel
NMT = not more than “CLEARING BEARING”
NLT = not less than “CLEARING BEARING”

14.6.2 Nature of seabed abbreviations ('TX')

The following abbreviations for values of NATSUR - nature of seabed:

Attribute ID Description ECDIS Abbreviation

1 mud M
2 clay Cy
3 silt Si
4 sand S
5 stones St
6 gravel G
7 pebbles P
8 cobbles Cb
9 rock R
11 lava R
14 coral Co
17 shells Sh
18 boulder R

To reduce undue clutter in the ECDIS chart display, it is recommended that ECDIS
manufacturers use the abbreviations of the NATSUR attribute.

The description of the ECDIS abbreviations in 14.6.1 and 14.6.2 must be made available to
the Mariner via the pick report.

14.6.3 Light Description abbreviations

See section 10.6.3 for details.

229
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
15 Symbol Library for use on ECDIS
15.1 Introduction

This 'hard-copy' Symbol Library (Addendum) is a paper based human-readable translation of

the digital Symbol Library in the .DAI file of the PresLib ed 4.0.0 (2014). The digital symbol
library was previously the only source of the IHO ECDIS symbols since the first publication
of the Presentation Library in 1992. From the publication of ed. 3.3 of the PresLib. this 'hard-
copy' becomes the official version and takes priority over the digital version in the case of
any discrepancies.

This section gives a description of the diagrams followed by examples for a point / centred
area symbol, a linestyle symbol and an area pattern symbol.
Approximately 600 individual diagrams of the symbols are contained in the Addendum to the
Presentation Library.

15.2 Symbol Diagrams

15.2.1 Description of the symbol diagrams

Symbol name The name of the symbol is the name used for the call up in
the lookup table, conditional procedure or PresLib Manual..
The symbol of a pattern is the base unit of the pattern which
fills an area. Point symbols are identified by the suffix 'SY',
complex linestyles by 'LC' and area patterns by 'AP'.
Reference number (RN) The reference number is used to link the numbered symbols
on the pages of digital ECDIS Chart 1 (tiff format) to the
diagram in the Symbol Library which specifies their exact
size, shape and colour
Symbol Explanation This short and simple description of the symbol meaning is
used in the response to cursor picking on an object since it
gives the Mariner quick an understandable information which
is not always obvious from the object class and attribute
information
Look-up table affected * This entry indicates the look-up table in which the symbol is
used.
Called by CSP etc. This entry indicates a reference, whether and what CSP or
other procedure calls this symbol to be drawn.
Bounding Box ** The box which exactly encloses the symbol (it is tangential to
the extremities of the symbol) and whose upper left corner is
the origin for the coordinates which describe the symbol. The
column number (x-coordinate) is positive to the right and the
row number (y-coordinate) is positive downwards. (See
section 8, fig. 2)
Pivot Point In drawing the symbol on the display the pivot point is placed
on the actual geographic position of the object being
symbolized. Usually the pivot point is plotted on the diagrams,
but it is not shown when it falls outside the area covered by
the diagram.

For symbols which are rotated by the ORIENT attribute (such

as the traffic arrows, e.g. SY(TSSLPT51)), the symbol is
rotated about the pivot point. For symbols which are offset

230
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 (such as SY(ACHRESnn)), the pivot point is offset from the
bounding box in such a way as to avoid overwriting the
symbol on the master object or any other slave symbol
surrounding it. (See section 8.5.1, fig. 4)
Pivot Point Column / This values in millimetres give the position of the pivot point
Row of the symbol relative to the top left corner of the bounding
box. Column number (horizontal, x coordinate) is positive to
the right and row number (vertical, y coordinate) is positive
downwards.

Column: 2.0 Row: -3.00

Row: 3.00
Column: -4.00

Figure
Example: Pivot point outside of the bounding box Example: Pivot point inside of the bounding box

Width / Height of Bounding This values in millimetre give the size of the Bounding Box.
Box
Width: 4.00

Height: 5.00

Symbol colours This entry gives the colour tokens which are used on this symbol
and an example of the colour using the Day colour table.
Pattern This entry gives a pattern name if there is a specific pattern used for
filling any area of the symbol.
Pattern Type Fill patterns use widely spaced symbols. These symbols may be
drawn either staggered or linear.

Example: staggered Example: linear

Pattern Spacing This entry gives the type of spacing between drawn symbols. The
symbols can be drawn with constant or scale dependent spacing.
The related values are given in Maximum / Minimum Distance.
For Ed. 3.3 as well as for all preceding editions of the PresLib all
pattern symbols are drawn with constant spacing.

231
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 Staggered with constant space=0 Linear with constant space=0

Staggered with constant space>0 Linear with constant space>0

Minimum Distance This value gives the minimum vertical and horizontal distance
between the symbols (including pivot point) drawn, in millimetres.
Maximum Distance This value gives the maximum vertical and horizontal distance
between the symbols (including pivot point) drawn, in millimetres.
This value is only valid in case of Pattern Spacing type scale
dependent spacing.
Comments *** This entry gives any comments for meaning, implementation and
use of the symbol, which are not covered by the other description
items.
Example on ENC This field may contain examples of this symbol on an ECDIS
display.
References This entry gives a reference to the corresponding S-57 Objects and
the INT 1 [1] descriptions.

15.2.2 Notes on the symbol descriptions

* 'N/A' under 'look-up table affected' means "Not Applicable".

** 'Bounding box': in order to show the details clearly, many of the diagrams are
enlarged over the true size, by as much as ten times for small symbols, with the
result that the edges of the symbol sometimes overflow the bounding box (see for
example symbol SY(BUISGL11)). This does not invalidate the drawing
instructions.

*** 'Comments':If an area is "transparent filled" the description means percentage

given applies to the transparent part. Example: 75% transparency means that of
four adjacent pixels, three are transparent.

15.2.3 Instructions on the symbol diagrams

'Line Weight', as used in the symbol descriptions, is equivalent to "line width". It is derived
from the following requirement for screen resolution given in S-52, section 5.1 and repeated
in IEC 61174 [7], clause 5.8.2:

"Minimum lines per mm (L) is given by L = 864/s, where s is the smaller

dimension of the chart display area (e.g. for the minimum chart area, s
= 270 mm and the resolution is L = 3.20 lines per mm, giving a "Picture
Unit" size of 0.312 mm)."

232
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
The term 'Picture Unit' used above is the general form of the earlier concept of pixels of
about 0.3 mm size. Hence a Line weight of 0.3 mm represents a line or dot of one-pixel
width; a line weight of 0.6 mm represents a two-pixel line or four-pixel dot, and so on.

15.3 Instructions for Symbolising Points

15.3.1 Reference to PresLib Manual

Please read section 9, particularly:

9.2 on symbol rotation (note particularly "Symbols with no rotation must

always be drawn upright with respect to the screen borders"). Contour
labels must be drawn upright, for ease of reading, not aligned with the
direction of the contour as on the paper chart.

9.4 and 9.2 on area symbolisation by a centred symbol, and symbol

offsets.

15.4 Instructions for Symbolising Lines

15.4.1 Reference to PresLib Manual

Linestyles symbolise (a) line objects such as routes and (b) area boundaries. There are two
types of line styles, simple linestyles and complex linestyles. Please read sections 8 and 9,
particularly:

8.2 on the usage of complex linestyles,

9.3 on line symbology in general,
9.3 on the "predefined line style", i.e. the simple linestyles.

15.4.2 Direction of drawing the line

Some complex linestyles are 'directional', either to indicate the direction of traffic in a route or
to define the inside of an area by the foot of 'T' or 'V' symbols built into the line.

Whereas point symbols and centred area symbols may be oriented by means of the
ORIENT attribute, directional linestyle symbols are always oriented in the direction of the
digitised line they represent.

It is essential that the direction of drawing lines coincides with the direction of digitising of the
line in the ENC (that is in the direction of a one way traffic route or track, or clockwise around
an area).

Examples are given in the following table using LC(DWRTCL07) and LC(ENTRES51):

Linestyle Direction of digitising Direction of symbol

DWRTCL07 090 deg arrow points 090 deg., as illustrated
180 deg arrow points 180 deg.
270 deg arrow points 270 deg.
ENTRES51 090 deg 'T' points 180 deg, as illustrated
180 deg 'T' points 270 deg.

233
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 270 deg 'T' points 0 deg.

15.4.3 Laying out the symbols along the line

The pivot point determines the spacing between individual symbols of the complex linestyle.
The pivot point of the first line symbol must be placed on the start of the line and the pivot
point of each successive symbol must be placed on the end of the preceding symbol (see
section 8.2).

15.4.4 Curved Lines

In order to fit all digitised lines (including curved lines), the complex linestyle is designed to
bend around curves (for example, in order to symbolise the boundary of a circular anchorage
area.) If the curve is too sharp for the ECDIS to follow the digitised line exactly for part, or all,
of the run-length of the line, the linestyle must default to a dashed line of the same colour
and lineweight as the original line style symbol (see section 8.2).

15.4.5 Symbols or Text for Lines

The pivot point of symbols or text associated with a line must be located at the midpoint of
the run-length of the line (see section 9.1).

15.5 Instructions for symbolising areas

15.5.1 Reference to PresLib Manual

Areas are symbolised (a) by boundary linestyles (if the look-up table for symbolized
boundaries is used); (b) by centred symbols; (c) by colour fill; or (d) by special area fill
patterns. See section 8.4.

15.5.2 Centred Symbols for areas

The pivot point of centred symbols must be located at or near the centre of gravity of the
area displayed. See section 8.5 for details.

15.5.3 Pattern spacing for area fill patterns

It is critically important to maintain the correct spacing between the symbols of certain area
fill patterns. For example too wide a spacing between the grey dots of AP(DRGARE01) will
effectively make the pattern invisible, while too close a spacing will cause clutter. Another
example: the difference between the open spacing of the grey dashes of AP(PRTSUR) and
the closely spaced dashes of AP(NODATA03) symbolizes the difference between a partly
surveyed area with little data and an unsurveyed area with no data at all.

15.6 Examples of Symbol Diagrams

Examples for a point symbol SY(ACHARE51), a line symbol LC(ACHARE51) and an area
symbol AP(RCKLDG01) are given below:

234
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
a) Point Symbol

Symbol Name: SY(ACHARE51) RN: 2

Symbol Explanation: anchorage area

Look-up table affected: area symbols with plain boundaries

area symbols with symbolized boundaries

Pivot Point Column: 6.29

Pivot Point Row: 7.79

Width of Bounding Box: 12.29

Height of Bounding Box: 13.04

Symbol Colours: CHMGF

Comments: Line weight 0.3 mm

Examples on ENC: N/A

References:
S-57 INT 1
ACHARE IN 12.1-9 (IN 12.1)
(centred
symbol)

235
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
b) Line Symbol

Symbol Name: LC(ACHARE51) RN: 469

Symbol Explanation: boundary of an anchorage area

Look-up table affected: area symbols with symbolized boundaries

Pivot Point Column: -1.98

Pivot Point Row: 2.42

Width of Bounding Box: 30.30

Height of Bounding Box: 5.03

Symbol Colours: CHMGD

Comments: Line weight 0.3 mm;

Anchor symbol dimensions like point symbol ACHARE02

Examples on ENC: N/A

References:
S-57 INT 1
ACHARE IN 12.1-9; (IN 12.1)

236
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
c) Area Symbol

Symbol Name: AP(RCKLDG01) RN: 464

Symbol Explanation: rock or coral drying ledges

Look-up table affected: area symbols with plain boundaries

area symbols with symbolized boundaries

Pivot Point Column: -0.06

Pivot Point Row: 13.38

Width of Bounding Box: 15.41

Height of Bounding Box: 13.32

Symbol Colours: LANDF

Pattern Type: Linear

Pattern Spacing: Constant

Minimum Distance: 0.00

Maximum Distance: 0.00

Comments: Line weight 0.3 mm

The seven “v” symbols in the box illustrated must form a
continuous uniform pattern over the area of the object being
symbolized.

Examples on ENC: N/A

References:
S-57 INT 1
SBDARE IJ 1-11;30-39,

237
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
16 ECDIS Chart 1, Symbol Plots & Colour Test Diagrams
16.1 Introduction

This section of the Presentation Library contains the following:

16.2 ECDIS Chart 1

16.3 Colour Differentiation Test Diagram
16.4 Plots of Symbols Arranged Alphabetically

The ECDIS Chart 1 and its indexing list of symbol names and meanings arranged
numerically, together with the colour differentiation test diagrams, are intended for the
Mariner’s use. The use of the Colour Differentiation Test Diagrams is described in section 18

The plot of symbols arranged alphabetically and its indexing list of symbol names and
meanings arranged alphabetically are intended for the manufacturer’s use.

Note that because colour printing and copying is not completely true to the original, this
hard-copy version does not accurately represent the colour requirements of the IHO Colour
and symbol Specifications.

In addition, symbol size may change in copying. To ensure correct size, all symbols
illustrated must be scaled by the factor required to make symbol CHKSYM01 measure 5mm
by 5mm.

238
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
16.2 ECDIS Chart 1

ECDIS Chart 1 symbols

239
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 240
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 241
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 242
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 243
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 244
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 245
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 246
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 247
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 248
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 249
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
IALA A at 1:5000 IALA B at 1:5000 No or other system at 1:5000

250
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 251
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 252
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
16.3 Colour Differentiation Test Diagram

The following diagram is required in "Day" and "Dusk" colours so that the Mariner can verify
that his ECDIS display monitor has the colour differentiation capability needed to distinguish
between the various colour-coded areas, lines and point symbols of the ECDIS display. The
diagrams will not be true to colour unless they are projected on a calibrated monitor and are
generated in a manner which correctly reproduces the colour tokens of the PresLib, as
described in section 18.3. Section 18.3 also describes the use of these diagrams.

16.3.1 Day

253
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
16.3.2 Dusk

254
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
16.4 List of symbol names & meanings

Point symbols & centred area symbols (SY)

SY(ACHARE02) CHMGD anchorage area as a point at small scale, or anchor points of
mooring trot at large scale
SY(ACHARE51) CHMGF anchorage area
SY(ACHBRT07) CHMGD designated anchor berth for a single vessel
SY(ACHRES51) CHMGF area where anchoring is prohibited or restricted
SY(ACHRES61) CHMGF CHMGD area where anchoring is prohibited or restricted, with other
cautions
SY(ACHRES71) CHMGF CHMGD area where anchoring is prohibited or restricted, with other
information
SY(AIRARE02) LANDF symbol for airport as a point
SY(AISSLP01) ARPAT sleeping AIS target
SY(AISVES01) ARPAT active AIS target showing vector and/or heading
SY(ARPATG01) ARPAT ARPA target
SY(ARPONE01) ARPAT one minute mark on ARPA vector
SY(ARPSIX01) ARPAT six minute mark on ARPA vector
SY(BCNCAR01) CHYLW OUTLW cardinal beacon, north, simplified
SY(BCNCAR02) CHYLW OUTLW cardinal beacon, east, simplified
SY(BCNCAR03) CHYLW OUTLW cardinal beacon, south, simplified
SY(BCNCAR04) CHYLW OUTLW cardinal beacon, west, simplified
SY(BCNDEF13) CHMGD CHGRD OUTLW default symbol for a beacon, simplified
SY(BCNGEN01) CHBLK beacon in general, paper-chart
SY(BCNGEN03) CHMGD CHBLK default symbol for beacon, paper-chart
SY(BCNISD21) CHRED OUTLW isolated danger beacon, simplified
SY(BCNLAT15) CHRED OUTLW major lateral beacon, red, simplified
SY(BCNLAT16) CHGRN OUTLW major lateral beacon, green, simplified
SY(BCNLAT21) CHRED OUTLW minor lateral beacon, red, simplified
SY(BCNLAT22) CHGRN OUTLW minor lateral beacon, green, simplified
SY(BCNLTC01) CHBLK lattice beacon, paper-chart
SY(BCNSAW13) CHBLK DEPVS OUTLW major safe water beacon, simplified
SY(BCNSAW21) CHBLK DEPVS OUTLW minor safe water beacon, simplified
SY(BCNSPP13) CHYLW OUTLW major special purpose beacon, simplified
SY(BCNSPP21) CHYLW OUTLW minor special purpose beacon, simplified
SY(BCNSTK02) CHBLK minor, stake or pole beacon, paper-chart
SY(BCNTOW01) CHBLK beacon tower, paper-chart
SY(BOYBAR01) CHBLK barrel buoy, paper-chart
SY(BOYCAN01) CHBLK can buoy, paper-chart
SY(BOYCAR01) CHYLW OUTLW cardinal buoy, north, simplified
SY(BOYCAR02) CHYLW OUTLW cardinal buoy, east, simplified
SY(BOYCAR03) CHYLW OUTLW cardinal buoy, south, simplified
SY(BOYCAR04) CHYLW OUTLW cardinal buoy, west, simplified
SY(BOYCON01) CHBLK conical buoy, paper-chart
SY(BOYDEF03) CHMGD CHGRD OUTLW default symbol for buoy, simplified
SY(BOYGEN03) CHMGD CHBLK default symbol for buoy, paper-chart
SY(BOYINB01) CHBLK installation buoy, paper-chart
SY(BOYISD12) OUTLW CHRED isolated danger buoy, simplified
SY(BOYLAT13) CHGRN OUTLW conical lateral buoy, green, simplified
SY(BOYLAT14) CHRED OUTLW conical lateral buoy, red, simplified
SY(BOYLAT23) CHGRN OUTLW can shape lateral buoy, green, simplified
SY(BOYLAT24) CHRED OUTLW can shape lateral buoy, red, simplified
SY(BOYMOR01) CHBLK mooring buoy, barrel shape, paper-chart
SY(BOYMOR03) CHBLK mooring buoy, can shape, paper-chart
SY(BOYMOR11) CHBLK installation buoy and mooring buoy, simplified
SY(BOYPIL01) CHBLK pillar buoy, paper-chart
SY(BOYSAW12) CHRED OUTLW safe water buoy, simplified
SY(BOYSPH01) CHBLK spherical buoy, paper-chart
SY(BOYSPP11) CHYLW OUTLW special purpose buoy, spherical or barrel shaped, or default

255
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 symbol for special purpose buoy, simplified
SY(BOYSPP15) CHYLW OUTLW special purpose TSS buoy marking the starboard side of the
traffic lane, simplified
SY(BOYSPP25) CHYLW OUTLW special purpose TSS buoy marking the port side of the traffic
lane, simplified
SY(BOYSPR01) CHBLK spar buoy, paper-chart
SY(BOYSUP01) CHBLK super-buoy, paper-chart
SY(BOYSUP02) CHBLK super-buoy ODAS & LANBY, simplified
SY(BOYSUP03) CHBLK LANBY, super-buoy, paper-chart
SY(BRIDGE01) CHMGD symbol for opening bridge
SY(BRTHNO01) CHMGD berth number symbol
SY(BUAARE02) LANDF built-up area
SY(BUIREL01) LANDF non-conspicuous religious building, Christian
SY(BUIREL04) LANDF non-conspicuous religious building, non-Christian
SY(BUIREL05) LANDF mosque or minaret
SY(BUIREL13) CHBLK conspicuous religious building, Christian
SY(BUIREL14) CHBLK conspicuous religious building, non-Christian
SY(BUIREL15) CHBLK conspicuous mosque or minaret
SY(BUISGL01) LANDF CHBRN single building
SY(BUISGL11) LANDF CHBLK conspicuous single building
SY(CAIRNS01) LANDF Caim
SY(CAIRNS11) CHBLK conspicuous cairn
SY(CBLARE51) CHMGF cable area
SY(CGUSTA02) LANDF CHWHT CHMGF coastguard station
SY(CHCRDEL1) CHCOR this object has been manually deleted or modified
SY(CHCRID01) CHCOR this object has been manually updated
SY(CHIMNY01) LANDF Chimney
SY(CHIMNY11) CHBLK conspicuous chimney
SY(CHINFO06) CHMGD HO caution note
SY(CHINFO07) CHMGD HO information note
SY(CHINFO08) NINFO mariner's information note
SY(CHINFO09) NINFO mariners caution note
SY(CHINFO10) ADINF manufacturer's information note
SY(CHINFO11) ADINF manufacturer's caution note
SY(CHKSYM01) CHBLK OUTLW test symbol for checking symbol sizes, must measure 5mm by
5mm
SY(CLRLIN01) NINFO arrow head for mariner's clearing line
SY(CRANES01) LANDF Cranes
SY(CTNARE51) TRFCF caution area, a specific caution note applies
SY(CTYARE51) TRFCF cautionary area (e.g. ferry area) navigate with caution
SY(CTYARE71) TRFCF CHMGD cautionary area with further information
SY(CURDEF01) CHGRD current or tidal stream whose direction is not known
SY(CURENT01) CHGRD non-tidal current
SY(CURSRA01) CURSR ordinary cursor
SY(CURSRB01) CURSR cursor with open centre
SY(DANGER01) CHBLK DEPVS underwater hazard with a defined depth
SY(DANGER02) CHBLK underwater hazard with depth greater than 20 metres
SY(DAYSQR01) CHMGD square or rectangular daymark, simplified
SY(DAYSQR21) CHMGD square or rectangular daymark, paper chart
SY(DAYTRI01) CHMGD triangular daymark, point up, simplified
SY(DAYTRI05) CHMGD triangular daymark, point down, simplified
SY(DAYTRI21) CHMGD triangular daymark, point up, paper chart
SY(DAYTRI25) CHMGD triangular daymark, point down, paper chart
SY(DIRBOYA1) CHMGD CHRED CHGRN direction and colour of buoyage for approaching harbour in
IALA region A (red to port)
SY(DIRBOYB1) CHMGD CHGRN CHRED direction and colour of buoyage for approaching harbour in
IALA region B (green to port)
SY(DISMAR03) CHMGD distance mark
SY(DISMAR04) CHMGD distance point with no mark
SY(DNGHILIT) DNGHL transparent danger highlight for mariner's use

256
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
SY(DOMES001) LANDF Dome
SY(DOMES011) CHBLK conspicuous dome
SY(DSHAER01) LANDF dish aerial
SY(DSHAER11) CHBLK conspicuous dish aerial
SY(DWRTPT51) TRFCF part of deep water route
SY(EBBSTR01) CHGRD ebb stream, rate at spring tides
SY(EBLVRM11) NINFO point of origin for an offset EBL or VRM
SY(ENTRES51) TRFCF area where entry is prohibited or restricted or to be avoided
SY(ENTRES61) TRFCF CHMGD area where entry is prohibited or restricted or to be avoided,
with other cautions
SY(ENTRES71) TRFCF CHMGD area where entry is prohibited or restricted or to be avoided,
with other information
SY(ERBLTIK1) NINFO range mark for an ERBL
SY(EVENTS02) NINFO mariner's event mark
SY(FAIRWY51) CHGRD fairway with one-way traffic in direction indicated
SY(FAIRWY52) CHGRD fairway with two-way traffic
SY(FLASTK01) LANDF flare stack
SY(FLASTK11) CHBLK conspicuous flare stack
SY(FLDSTR01) CHGRD flood stream, rate at spring tides
SY(FLGSTF01) LANDF flagstaff, flagpole
SY(FOGSIG01) CHMGF fog signal
SY(FORSTC01) LANDF fortified structure
SY(FORSTC11) CHBLK conspicuous fortified structure
SY(FOULGND1) CHGRD foul area of seabed safe for navigation but not for anchoring
SY(FRYARE51) CHMGF ferry area
SY(FRYARE52) CHBLK cable ferry area
SY(FSHFAC02) CHGRD fish trap, fish weir, tunny net
SY(FSHFAC03) CHGRD fish stakes
SY(FSHGRD01) CHGRD fishing ground
SY(FSHHAV01) CHGRD fish haven
SY(FSHRES51) CHMGF area where fishing or trawling is prohibited or restricted
SY(FSHRES61) CHMGF CHMGD area where fishing or trawling is prohibited or restricted, with
other cautions
SY(FSHRES71) CHMGF CHMGD area where fishing or trawling is prohibited or restricted, with
other information
SY(GATCON03) TRFCD navigable lock gate
SY(GATCON04) TRFCD non-navigable lock gate
SY(HILTOP01) LANDF hill or mountain top
SY(HILTOP11) CHBLK conspicuous hill or mountain top
SY(HRBFAC09) CHMGD fishing harbour
SY(HULKES01) CSTLN CHBRN Hulk
SY(INFARE51) CHMGF area with minor restrictions or information notices
SY(INFORM01) CHMGD this object has additional information available by cursor query
SY(ISODGR01) ISDNG isolated underwater danger of depth less than the mariner's
selected safety contour
SY(ITZARE51) CHMGF area of inshore traffic
SY(LITDEF11) CHMGD OUTLW light flare
SY(LIGHTS11) LITRD OUTLW light flare, red
SY(LIGHTS12) LITGN OUTLW light flare, green
SY(LIGHTS13) LITYW OUTLW light flare, white or yellow
SY(LIGHTS81) CHMGD strip light
SY(LIGHTS82) CHMGD Floodlight
SY(LITFLT01) CHBLK light float, paper-chart
SY(LITFLT02) CHBLK light float, simplified
SY(LITVES01) CHBLK light vessel, paper-chart
SY(LITVES02) CHBLK light vessel, simplified
SY(LNDARE01) LANDA CSTLN land as a point at small scale
SY(LOCMAG01) CHMGD cursor pick site for a magnetic anomaly at a point or along a
line
SY(LOCMAG51) CHMGF cursor pick site for a magnetic anomaly over an area

257
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
SY(LOWACC01) CHBLK point feature or area of low accuracy
SY(MAGVAR01) CHMGD cursor pick site for magnetic variation at a point
SY(MAGVAR51) CHMGF cursor pick site for magnetic variation along a line or over an
area
SY(MARCUL02) CHGRD fish farm
SY(MONUMT02) LANDF Monument
SY(MONUMT12) CHBLK conspicuous monument
SY(MORFAC03) LANDA CHBLK mooring dolphin
SY(MORFAC04) CHBLK deviation mooring dolphin
SY(MSTCON04) LANDF Mast
SY(MSTCON14) CHBLK conspicuous mast
SY(NORTHAR1) SCLBR north arrow
SY(NOTBRD11) CHBLK conspicuous notice board
SY(OBSTRN01) DEPVS CHBLK obstruction, depth not stated
SY(OBSTRN02) CHBLK obstruction in the intertidal area
SY(OBSTRN11) CSTLN LANDA obstruction in the water which is always above water level
SY(OFSPLF01) CHBLK offshore platform
SY(OSPONE02) SHIPS one minute mark for ownship vector
SY(OSPSIX02) SHIPS six minute mark for ownship vector
SY(OWNSHP01) SHIPS own ship symbol, constant size
SY(OWNSHP05) SHIPS own ship drawn to scale with conning position marked
SY(PASTRK01) PSTRK time mark on past track
SY(PASTRK02) SYTRK time mark on secondary past track
SY(PILBOP02) CHMGD pilot boarding place
SY(PILPNT02) CHBLK pile or bollard
SY(PLNPOS01) PLRTE surrounding ellipse for arrival date and time at planned
position
SY(PLNPOS02) PLRTE cross line for planned position
SY(PLNSPD03) PLRTE box for speed to make good, planned route
SY(PLNSPD04) APLRT box for speed to make good, alternate route
SY(POSGEN01) LANDF position of a point feature
SY(POSGEN03) CHBLK position of a conspicuous point feature
SY(POSGEN04) CHBLK position of an elevation or control point
SY(POSITN02) NINFO own ship position fix
SY(PRCARE12) TRFCD point symbol for traffic precautionary area
SY(PRCARE51) TRFCD traffic precautionary area
SY(PRDINS02) LANDF CHBRN mine, quarry
SY(PRICKE03) CHBLK withy, port-hand, paper-chart
SY(PRICKE04) CHBLK withy, starboard-hand, paper-chart
SY(QUAPOS01) CHBLK position approximate
SY(QUARRY01) LANDF Quarry
SY(QUESMRK1) CHMGD object which is not sufficiently described to be symbolized, or
for which no symbol exists in the symbol library
SY(RACNSP01) CHMGD symbol indicating this object is radar conspicuous
SY(RADRFL03) CHMGD radar reflector
SY(RASCAN01) LANDF radar scanner
SY(RASCAN11) CHBLK Conspicuous radar scanner
SY(RCLDEF01) CHMGD radio calling-in point whose direction is not known
SY(RCTLPT52) TRFCD Recommended traffic direction between parts of a traffic
separation scheme, or for ships not needing a deep water
route
SY(RDOCAL02) TRFCD radio calling-in point for traffic in one direction only
SY(RDOCAL03) TRFCD radio calling-in point for traffic in both directions
SY(RDOSTA02) CHMGD radio station
SY(RECDEF51) CHGRD Recommended track as an area, direction not defined in data
SY(RECTRC55) CHGRD Recommended two-way track as an area, not based on fixed
marks
SY(RECTRC56) CHGRD Recommended two-way track as an area, based on fixed marks
SY(RECTRC57) CHGRD Recommended one-way track as an area, not based on fixed
marks
SY(RECTRC58) CHGRD Recommended one-way track as an area, based on fixed marks

258
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
SY(REFPNT02) NINFO reference point, 'ghost cursor' (user interface)
SY(RETRFL01) CHMGD retro reflector, paper chart
SY(RETRFL02) CHMGD retro reflector, simplified
SY(RFNERY01) LANDF Refinery
SY(RFNERY11) CHBLK Conspicuous refinery
SY(ROLROL01) CHBLK RoRo terminal
SY(RSCSTA02) CHBLK rescue station
SY(RSRDEF51) TRFCF CHMGD area in which undefined restrictions exist
SY(RTLDEF51) TRFCD CHMGD Recommended route between parts of a traffic separation
scheme, or for ships not needing a deep water route, with the
direction not specified in the data
SY(RTPBCN02) CHMGD radar transponder beacon
SY(SCALEB10) SCLBR CHGRD one mile scalebar for display scales larger than 1/80,000
SY(SCALEB11) SNDG2 SNDG1 10 mile latitude scale for display scales smaller than 1/80,000
SY(SILBUI01) LANDF CHBRN Silo
SY(SILBUI11) LANDF CHBLK Conspicuous silo
SY(SISTAT02) CHWHT LANDF CHMGF signal station
SY(SMCFAC02) CHMGD yacht harbour, marina
SY(SNDWAV02) CHGRD sand waves
SY(SOUNDG00) SNDG1 deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG01) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG02) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG03) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG04) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG05) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG06) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG07) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG08) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG09) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG10) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG11) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG12) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG13) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG14) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG15) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG16) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG17) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG18) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG19) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG20) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG21) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG22) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG23) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG24) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG25) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG26) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG27) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG28) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG29) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG30) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG31) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG32) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG33) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG34) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG35) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG36) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG37) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG38) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG39) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG40) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth

259
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
SY(SOUNDG41) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG42) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG43) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG44) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG45) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG46) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG47) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG48) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG49) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG50) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG51) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG52) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG53) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG54) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG55) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG56) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG57) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG58) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDG59) SNDG1 for deep soundings, greater than safety depth
SY(SOUNDGB1) SNDG1 symbol for swept sounding, used for deep soundings greater
than safety depth
SY(SOUNDGC2) SNDG1 sounding of low accuracy
SY(SOUNDS00) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS01) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS02) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS03) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS04) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS05) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS06) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS07) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS08) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS09) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS10) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS11) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS12) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS13) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS14) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS15) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS16) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS17) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS18) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS19) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS20) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS21) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS22) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS23) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS24) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS25) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS26) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS27) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS28) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS29) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS30) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS31) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS32) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS33) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS34) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS35) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS36) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS37) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth

260
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
SY(SOUNDS38) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS39) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS40) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS41) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS42) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS43) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS44) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS45) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS46) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS47) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS48) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS49) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS50) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS51) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS52) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS53) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS54) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS55) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS56) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS57) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS58) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDS59) SNDG2 shallow soundings, less than or equal to the safety depth
SY(SOUNDSA1) SNDG2 symbol for drying height, used for shallow soundings, less than
or equal to safety depth
SY(SOUNDSB1) SNDG2 symbol for swept sounding, used for shallow soundings, less
than or equal to safety depth
SY(SOUNDSC2) SNDG1 sounding of low accuracy
SY(SPRING02) CHGRD Spring
SY(SWPARE51) CHGRF swept area
SY(TIDCUR01) NINFO predicted tidal stream or current direction
SY(TIDCUR02) NINFO actual tidal stream or current direction
SY(TIDCUR03) NINFO box for current strength
SY(TIDEHT01) CHGRD point for which tide height information is available
SY(TIDSTR01) CHGRD point or area for which a tidal stream table is available
SY(TMARDEF1) CHBLK topmark for beacons, flag or other shape, paper-chart
SY(TMARDEF2) CHBLK topmark for buoys, flag or other shape, paper-chart
SY(TMBYRD01) LANDF timber yard
SY(TNKCON02) LANDF Tank
SY(TNKCON12) CHBLK Conspicuous tank
SY(TNKFRM01) LANDF tank farm
SY(TNKFRM11) CHBLK Conspicuous tank farm
SY(TOPMAR02) CHBLK topmark for buoys, cone point up, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR04) CHBLK topmark for buoys, cone point down, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR05) CHBLK topmark for buoys, 2 cones point upward, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR06) CHBLK topmark for buoys, 2 cones point downward, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR07) CHBLK topmark for buoys, 2 cones base to base, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR08) CHBLK topmark for buoys, 2 cones point to point, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR10) CHBLK topmark for buoys, sphere, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR12) CHBLK topmark for buoys, 2 spheres, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR13) CHBLK topmark for buoys, cylinder, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR14) CHBLK topmark for buoys, board, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR16) CHBLK topmark for buoys, cube point up, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR17) CHBLK topmark for buoys, flag or other shape, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR18) CHBLK topmark for buoys, T-Shape, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR22) CHBLK topmark for beacons, cone point up, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR24) CHBLK topmark for beacons, cone point down, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR25) CHBLK topmark for beacons, 2 cones point upward, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR26) CHBLK topmark for beacons, 2 cones point downward, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR27) CHBLK topmark for beacons, 2 cones base to base, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR28) CHBLK topmark for beacons, 2 cones point to point, paper-chart

261
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
SY(TOPMAR30) CHBLK topmark for beacons, sphere, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR32) CHBLK topmark for beacons, 2 spheres, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR33) CHBLK topmark for beacons, cylinder, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR34) CHBLK topmark for beacons, board, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR36) CHBLK topmark for beacons, cube point up, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR65) CHBLK topmark for buoys, x-shape, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR85) CHBLK topmark for beacons, x-shape, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR86) CHBLK topmark for beacons, upright cross, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR87) CHBLK topmark for beacons, besom point down, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR88) CHBLK topmark for beacons, besom point up, paper-chart
SY(TOPMAR89) CHBLK topmark for beacons, T-shape, paper-chart
SY(TOWERS01) LANDF Tower
SY(TOWERS02) LANDF water tower
SY(TOWERS03) CHBLK Conspicuous tower
SY(TOWERS05) LANDF radio, television tower
SY(TOWERS12) CHBLK Conspicuous water tower
SY(TOWERS15) CHBLK Conspicuous radio, television tower
SY(TREPNT04) LANDF general symbol for a tree
SY(TREPNT05) LANDF Mangrove
SY(TSLDEF51) TRFCD CHMGD one way lane of a traffic separation scheme, with the direction
not defined in the data
SY(TSSCRS51) TRFCF traffic crossing area
SY(TSSLPT51) TRFCD traffic direction in a one way lane of a traffic separation
scheme
SY(TSSRON51) TRFCF traffic roundabout
SY(TWRDEF51) TRFCD CHMGD two-way route of a traffic separation scheme, with the
direction not defined in the data
SY(TWRTPT52) TRFCD reciprocal traffic directions in a two-way route of a traffic
separation scheme
SY(TWRTPT53) TRFCD single traffic direction in a two-way route part of a traffic
separation scheme
SY(UWTROC03) DEPVS CHBLK dangerous underwater rock of uncertain depth
SY(UWTROC04) CHBLK rock which covers and uncovers or is awash at low water
SY(VECGND01) SHIPS arrowhead for own ship vector for course and speed over the
ground
SY(VECGND21) ARPAT arrowhead for ARPA or AIS vector for course and speed over
the ground
SY(VECWTR01) SHIPS arrowhead for own ship vector for course and speed through
the water
SY(VECWTR21) ARPAT arrowhead for ARPA vector for course and speed through the
water
SY(WATTUR02) CHGRD overfalls, eddies and breakers
SY(WAYPNT01) PLRTE waypoint on planned route
SY(WAYPNT03) APLRT waypoint on alternate planned route
SY(WAYPNT11) PLRTE next waypoint on planned route
SY(WEDKLP03) CHGRD weed, kelp
SY(WIMCON01) LANDF Windmotor
SY(WIMCON11) CHBLK Conspicuous windmotor
SY(WNDFRM51) LANDF wind generator farm
SY(WNDFRM61) CHBLK Conspicuous wind generator farm
SY(WNDMIL02) LANDF Windmill
SY(WNDMIL12) CHBLK Conspicuous windmill
SY(WRECKS01) CHGRD wreck showing any portion of hull or superstructure at level of
chart datum
SY(WRECKS04) CHBLK non-dangerous wreck, depth unknown
SY(WRECKS05) DEPVS CHBLK dangerous wreck, depth unknown

Area pattern symbols (AP)

AP(AIRARE02) LANDF pattern of symbols for an airport area

262
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
AP(DIAMOND1) DEPCN area of depth less than the safety contour
AP(DQUALA11) CHGRD pattern of symbols for a chart of 5m accuracy with full seafloor
coverage
AP(DQUALA21) CHGRD pattern of symbols for a chart with 20m accuracy with full
seafloor coverage
AP(DQUALB01) CHGRD pattern of symbols for a chart with 50m accuracy from
standard survey based on lines of continuous soundings
AP(DQUALC01) CHGRD pattern of symbols for a low accuracy or incomplete chart
AP(DQUALD01) CHGRD pattern of symbols for an unreliable chart
AP(DQUALU01) CHGRD pattern of symbols for a chart with quality not assessed
AP(DRGARE01) CHGRD dredged area
AP(FOULAR01) CHGRD foul area, not safe for navigation
AP(FSHFAC03) CHGRD pattern of symbols for an area with fishing stakes
AP(FSHFAC04) CHGRD pattern of symbols for an area with fish traps, fish weirs, tunny
nets
AP(FSHHAV02) CHGRD pattern of symbols for a fish haven
AP(ICEARE04) CHGRD continuous pattern for an ice area (glacier, etc.)
AP(MARCUL02) CHGRD pattern of symbols for a marine farm
AP(MARSHES1) CHBRN pattern of symbols for a marsh
AP(NODATA03) CHGRD area of no chart data
AP(OVERSC01) CHGRD overscale part of a display containing data from more than one
navigation purpose
AP(PRTSUR01) CHGRD incompletely surveyed area
AP(QUESMRK1) CHMGD pattern of symbols for an area which is not sufficiently
described to be symbolized, or for which no symbol exists in
the symbol library
AP(RCKLDG01) LANDF rock or coral drying ledges
AP(SNDWAV01) CHGRD pattern of symbols for sand waves
AP(TSSJCT02) TRFCF precautionary area or a traffic separation scheme crossing or
roundabout
AP(VEGATN03) LANDF pattern of symbols for wooded areas
AP(VEGATN04) LANDF pattern of symbols for mangroves

263
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Complex linestyles

LC(ACHARE51) CHMGD boundary of an anchorage area

LC(ACHRES51) CHMGD boundary of an area where anchoring is prohibited or
restricted
LC(ADMARE01) CHGRD jurisdiction boundary
LC(CBLARE51) CHMGD boundary of a submarine cable area
LC(CBLSUB06) CHMGD submarine cable
LC(CHCRDEL1) CHCOR this line has been deleted by a manual update
LC(CHCRID01) CHCOR this line has been manually updated
LC(CTNARE51) CHMGD boundary of area with a specific caution
LC(CTYARE51) CHMGD boundary of area to be navigated with caution
LC(DWLDEF01) TRFCD deep water route centreline, direction not defined in the data
LC(DWRTCL05) TRFCD two--way deep water route centreline, not based on fixed
marks
LC(DWRTCL06) TRFCD two--way deep water route centreline, based on fixed marks
LC(DWRTCL07) TRFCD one--way deep water route centreline, not based on fixed
marks
LC(DWRTCL08) TRFCD one--way deep water route centreline, based on fixed-marks
LC(DWRUTE51) TRFCD boundary of a deep water route
LC(ENTRES51) CHMGD boundary of an area where entry is prohibited or restricted
LC(ERBLNA01) NINFO electronic range/bearing line, dash
LC(FERYRT01) CHMGD ferry route
LC(FERYRT02) CHBLK cable ferry route
LC(FSHFAC02) CHGRD fishing stakes
LC(FSHRES51) CHMGD boundary of an area where trawling or fishing is prohibited or
restricted
LC(NONHODAT) NINFO boundary of non-HO data
LC(LOWACC01) DEPSC safety contour of low accuracy in position
LC(LOWACC11) DEPCN contour of low accuracy in position
LC(LOWACC21) CSTLN coastline or shoreline construction of low accuracy in position
LC(LOWACC31) CHGRD area of wrecks or obstructions of low accuracy
LC(LOWACC41) CHBLK danger line of low accuracy surrounding a foul area
LC(MARSYS51) CHGRD boundary between IALA--A and IALA--B systems of lateral
buoys and beacons
LC(NAVARE51) CHGRD boundary of a navigation feature such as a fairway, magnetic
anomaly, etc.
LC(PIPARE51) CHMGD boundary of a submarine pipeline area with potentially
dangerous contents
LC(PIPARE61) CHGRD boundary of a submarine pipeline area with generally non-
-dangerous contents
LC(PIPSOL05) CHMGD oil, gas pipeline, submerged or on land
LC(PIPSOL06) CHGRD water pipeline, sewer, etc.
LC(PLNRTE03) PLRTE planned route for own ship
LC(PRCARE51) CHMGD boundary of a precautionary area
LC(QUESMRK1) CHMGD object which is not sufficiently described to be symbolized, or
for which no symbol exists in the symbol library
LC(RCRDEF11) TRFCD regulated recommended route centreline, details not defined

264
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
LC(RCRTCL11) TRFCD regulated two-way recommended route centreline, not
based on fixed marks
LC(RCRTCL12) TRFCD regulated one-way recommended route centreline, not
based on fixed marks
LC(RCRTCL13) TRFCD regulated two-way recommended route centreline, based on
fixed-marks
LC(RCRTCL14) TRFCD Regulated one-way recommended route centreline, based on
fixed marks
LC(RECDEF02) CHGRD non—regulated recommended track, direction not defined in
data
LC(RECTRC09) CHGRD non--regulated recommended two--way track, not based on
fixed marks
LC(RECTRC10) CHGRD non—regulated recommended two--way track, based on
fixed-marks
LC(RECTRC11) CHGRD non--regulated recommended one--way track, not based on
fixed marks
LC(RECTRC12) CHGRD non—regulated recommended one--way track, based on
fixed marks
LC(RESARE51) CHMGD boundary of a restricted area
LC (SCLBDY51) CHGRF chart scale boundary, the double line indicates the larger
scale
LC(TIDINF51) CHGRD boundary of an area for which there is tidal information

Symbols added since Edition 3.0

SY(DIRBOY01) CHMGD direction of buoyage

SY(DWRUTE51) TRFCD reciprocal traffic directions in a two-way part of a deep-water
route
SY(BLKADJ01) BKAJ1 BKAJ2 Symbol for checking and adjusting the brightness and
contrast
SY(FLTHAZ02) CHMGD floating hazard to navigation
SY(DANGER03) DEPIT CHBLK underwater hazard which covers and uncovers
SY(OBSTRN03) DEPIT CHBLK obstruction which covers and uncovers
SY(BOYSPP35) CHYLW OUTLW special purpose ice buoy or spar or pillar shaped buoy,
simplified
SY(SAFCON00) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON01) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON02) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON03) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON04) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON05) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON06) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON07) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON08) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON09) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON10) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON11) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON12) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label

265
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
SY(SAFCON13) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON14) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON15) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON16) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON17) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON18) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON19) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON20) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON21) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON22) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON23) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON24) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON25) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON26) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON27) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON28) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON29) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON50) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON51) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON52) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON53) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON54) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON55) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON56) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON57) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON58) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON59) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON60) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON61) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON62) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON63) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON64) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON65) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON66) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON67) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON68) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(SAFCON69) DEPDW SNDG2 contour label
SY(AISDGR01) DNGHL dangerous AIS target
SY(AISLST01) RESBLU lost AIS target
SY(AISSEL01) RESBLU selected AIS target
SY(AISTRN01) RESBLU AIS target turning to starboard
SY(AISTRN02) RESBLU AIS target turning to port
SY(ESSARE01) CHMGF environmentally sensitive sea area
SY(NEWOBJ01) CHMGD new object
SY(PSSARE01) CHMGF particularly sensitive sea area

266
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
LC(ARCSLN01) CHMGF boundary of archipelagic sea lane
LC(NEWOBJ01) CHMGD new object
SY(DRFSTA01) CHMGD DGPS Base station
SY(AISATN01) RESBLU AIS based aid to navigation

Symbols added in edition 4

SY(CHDATD01) CHMGD marker for date dependant objects

SY(CHRVDEL1) CHCOR this object has been automatically deleted or modified
SY(CHRVID01) CHCOR this object has been automatically inserted or modified
SY(INDHLT01) BKAJ1, CHYLW indication highlight for mariner's use
LC(CHRVDEL2) CHCOR this object has been automatically deleted or modified
LC(CHRVID02) CHCOR this object has been automatically inserted or modified
LC(INDHLT02) BKAJ1, CHYLW indication highlight for mariner's use

267
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
16.4 Plots of Symbols

Point symbols and centred areas symbols (SY)

268
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Point symbols and centred areas symbols (SY)

269
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Point symbols and centred areas symbols (SY)

270
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Point symbols and centred areas symbols (SY)

271
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Point symbols and centred areas symbols (SY)

272
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Point symbols and centred areas symbols (SY)

273
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Point symbols and centred areas symbols (SY)

274
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Point symbols and centred areas symbols (SY)

275
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Point symbols and centred areas symbols (SY)

276
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Area patterns (AP)

277
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Complex linestyles (LC)

278
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
Complex linestyles (LC)

16.4.1 New symbols introduced in S-52 PresLib 4.0.0

16.4.2 New complex linestyles introduced in S-52 PresLib 4.0.0

279
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
17 Contents of the Digital Presentation Library
From edition 3.3 onwards the word-processed version is the "official" version of the
Presentation Library. The digital version in .dai format described in this section is provided
as a manufacturer's option for edition 4.0.0. However the S-57 format Colour Differentiation
Test Diagram file will continue to be provided so that this diagram can be displayed using the
ECDIS colour tables, as described in section 18.3, in order to test the colour differentiation
capability of the display screen.

Please see README file on individual disks for file/data extraction and specific contents.

17.1 Digital Presentation Library

The optional digital Presentation Library is supplied in ".dai" format, the name on the disk
being PSLBmm_n.dai, where mm_n is the edition number. This file is formatted in
accordance with the description given in section 12 and appendices B to F, and contains
look-up tables, colour tables and symbol descriptions. This file may not be up-dated and may
not be available for future editions.

17.2 Test Edition of the Presentation Library

The ECDIS is no longer required to receive amendments to the Presentation Library at sea.
Consequently, the Test Edition is no longer required.

17.3 Look-up Table sets

The digital form of the look-up tables are included in the above-described PSLBmm_n.dai
file. This file may not be up-dated and may not be available for future editions.

17.4 Colour Tables

The CIE colour tables are included in the above-described PSLBmm_n.dai file. This file may
not be up-dated and may not be available for future editions.

17.5 Symbols, Patterns and Linestyles

The official symbols, patterns and linestyles are provided in the PSLBmm_n.dai file. This file
may not be up-dated and may not be available for future editions.

17.6 Official Presentation Library

The official Presentation Library, in the form of a word processed file, is contained on the
Presentation Library CD. The content of the Presentation Library is given in section 4.

280
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
17.7 ECDIS Chart 1

An ECDIS Chart 1 is available for use by the Mariner, off-line, as described in S-52, section
3.1.4. This is in section 16.2 and as graphics files on the Presentation Library CD.

In addition to the above, the digital Presentation Library contains a set of 13 pseudo S-57
files named AANC1XXX.000 ("N" is the navigational purpose), with AGEN code 1810. These
cells carry the representation of the ECDIS Chart 1 as a collection of all symbols coded as
NEWOBJ using the SYMINS attribute and similarly arranged as INT1 [1] for paper charts.

Detailed specifications for these diagrams and their use are given in section 18.

17.8 Colour Differentiation Test Diagram

A Colour Differentiation Test Diagram is provided to enable the Mariner to check the colour
performance of his ECDIS screen, off-line, as described in S-52, section 5.2.5. It is illustrated
in section 16.3 and fully described in sections 18.2 and 18.3.

17.9 CSPs in UML

In addition to the graphical form of the CSPs provided in this document they are also
provided for use as a digital set of diagrams in Enterprise Architect form.

281
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
18 Use of ECDIS Chart 1 & Colour Test Diagram

18.1 Introduction

The digital part of the IHO ECDIS Presentation Library carries supplementary features
intended to aid the manufacturer in implementing the IHO Colour & Symbol Specifications,
and the Mariner in using them. These consist of:

 An ECDIS Chart 1, as pseudo S-57 files, to help familiarise the Mariner with
the colour and symbol coding used by ECDIS and to aid in picking the
appropriate symbol for manual chart correction. (Note that the digital version
of the ECDIS Chart 1 described here will be available in edition 4.0.0 of the
Presentation Library, but may not be updated in the future. The ECDIS Chart
1 is also presented in section 16.2.)

 A Colour Differentiation Test Diagram, as an S-57 file, to enable the Mariner

to test whether his screen is still capable of differentiating the main colours
used in ECDIS, and also to assist him in setting the brightness and contrast
controls. (This digital version of the colour differentiation test diagram must be
supplied with the ECDIS as the diagrams are intended to test whether an
aging ECDIS screen is still capable of showing colour differences clearly.)

18.2 Specification for ECDIS Chart 1 and the Colour Test Diagram

18.2.1 Definition (for this specification only)

A Chart 1 data cell must be displayed so as to fill all of the standard ECDIS display area. (i.e.
the min 270 x 270 mm chart area).

18.2.2 Description and purpose

The ECDIS Chart 1 and the Colour Differentiation Test are diagrams for use by the Mariner
which are provided in the form of ENC-like S-57 files.

The ECDIS chart 1 is intended to familiarise the Mariner with the symbology used on ECDIS.
The Mariner must be able to display each cell, and by cursor-pick get a read-out of the
meaning of any symbol shown.

The Colour Differentiation Test diagram is intended for display using the day or dusk colour
tables so that the Mariner can check that the ECDIS monitor is providing adequate colour
performance. It is also used in type-approval testing. Instructions for its use are given in the
sections below.

The ECDIS chart 1 includes the CHKSYM which is intended for checking the correct size of
the symbols during the type approval. The width and height of the CHKSYM is 5.0 mm.

The line width of the diagonal line in the Colour Differentiation Test diagram is specified as
0.6 mm wide (i.e. 2 pixel wide with a monitor with 0.3 mm pixel pitch). The line width must be
checked during the type approval.

282
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
18.2.3 Mode of use

These diagrams are supplementary features of the ECDIS, intended for use off-line or during
route planning. Because they occupy the entire display they must not be used during route
monitoring. If the Mariner needs to find the meaning of a symbol during route monitoring, he
must use cursor-picking.

The operation of these diagrams is not subject to the draw-speed requirements of route
monitoring.

18.2.4 Content and Encoding

The Chart 1 / Colour Test package consists of the thirteen S-57 cell files described below.
The S-57 files of the ECDIS Chart 1 consists of eleven detail cells and an the index cell. The
detail cells contain all of the symbols used on ECDIS, excluding Mariners' Navigational
Objects, plus some explanatory diagrams. They are organised in displays that follow the
classification used for INT 1 [1] for the paper chart (e.g. the first display is "AB - Information
about the chart display.")

The S-57 file of the Colour Differentiation Test Diagram consists of one display cell
(C1WOO) containing twenty squares, each with a different background/foreground colour
combination.

The cells are identified as follows:

cell code INT 1 Name comp. Scale “N”
C1AB1 AB information about the chart display 1/14 000 5
C1AB2 AB information about the chart display 1/14 000 5
C1CDE CDE natural and man-made features 1/14 000 5
C1FOO F port features 1/14 000 5
C1HIO HI depths, currents etc. 1/14 000 5
C1JKL JKL seabed, obstructions, pipelines etc. 1/14 000 5
C1MOO M traffic routes 1/14 000 5
C1NOO N special areas 1/14 000 5
C1PRS PQRSTU aids and services 1/14 000 5
C1QO1 Q paper chart buoys and beacons 1/14 000 5
C1QO2 Q topmarks 1/14 000 5
C1WOO - colour differentiation test diagram 1/14 000 5
C1XOO - index covering all of above detail cells 1/42 000 4
excluding Mariners navigational
objects

The file name uses the IHO Producer Code (AA), followed by the navigational purpose and
the individual cell code given above. Revision will be by new edition, and so the update
number is always ".000". An example of a full file name is:

"AA5C1AB1.000"

Spatially, the "harbour" scale Chart 1 detail cells ("N"=5) are laid out in a 3 x 3 matrix with
the Colour Test display cell below (to the south), and all are covered by the index cell on the
"approach" scale ("N"=4). They are located in the West African desert at 15 degrees north, 5

283
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
degrees west, where there shall be no danger of their being called up as real chart cells
(unless river traffic on the R. Niger above Timbuktu increases drastically.)

The EN Application Profiles of S-57 Appendix B1 are used, with arbitrary values entered for
certain items (such as vertical datum) which do not apply to Chart 1. (This is done to
minimise the changes to ECDIS software needed in order to process these special purpose
Chart 1 files in an ECDIS.)

The IHO agency code (1810) is used in the AGEN sub-field of the DSID field, and the PRSP
field is given the value {3} to distinguish it from the values used for the ENC Product
Specification.

18.2.5 Revisions

Revisions will be made by whole file replacement, i.e. by issuing a new edition, as indicated
in the EDTN sub-field of the DSID field.

18.2.6 Packaging

The pseudo S-57 data files are part of the Digital Presentation Library.

18.2.7 Presentation

The Chart 1 files are symbolized by the NEWOBJ look-up table entries triggered by the
SYMINS attribute of the generic object NEWOBJ introduced by the supplement No. 1 of S-
57 Edition 3.1.1.

The README files give some specific Mariner settings, such as safety contour, that are
required to give the correct display.

The ECDIS Chart 1 and Colour Test diagram cells must be displayed full-screen (270 x 270
mm), i.e. at or larger than the compilation scale. Otherwise features such as centred
symbols may not be correctly illustrated.

The Mariner must be able to cursor-pick on any symbol on the Chart 1 display and get a text
read-out of the symbol meaning (LXPO field of the symbol library).

18.3 Displaying the Colour Test Diagram

18.3.1 Introduction; providing the diagram

The colour generating capability of any type of display screen will deteriorate with age and
the Colour Differentiation Test diagram is provided to enable the Mariner to verify that his
display screen still retains the colour differentiation capability needed to distinguish between
the various colour-coded areas, lines and point symbols of the ECDIS display.

The diagram will not be true to colour unless it is projected on a calibrated monitor and is
generated using the colour tables of Appendix A.

Two methods of providing the diagram are:

284
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 a) Use the S-57 format file labelled “C1WOO” containing the Colour
Differentiation Test Diagram, which is included on the Presentation Library
distribution CD. This file must be drawn so that the extent of the imaginary
chart data covers the entire ECDIS display. Because the file uses pseudo-S-
57 cartographic objects it must be displayed using the special look-up
provided for the digital ECDIS Chart 1.

b) Use the graphics file illustrated in section 16.3 as a model. Based on this
model, reproduce the same pattern of rectangles and lines on the screen, but
present them in the correct colours using the colour tokens given immediately
below and the colour tables of Appendix A.

The diagram consists of twenty numbered squares extending over the whole of a 270 x 270
mm screen. Each square is coloured with one of the four main background area shades
(such as shallow water blue, DEPVS), and each carries a two-pixel wide diagonal line in one
of the important line or symbol foreground colours (such as planned route red, PLRTE).
These are arranged as follows:

Four main background colours:

DEPVS (shallow water blue) squares 3, 5, 11, 15, 18, 20.

DEPDW (deep water, white or black) squares 1, 7, 8, 10, 13, 19.
LANDA (land colour) squares 6, 14, 17.
NODTA (no data shade: radar, navigation safety squares 2, 4, 9, 12, 16.
lines and chartwork must be visible on the
no-data part of a display)

Six important foreground colours:

DEPSC (safety contour grey) squares 3, 10, 17.

NINFO (orange, Mariner's information) squares 5, 8, 14, 16.
ADINF (yellow, manufacturer's information) squares 12, 15, 19.
TRFCD (magenta, traffic lanes and area squares 1, 9, 11.
boundaries)
RADLO (the lower luminance radar green) squares 4, 6, 13, 18.
RESBL (blue, provisionally reserved for traffic info squares 2, 7, 20.
from transponder, VTS etc.)

Note: Remember that a tif, .pdf or other source will not be true to colour unless it has been
specifically modified to access the colour tokens and colour tables used by the ECDIS.

Although originally designed for use on CRTs, this test must be extended to LCD and other
screens.

18.3.2 Using the diagram

The Colour Test must be applied on the day and dusk colour tables.

Before the Colour Test diagram is used, the black-adjust symbol SY(BLKADJ01) must be
brought up on the screen and the contrast and brightness controls (or equivalent controls for
an LCD) must be adjusted as follows:

285
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
 1. First, set contrast to a maximum, brightness to a minimum. Look at the black-
adjust symbol. Then either:

2A. If the centre square is not visible, turn up the brightness until it just appears.

OR:
2B. If the centre square is clearly visible (with contrast at maximum, brightness at
minimum), turn the contrast down until the inner square disappears, then turn
contrast back up until the inner square is just visible again.

(If the above adjustment is not successful, select a more appropriate colour
table and repeat this procedure).

The "black level" is then correctly set. If a brighter display is required use the contrast
control, but preferably do not adjust the controls unless lighting conditions on the bridge
change.

The test consists of being able to distinguish the background colours and to pick out the like
foreground colours, i.e. to say that squares 3, 5, 11, 15, 18 and 20 all have a shallow water
blue background, and that squares 3, 10 and 17 have a grey line.

NOTE: The test above uses the black-adjust symbol for the purpose of a type approval test.
The other purpose of the black-adjust symbol SY(BLKADJ01) is to allow the mariner to
adjust the display for ambient illumination on the bridge of a ship. An ECDIS must have the
black-adjust symbol displayed whenever the mariner is adjusting the display (i.e. depending
on the technology of the display brilliance, brightness, contrast, etc.), as required by section
4.2.4.5 of S-52 e6.1.0.

18.4 Grey Scale

A grey scale may be used by service technicians to detect display ageing or other display
performance issues.

Eight grey strips are recommended, spaced between the minimum and the maximum
luminance for each of the five mandatory colour tables.

The bit levels or signal levels producing the grey levels are evenly spaced from the level
producing white to the level producing black. In order to select the appropriate grey level
from a large set of available grey levels, use one of the following models:

1. Bit Levels in Software: Given n levels of grey that can be displayed on a screen,
with 0 for black and w = n - 1 for white. We want to select a subset of m levels that
are as evenly spaced as possible. The interval between the n levels to create m
levels is ΔV = w/(m-1), which may not be an integer. So, the levels to select are the
(integer) values of Vi= int[(i-1) ΔV] for i = 1, 2, ..., m, or Vi= 0, int(ΔV), int(2ΔV),
int(3ΔV), ..., int[(m-1) ΔV], with int[(m-1) ΔV] = w for white. For example, if there are n
= 256 = 28 levels from which we select m = 8 levels, white is w = 255; the interval is
ΔV = 36.4286, and the chosen levels are: 0, 36, 73,109, 146, 182, 219, 255.

2. Analog Signal Levels: For analog signals, if Vw is the white level and Vb is the black
level, then for m levels the signal step size is ΔV = (Vw - Vb)/m and Vj= Vb + jΔV.

286
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
19 Supply and Amendment of the Digital Presentation Library
The word-processed version of the Presentation Library is the "official" version. A limited
digital version in .dai format is provided on the CD-ROM containing the word-processed
Presentation Library as a manufacturer's option for edition 4.0.0, but may not be provided for
succeeding editions. This digital version consists of look-up tables; symbols; and colour
tables and is supplied in ASCII format in the .dai file.

The edition number appears in the LBID line at the start of the .dai file where it is coded
digitally and also spelled out in plain language.

19.1 Amending the digital Presentation Library

(See also S-52, sections 1.2.3 and 1.2.4)

Amendments to the Presentation Library, if available, will be posted on the IHO website
(www.iho.int > Standards & Publications > Download > Maintenance Section).

An immediate amendment (but not a deferred amendment) will change the edition number of
the Presentation Library.

The edition number of the PresLib installed must be available to the Mariner on request.

19.2 Internal Structure of the Transfer File

The PSLBmm_n.dai file has a particular internal structure. In the format description (see
section 12), several constructs (modules, fields, etc.) are used to convey colour tables, look-
up tables, symbols, patterns and linestyles.

The transfer file is formed of one or more modules. Each module is formed of one module
record. Each module record is formed of one or more fields which in turn is formed of one or
more subfields.

This structure is explained below:

PSLBmm_n.dai (module group)

│
│
└──── modules [N]
│
│
│
└────── module record [1]
│
│
│
└───── fields [N]
│
│
│
└────── subfields [N]

287
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014
The lowest level construct, the subfield, must only contain one elementary data item, for
example, one colour coordinate or one symbology instruction. Formatted subfields, such as
the subfields that contain the vector image definitions, must be further resolved by an
application program. In this specification, subfields are not divisible.

The field tag is a unique 4 character field type which links an instance of a field type in a
data record to the data descriptive record that defines the syntax of that field type.

The subfield label is a 4 character label, present only in the data descriptive record of a file,
required to identify the subfields within a field type. A label preceded by an "*" signifies that
that subfield, and any subsequent ones, repeat within the field. This, therefore, indicates the
presence of an array or table, for which the subfield labels provide the column headings.

Subfield data type codes uses data types as follows:

A signifies character data,

I signifies implicit point representation (integer),
R signifies explicit point representation (real or float),

An extent of X(n) indicates a fixed length subfield of length n. An extent of X(1/15) indicates
a variable length subfield terminated by the delimiter "1/15" (that is ASCII 1F hexa-decimal
or 31 decimal).

__________

288
S-52 PresLib e4.0.0 Part I September 2014